Home

R&S FPS-K7 Analog Demodulation User Manual

1. 1 50 MHz RRE 122 NSS e EEN 123 Delete Value E 123 lee 123 UI 123 e EE 123 Name Defines the limit line name All names must be compatible with Windows conventions for file names The limit line data is stored under this name with a LIN extension Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt NAME on page 269 Comment Defines an optional comment for the limit line The text may contain up to 40 charac ters Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt COMMent on page 265 Threshold Defines an absolute threshold value only for relative scaling of the y axis Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer THReshold on page 269 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer THReshold on page 272 Limit Line Settings and Functions Margin Defines a margin for the limit line The default setting is 0 dB i e no margin Remote command CALCulate n LIMit k LOWer MARGin on page 267 CALCulate n LIMit k UPPer MARGin on page 270 X Axis Describes the horizontal axis on which the data points of the limit line are defined Includes the following settings Domain Hz for frequency domain s for time domain e Scaling mode absolute or relative Hz s 96 values For relative values the frequencies are referred to the currently set center fre quency In the zero span mode the left boundary of the diagram is used as the ref erence e Scaling linear or
2. eene 41 SE SERIES EN eege eege 43 5 1 Default Settings for Analog Demodulation eene 43 5 2 Configuration According to Digital Standards eee 44 5 3 Configuration Ov rvi W lt 4 lt ncccce lt ceceecerecnncesesscceceeesseecaeesersncacerceeseeedeeressesterseeeacecescesses 46 5 4 Input and Frontend Settings esee nennen nnne nnn 48 5 5 Tigger Configuration 2 rere EE 68 5 0 data Acquisition oreet in kien an eea Muse R FERE NAR a Er RE RPRRNRKRKARER ERE HESS eO raea edeg 73 5 7 Demodulation Display cec cccsccecesseccceeeesceecceneesetcceeseesececeenseccceceneeseceetesenseeteesesneeees 78 59 Demodulatlon o Pee E mei pete oiii ee 78 S9 e E e Eee eei seri iu eere 94 5 10 Automatic Settings ehe tret idee eei eI 96 BEE 99 6 1 Trace SOU Deeg Ee geed eege 99 User Manual 1176 8474 02 06 3 R amp S9FPS K7 Contents 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 7 1 7 2 10 11 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 11 7 11 8 11 9 11 10 11 11 B 1 B 2 Trace Data Export Configuration eeeeeeeeeeeeeeenennenennennn nnne nnns 103 Working with Markers in the R amp S FPS Analog Demodulation application 104 Limit Line Settings and Functions esee 117 rnulithuonc 123 Analysis in MSRA Mode iine ena iain nnns in aaa nn
3. 127 IQ Import 127 Line Config 117 Lower Level Hysteresis AA 98 Marker Config 105 107 Marker t TTaCO ee ce tite e exa 107 Meas Time 15 77 Meastime AUTO iiiter dre edd 98 Meastime Manual esses 98 Mili iere ss raus 112 Next Peak gece 141 Norm Delta eere teret patre rr reete ee nee 106 Outputs Config 94 Overview 46 Peak 111 PM Offline lO Power Sensor Config 58 Preamp ee 65 Ref Level 63 Ref Level Offset 63 Refresh af Res EE 75 REONE EM 70 RF Atten Auto 64 RF Atten Manual 64 RF Power ad Scale Config 88 Search Config Select Marker Single Sweep 216 Span Manual 84 Sweep count nof Trace 1 2 3 4 102 Trace Config 99 Trigger Offset el Upper Level Hysteresis rnm 98 Sort mode Peaklisb dde es 116 Source offset External generator etie eite rre 53 Source power External generator eterne rr ran 53 SPAM ipiis irinte 84 Displayed 2 11 LETTRE 84 Speaker Remote Control oinnia meu gd 173 Specifics for ele eu 48 Spectrum Bue Leif en WE ER Squelch E 79 EGV8l ioris Mi ences At Eee eee Pa ig daten 80 Remote control 44 195 Stata E ONY oe eh eee 79 Standards Predetined 1502 in aos pcdes 286
4. 167 SYSTem COMMunicate PEXPress RESGOah 2 2 ertt eiii ess REESEN 167 GvGTemCOMMunicate HR DEVice GENerator NTertace eren 167 GvGTemCGOMMunicate HR DEVice GENerator TbptE seen nnns nn ennt nans 168 SYSTem COMMunicate TCPip RDEVice GENerator ADDRess eese 168 SOURce EXTernal ROSCillator SOURce Source This command controls selection of the reference oscillator for the external generator If the external reference oscillator is selected the reference signal must be connected to the rear panel of the instrument Parameters Source INTernal the internal reference is used EXTernal the external reference is used if none is available an error flag is displayed in the status bar RST INT Example SOUR EXT ROSC EXT Switches to external reference oscillator Configuring the Measurement Manual operation See Reference on page 52 SYSTem COMMunicate PEXPress RDEVice GENerator ADDRess lt SerialNo gt This command sets the PCle serial number of the R amp S FPS Parameters lt SerialNo gt string PCle serial number RST not changed during preset Example SYST COMM PEXP RDEV GEN ADDR 100015 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Serial Number on page 52 SYSTem COMMunicate PEXPress RDEVice GENerator ADDRess CATalog This command queries the available PCle serial numbers of the R amp S FPS Return values lt SerialNos gt string available PCle ser
5. sessi rennen 202 SENSe3JFI Tersp HPASS S TATO erre EnO iore enu y Eee O SEU Eeer SENSe FIETer n EL PASs FREQuUuency MANUal cen tnnt int a SENSe FILTer lt n gt LPASs FREQuency RELative SENSe FlLTer lt n gt LPASs FREQuency ABSolute SENSe FILTersn gt EPASS S T Tel eschen ra ette e d do de pr Eed EEN SENSe FREQUENCy CEN WK EE SENSe FREQUENCYZ CENTOS E geess apostema ou erageet SENSe FREQu ncy CEN Fer STEP UNK 0204 EIERE Se aetna SENSe FREQu ncy CENTerSTEP EINK FACT Of iiciesciascneduniieniicsciniiaiincaidin anne 175 SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet SENSe PMETer lt p gt DCY Cl ET 156 SENSe PMETer lt p gt DCY Clef STA T E 156 SENSE JPME Ters p gt FREQUENCY anaietan EEE era SEE ENTRE od TE E EEEO CUN S V ax aani 156 SENS amp e PMETer p FREQuency LINK nro eege erre tee netten pas 157 EIST TE ORK E 157 SENSe PMETersps MTIMe AVERage G OU INL ratore eue tee aree pereat een ETETEN 158 SENSe PMETer p MTIMe AVERage S TA Te rrt enn eere 158 SENSe IPMETersps ROFESelt S KEE 158 E ET EE ER HE 160 SENSe PMETer sp TRIGger HOLIDJOIT iit rent tnr tnter n t e tr iter there 161 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger HYSTeresis 161 SENSE PME Ter lt p gt TRIGE LE Clic o ene percent rto rrt emer EFE Sp ATINS Ha eve g gt HE n eee Fete RES nee E eMe ERA erasa 161 SENS amp PMETersp TRIGger SLOBe t rt ro a eterni ne tot RE ERI E 162 SENSe PMETersp TR
6. 138 Demodulation bandwidth a 198 Overload external generator RF Spectr m i n 138 SINAD 138 TAD uci e Edda te pete D teda ut 138 U Bc ss Power sensor Reference level sssssssssssseeeeeenee 63 64 Updating Result display seinoria rne ane in nea Lb et Reus 77 Result display remote ceceecesereeseeeeeereeteeeseeaee 221 Upper Level Elysteresis cent nre es 98 User un EU 6 V View filter Limit e ET 119 Visible Limit NES E 119 Volume Remote COMTO etie e treten iens 173 Ww Weighting filter piis 86 Window title bar information eeeeees 11 Windows Addirig remote 2 idees 226 Closing remote iere 228 230 Configuring WEE Layout remote S Maximizing remote A Querying remote A Replacing remote m Splittinig remote cz nt e Types remote 3 2 n en premens X X axis Limit NES D M 122 X Offset Blut d 119 X value DET TEE S eg 106 Y Y axis Elem 122 Scaling TE EN Y Offset LEimit lirigs ect e i naar aes tenete deed 120 YIG preselector Activating Deactivating eeseseessess Activating Deactivating remote Z Zero Phase Reference Position Segoe isrener Reference Position remote Zeroing Tee TE 59 Zooming Activating remote rinis eww eet cee eet 278 Area Multiple mode remote
7. R amp S FPS K7 Contents Contents E ooo 5 Li About this Mannal etEESEEEEEEEEEEEEEENEEEESEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEREEEREEEEEEESEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEShEEEEER 5 1 2 Documentation Overview eeeeeeeeeeeeee nennen nennen enn nennen nn nnn nen an nnn nnn nnn nennen 6 1 3 Typographical Conventions eeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeene nennen nnne nnne nnns 7 2 Welcome to the Analog Demodulation Application 8 2 1 Starting the Analog Demodulation Application eeeeenen 8 2 2 Understanding the Display Information eese 10 3 Measurements and Result Displays esee 13 4 Measurement Basile ntreu tnu inita brano cuneus iso susESEa a uud 24 4 1 Demodulation PrOCosSs niin isrener aranan arrra 24 4 2 Demodulation Bandwidth eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneenen nnn nnne nennen nnns 26 4 3 Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset eeeees 27 AA NEM mP 29 AS AF Filters nee n ee end acre c e Fe ce EE LER d adn 29 4 6 Time Domain ZoOOm 2 ioter inane inan nube unus Rs iun uana Ras n uuu AR RR RRR AR ASR RR RR RARE RR Rin 29 4 7 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output eene 31 4 8 Analog Demodulation in MSRA Operating Mode
8. R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores the captured UO data to the specified file Manual operation See IO Export on page 127 Commands for Compatibility 11 10 Commands for Compatibility The following commands are provided for compatibility to other signal analyzers only For new remote control programs use the specified alternative commands MLE Ea lp FEED ate ad H 283 CALCulate lt n gt FEED lt Evaluation gt This command selects the evaluation method of the measured data that is to be dis played in the specified window Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the LAYout commands for new remote control programs see chapter 11 6 2 Working with Win dows in the Display on page 225 Parameters lt Evaluation gt Type of evaluation you want to display See the table below for available parameter values Example INST SEL ADEM Activates analog demodulator CALC FEED XTIM FM Selects the display of the FM signal I Table 11 5 Evaluation parameter values for the AnalogDemod application Parameter Evaluation XTIM AM RELative AM Time Domain XTIM AM RELative AFSPectrum AM Spectrum XTIM FM FM Time Domain XTIM FM AFSPectrum FM Spectrum XTIM PM PM Time Domain XTIM PM AFSPectrum PM Spectrum XTIM SPECtrum RF Spectrum XTIM AM RF Time Domain RF power XTI
9. 100 Mode remote ttt re na 212 Remote Conto e C 231 Retrieving results remote ssssssss 231 Settings remote control pe 212 Settings predefined 5 2 teer 102 Traces to be Checked Bug Ur 119 Tracking see Extemal generator ee ente 53 Transducers Calibration with external generator 36 57 Transmission measurement Calibration external generator ve External generator ecce eet ten Trigger Drop out time a1 Drop out time Power sensor a02 External remote 190 External power 61 Lloldoff isein ni 12 Holdoff Power sensor 62 HYySTETES S eot a 4 Hysteresis Power sensor 62 Level Power sensor a61 OSE EE 71 Offset EE ne EE 27 Quitp t saiisine 72 95 Power sensor Remote control 186 Iu e M 68 SIDE rt 72 190 Slope Power sensor avissini niaes aaeain 62 Tigger level E 71 External trigger remote 2n 187 UO Power remote 188 IF Power remote RF Power remote Trigger SOURCE sii erret rere rr re eer ener 69 BE uin 29 AM Offline ve EI External 69 FM Offline Free Run UO Power IF Power PM Offline RF Offline RF Power AU Settings 69 Troubleshooting
10. Area remote Deactivating 124 Multi PIG MODS erm emnes 123 Multiple mode remote 278 279 cio c e 277 Restoring original display 124 Single mode n 000 a123 Single mode remote siressa 277 lei TE 29 80
11. User Manual 1176 8474 02 06 35 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output If approximation becomes too poor however normalization is aborted and an error message is displayed see chapter 4 7 1 8 Displayed Information and Errors on page 39 The normalized trace in the display The normalized reference trace is also displayed in the spectrum diagram by default at the top of the diagram 100 of the window height It is indicated by a red line labeled NOR followed by the current reference value However it can be shifted ver tically to reflect an attenuation or gain caused by the measured DUT see also Shifting the reference line and normalized trace on page 37 Restoring the calibration settings If the measurement settings no longer match the instrument settings with which the calibration was performed indicated by the APX or no label next to Ext TG in the channel bar you can restore the calibration settings which are stored with the refer ence dataset on the R amp S FPS Storing the normalized reference trace as a transducer factor The inverse normalized reference trace can also be stored as a transducer factor for use in other R amp S FPS applications that do not support external generator control The normalized trace data is converted to a transducer with unit dB and stored in a file with the specified name and the suffix trd under c r_s instr trd The frequency points are allocated in equid
12. Delete Value Deletes the selected data point in the Edit Limit Line dialog box Shift x Shifts the x value of each data point horizontally by the defined shift width as opposed to an additive offset defined for the entire limit line see X Offset on page 119 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol SHIFt on page 266 Shift y Shifts the y value of each data point vertically by the defined shift width as opposed to an additive offset defined for the entire limit line see Y Offset on page 120 Remote command CALCulate n LIMit k LOWer SHIFt on page 268 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer SHIFt on page 271 Save Saves the currently edited limit line under the name defined in the Name field 6 5 Zoom Functions The zoom functions are only available from the toolbar For details on the zoom functions see the R amp S FPS User Manual SINGIS ZOOM Em 123 DUNG VS OO TE 123 Restore Original DISDIay 2 3 reticere detnr d EENS et tva ei c erede 124 R Deactivating Zoom Selection model 124 Single Zoom R A single zoom replaces the current diagram by a new diagram which displays an enlarged extract of the trace This function can be used repetitively until the required details are visible Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 278 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M AREA on page 277 Multiple Zoom Analysis in MSRA Mode In multiple zoom mode you can
13. For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FPS User Manual Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe on page 234 Trace Export Configuration Export Opens the Traces dialog box to configure the trace and data export settings See chapter 6 2 Trace Data Export Configuration on page 103 UO Export Export Opens a file selection dialog box to select an export file to which the IQ data will be stored This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process I Q data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applications Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available 7 2 How to Export and Import I Q Data To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FPS User Manual Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt 10 STATe on page 282 MMEMory STORe lt n gt 1IQ COMMent on page 282 How to Export and Import UO Data UO data can only be exported in applications that process I Q data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications
14. Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate PEXPress RESCan on page 167 Frequency Min Frequency Max For reference only Lower and upper frequency limit for the generator Level Min Level Max For reference only Lower and upper power limit for the generator Measurement Settings The measurement settings for external generator control are configured in the Mea surement Configuration subtab of the External Generator tab Input and Frontend Settings Input Source Power Sensor External Generator Measurement Configuration Source State Interface Source Power Configuration Source Offset Source Calibration Frequency Coupling Coupling State Source Freq RF Offset Result Frequency Start Result Frequency Stop Le E eens dd eene NENNEN EES EE EE eege edd dee Source Freggency Coup DEE Manual Source e Le EE Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denominator Offset Resul requency Sae a Result Erequetnioy SHOP EE Source State Activates or deactivates control of an external generator Remote command SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 165 Source Power The output power of the external generator The default output power is 20 dBm The range is specified in the data sheet Remote command SOURce EXTernal POWer LEVel on page 165 Source Offset Constant level offset for the external generator Values from 200 dB to 200 dB in 1 dB
15. State Usage Manual operation ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 SCPI confirmed See Include Instrument Measurement Settings on page 103 FORMat DEXPort TRACes Selection This command selects the data to be included in a data export file see MMEMory STORe n TRACe on page 234 Parameters Selection Usage Manual operation SINGIe Only a single trace is selected for export namely the one speci fied by the MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe command ALL Selects all active traces and result tables e g Result Summary marker peak list etc in the current application for export to an ASCII file The trace parameter for the MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe command is ignored RST SINGle SCPI confirmed See Export all Traces and all Table Results on page 103 Retrieving Results 11 7 3 Retrieving Result Summary Values The result summary contains measurement values that are calculated from the trace data For details see Result Summary on page 21 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod AFRequency RESult 236 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod AM RESUuIt lt t gt ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeees 236 CAL Culate nzM Abkerzmz FUNGCHonADEMod EMIREGutetsI nsee 236 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod PM RESUuIt lt t gt ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaes 236 CALOCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod AM RESult t RELa
16. The iq tar container packs several files into a single tar archive file Files in tar format can be unpacked using standard archive tools see http en wikipedia org wiki Comparison of file archivers available for most operating systems The advantage of tar files is that the archived files inside the tar file are not changed not com pressed and thus it is possible to read the UO data directly within the archive without the need to unpack untar the tar file first Sample iq tar files If you have the optional R amp S FPS VSA application R amp S FPS K70 some sample iq tar files are provided in the C R S Instr user vsa DemoSignals directory on the R amp S FPS Contained files An iq tar file must contain the following files e Q parameter XML file e g xyz xm1 Contains meta information about the UO data e g sample rate The filename can be defined freely but there must be only one single UO parameter XML file inside an ig tar file e Q data binary file e g xyz complex f10oat32 Contains the binary I Q data of all channels There must be only one single UO data binary file inside an iq tar file Optionally an iq tar file can contain the following file e Q preview XSLT file e g open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt Contains a stylesheet to display the UO parameter XML file and a preview of the UO data in a web browser A sample stylesheet is available at http www rohde schwarz com file o
17. Usage Query only SENSe ADEMod lt n gt SET lt SampleRate gt lt RecordLength gt TriggerSource lt TriggerSlope gt lt OffsetSamples gt lt NoOfMeas gt This command configures the analog demodulator of the instrument lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt SampleRate gt numeric value The frequency at which measurement values are taken from the A D converter and stored in UO memory Allowed range refer to chapter 4 3 Sample Rate Measure ment Time and Trigger Offset on page 27 RST 8 MHz lt RecordLength gt Number of samples to be stored in UO memory Range 1 to 400001 with AF filter or AF trigger active 1 to 480001 with both AF filter and AF trigger deactive RST 501 lt TriggerSource gt Selection of the trigger source to use for the demodulator For details on trigger sources see Trigger Source on page 69 IMMediate EXTernal EXT2 EXT3 IFPower RFPower AF AM AMRelative FM PM Note After selecting IF Power the trigger threshold can be set with the TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower command RST IMMediate lt TriggerSlope gt lt OffsetSamples gt lt NoOfMeas gt Example Configuring the Measurement POSitive NEGative Used slope of the trigger signal The value indicated here will be ignored for lt trigger source gt IMMediate RST POSitive Number of samples to be used as an offset to the trigger signal For details refer to chapter 4 3
18. niaaa tata 175 Configuring the Measurement SENSe FREQuency CENTer lt Frequency gt This command defines the center frequency Parameters lt Frequency gt The allowed range and fmax is specified in the data sheet UP Increases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command DOWN Decreases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Center frequency on page 67 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP lt StepSize gt This command defines the center frequency step size You can increase or decrease the center frequency quickly in fixed steps using the SENS FREQ UP AND SENS FREQ DOWN commands see SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 174 Parameters lt StepSize gt fmax iS specified in the data sheet Range 1 to fMAX RST 0 1 x span Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 67 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK lt CouplingType gt This command couples and decouples the center frequency step size to the span or the re
19. 38 54 Average COUN cnc eer 77 102 POWGISCNSOM i eni eer rn nr re dee 61 Average mode UC o EET E 101 Averaging Traces remote control 2 rire 217 B SET Ur ET ne 74 Cc Calibration Externalgeherator econtra texere ek oer deos External generator remote Normalization external generator Reference trace external generator Reflection open measurement external generator 56 Reflection short measurement external generator 56 Restoring settings external generator 36 56 Storing results external generator 35 Transmission measurement external generator 56 Capture offset MSRA appliGatioriSi s coerente rr ret rta mass 75 Remote eg Softkey Capturing I Qi alta remote oce rere 218 Carrier Offset FOWOE EE CCIR filter AE filets tori ES t tis 86 CCITT filter le 86 Center frequency DI 84 Automatic configuration esses 97 Displayed 2510 11 Softkey 67 84 iier 67 Channel bar Information external generator ccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 39 Closing Channels remote ariii ee ees 146 Windows remote Comment limit lies EE 121 Compatibility L imibli es 2 ne rr eene rear 119 Conditions Measuremeht 2 2 s EE 24 Configuration Measurement remote PIOGGdFe rm eter etes eese cav veter todo Conti
20. 50 Hz 200 Hz demodulation bandwidth lt 3 MHz Demodulation 300 Hz 800 Hz demodulation bandwidth lt 8 MHz Manual A high pass filter with the manually defined frequency is used Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt HPASs STATe on page 203 SENSe FILTer lt n gt HPASs FREQuency ABSolute on page 202 SENSe FILTer lt n gt HPASs FREQuency MANual on page 202 Low Pass Defines a low pass filter type Relative and absolute low pass filter are available Absolute low pass filters Absolute filters are indicated by the 3 dB cutoff frequency The 3 kHz 15 kHz and 23 kHz filters are designed as 5th order Butterworth filters 30 dB octave The 150 kHz filter is designed as 8th order Butterworth filter 48 dB octave The absolute low pass filters are active in the following demodulation bandwidth range Filter type Demodulation bandwidth 3 kHz 6 4 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 3 MHz 15 kHz 50 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 8 MHz 23 kHz 50 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 18 MHz 150 kHz 400 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 8 MHz Manual A low pass filter with the manually defined frequency is used e Relative low pass filters Relative filters 3 dB can be selected in of the demodulation bandwidth The fil ters are designed as 5th order Butterworth filter 30 dB octave and active for all demodulation bandwidths e None deactivat
21. AVERage lt n gt TYPE on page 217 Average Count Determines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures If the trace modes Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set In continuous sweep mode if sweep count 0 default averaging is performed over 10 sweep s For sweep count 1 no averaging maxhold or minhold operations are performed Remote command SENSe AVERage lt n gt COUNt on page 216 Predefined Trace Settings Quick Config Commonly required trace settings have been predefined and can be applied very quickly by selecting the appropriate button Function Trace Settings Preset All Traces Trace 1 Clear Write Traces 2 6 Blank Set Trace Mode Trace 1 Max Hold Max Avg Min Trace 2 Average Trace 3 Min Hold Traces 4 6 Blank Set Trace Mode Trace 1 Max Hold EENS Trace 2 Clear Write Trace 3 Min Hold Traces 4 6 Blank Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys Displays the Traces settings and focuses the Mode list for the selected trace Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe on page 214 Trace Data Export Configuration 6 2 Trace Data Export Configuration The standard data management functions e g saving or loading instrument settings that are available for all R amp S FPS applications are not described here See the R amp S FPS User Manual for a description of the standard functions Trace and data export
22. Adds an additional spectrum display named Spectrum 2 INSTrument CREate REPLace lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command replaces a measurement channel with another one Setting parameters ChannelName1 String containing the name of the measurement channel you want to replace lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 146 lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the name of the new channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see INSTrument LIST on page 146 Example INST CRE REPL Spectrum2 IQ IQAnalyzer Replaces the channel named Spectrum2 by a new measure ment channel of type IQ Analyzer named IQAnalyzer Usage Setting only INSTrument DELete lt ChannelName gt This command deletes a measurement channel If you delete the last measurement channel the default Spectrum channel is activa ted Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel you want to delete A measurement channel must exist in order to be able delete it Example INST DEL Spectrum4 Deletes the channel with the name Spectrum4 Usage Event INSTrument LIST This command queries all active measurement channels This is useful in order to obtain the names of the existing
23. Calibration external generator sssss 56 Signal source Remote Signal to noise ratio Signal to noise and distortion see SINAD M M M SINAD EE Querying remote is Troubleshooting ET Single sweep ecl T eds 76 ne UE E 123 Slope Power sensot trigger 2 eerte nes 62 Trigger Ge Trigger Power sensor sese 62 Softkey Calibrate Reflection Open remote control 170 Calibrate Reflection Short remote control Calibrate Transmission remote control Normalize remote control sees Softkeys AF Auto Scale eret neret ec oM M ates AF Filter Config AF Full Span AF Span Manual AF Statt uus AF Stop uei uns All Functions Off 5 tte ertet tnn AM Offline cce ti po ach Meee Amplitude Config xs Auto All Auto Freq Auto Level Capture Offset ec Continue Single Sweep ener TT CONTINUOUS SWEEP arnein mr ttr 76 Demod BW 74 84 Demod Config ME 78 Display Config 18 Export zx d27 Export config 127 External 69 FM Offline 70 Free Run nsaaaisaenea 69 Frequency Config 82 UO Power a0 IF Power as 20 Import eins 127 Input Source Config 48 IQ Export
24. Example SYST COMM RDEV PMET2 DEF NRP Z81 123456 Assigns the power sensor with the serial number 123456 to the configuration Power Sensor 2 SYST COMM RDEV PMET2 DEF Queries the sensor assigned to Power Sensor 2 Result S NRP 281 0U8B 123456 The NRP Z81 power sensor with the serial number 123456 is assigned to the Power Sensor 2 Manual operation See Select on page 59 Configuring Power Sensor Measurements CALibration PMETer p ZERO AUTO ONDGE enini tentent neant nh nexa EE 154 CAL Culate nz PME Tercpz REL atvel MAGhNitudel eee eeee eee ee cae ee eee eeeteeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 154 CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude AUTO ONCE 155 CAL Culate nzPMETerps RELathvezfAate neret nennen 155 Configuring the Measurement Pe Cn Eesen e Ee 155 Lo BET EE 156 IGENZGeJpMETercpzDCvcielGratel cece eaeeeeaeaeaeeeaaaeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaned 156 ET e de E TE 156 SENSe PMETersp gt FREQUENCY isis iioii coco aiite ertet Ye EAE e vua AEREE ETE naar 156 SENSE PME Ters p gt FREQUEN y UNK ecann tena e pnt eh uet erg e eran eege 157 SENSe PMETersp MTIME 1 icucitu eri te nore one epp n RE ode e Rp Enn ERR Eh 157 SENSe PMETer p MTIMe AVERage COUNt esses nennen trennen rnnt 158 SENSe PMETer p MTIMe AVERage STATe sese 158 IGENZGe DM TerpzROFtsetGTATel enne nennen ener nre 158 SENS amp TPMETetr psES EAT EE
25. Input Source Settings on page 48 Preamplifier option B22 B24 Input Settings Switches the preamplifier on and off If activated the input signal is amplified by 20 dB If option R amp S FPS B22 is installed the preamplifier is only active below 7 GHz Input and Frontend Settings If option R amp S FPS B24 is installed the preamplifier is active for all frequencies Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 179 Input Coupling Input Settings The RF input of the R amp S FPS can be coupled by alternating current AC or direct cur rent DC AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 150 Impedance Input Settings The reference impedance for the measured levels of the R amp S FPS can be set to 50 O or 75 Q 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a 75 Q adapter of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 This value also affects the unit conversion see Reference Level on page 63 Remote command INPut IMPe
26. Input and Frontend Settings on page 48 2 Trigger See chapter 5 5 Trigger Configuration on page 68 3 Data Acquisition See chapter 5 6 Data Acquisition on page 73 4 Demod Display See chapter 5 7 Demodulation Display on page 78 5 Demodulation Settings See chapter 5 8 Demodulation on page 78 6 Analysis See chapter 6 Analysis on page 99 7 Optionally Outputs See chapter 5 9 Output Settings on page 94 To configure settings gt Select any button in the Overview to open the corresponding dialog box Select a setting in the channel bar at the top of the measurement channel tab to change a specific setting 5 4 5 4 1 Input and Frontend Settings Preset Channel Select the Preset Channel button in the lower lefthand corner of the Overview to restore all measurement settings in the current channel to their default values Note that the PRESET key restores the entire instrument to its default values and thus closes all measurement channels on the R amp S FPS except for the default Spectrum application channel For details see chapter 5 1 Default Settings for Analog Demodulation on page 43 Remote command SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute on page 148 Setup Standard Opens a file selection dialog box to select a predefined setup file See Setup Stand ard on page 45 Specifics for The measurement channel may contain several windows for different results
27. Parameters lt Peaks gt This parameter defines the number of peaks to find during the search Note that the actual number of peaks found during the search also depends on the peak excursion you have set with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt PEXCursion Range 1 to 200 Example CALC MARK PEXC 5 Defines a peak excursion of 5 dB i e peaks must be at least 5 dB apart to be detected as a peak CALC MARK FUNC FPE 10 Initiates a search for 10 peaks on the current trace CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks LIST SIZE lt MaxNoPeaks gt This command defines the maximum number of peaks that the R amp S FPS looks for dur ing a peak search Parameters lt MaxNoPeaks gt Maximum number of peaks to be determined Range 1 to 200 RST 50 Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE LIST SIZE 10 The marker peak list will contain a maximum of 10 peaks Manual operation See Maximum Number of Peaks on page 116 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks SORT lt SortMode gt This command selects the order in which the results of a peak search are returned Parameters lt SortMode gt X Sorts the peaks according to increasing position on the x axis Y Sorts the peaks according to decreasing position on the y axis RST X Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE SORT Y Sets the sort mode to decreasing y values Manual operation See Sort Mode on page 116 Analyzing Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer
28. Peak 2 Average of positive and negative peaks RMS Root Mean Square value User Manual 1176 8474 02 06 21 Label Description Mod Freq Modulation frequency SINAD Signal to noise and distortion Calculated only if AF Spectrum is displayed Measures the ratio of the total power to the power of noise and harmonic distortions The noise and harmonic power is calculated inside the AF spectrum span The DC offset is removed before the calculation total SINAD aB 20 0 ore power noise distortion power THD Total harmonic distortion The ratio of the harmonics to the fundamental and harmonics All harmonics inside the AF spectrum span are considered up to the tenth harmonic Calculated only if AF Spectrum is displayed ui THD aB 20 1og Note Relative demodulation results Optionally the demodulation results in relation to user defined or measured reference values are determined See chapter 5 8 6 Result Table Settings on page 92 In addition the following general information for the input signal is provided Carrier Power the power of the carrier without modulation Carrier Offset the deviation of the calculated carrier frequency to the ideal carrier frequency e Modulation Depth AM or RF Time Domain only the difference in amplitude the carrier signal is modulated with Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH RSUM See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 226 Results CALCulate
29. 100 ns RST 100 us Example PMET2 TRIG DTIMe 0 001 Configuring the Measurement SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger HOLDoff lt Holdoff gt This command defines the trigger holdoff for external power triggers Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Holdoff gt Time period that has to pass between the trigger event and the start of the measurement in case another trigger event occurs Range Os to 1s Increment 100 ns RST Os Example PMET2 TRIG HOLD 0 1 Sets the holdoff time of the trigger to 100 ms Manual operation See Trigger Holdoff on page 62 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt This command defines the trigger hysteresis for external power triggers The hysteresis in dB is the value the input signal must stay below the IF power trigger level in order to allow a trigger to start the measurement Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Hysteresis gt Range 3 dB to 50 dB Increment 1 dB RST 0 dB Example PMET2 TRIG HYST 10 Sets the hysteresis of the trigger to 10 dB Manual operation See Hysteresis on page 62 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger LEVel lt Level gt This command defines the trigger level for external power triggers This command requires the use of an R amp S NRP Z81 power sensor Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt Level gt 20 to 20 dBm Range 20 dBm to
30. ADDRess Address Configures the TCP IP address for the external generator Parameters Address TCP IP address between 0 0 0 0 and 0 255 255 255 RST 0 0 0 0 Example SYST COMM TCP RDEV GEN ADDR 130 094 122 195 Manual operation See TCP IP Address on page 51 Source Calibration The following commands are required to activate the calibration functions of the exter nal tracking generator However they are only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 165 Remote commands exclusive to source calibration DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue esses 169 SENSeTCORRectionGOLLect ACQuilel 2 22 72 121 aada ia etra Ernte 169 SENSeJCORRBection EN DE 170 SENSeJCORRectonmfs EGall 2 1 2 eas or reet Fe CR epa SET 170 SENSe ICORRection S FAT6 1 adicit ecet aptum aiani ainai anran ch Reo SEENEN EEN 170 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer GENerator neret 171 Configuring the Measurement DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue Value The command defines the power value assigned to the reference position in the grid for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant For external generator calibration measurements requires the optional External Gen erator Control this command defines the power offset value assigned to the reference position Parameters lt Value gt RST 0 dBm coupled to reference level
31. CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown STATe on page 262 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown RESult on page 262 n dB down Delta Value Defines the delta level from the reference marker 1 used to determine the bandwidth or time span Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown FREQuency on page 261 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown TIME on page 263 6 3 4 4 Deactivating All Marker Functions All special marker functions can be deactivated in one step Use the All Functions Off button in the Marker Functions dialog box 6 4 Limit Line Settings and Functions Up to 8 limit lines can be displayed simultaneously in the R amp S FPS Many more can be stored on the instrument e Limit Ling Managelrient i eee tene ipu netta necu cdi REENEN eee ae oaa nua ET Rud 117 e Limit Ens Betalls 2 e tte TONN 120 6 4 4 Limit Line Management Limit lines are managed in the Line Config dialog box which is displayed when you press the LINES key and then Lines Config softkey R amp S FPS K7 Analysis meme oe Limit Lines Display Lines MULTISTATUS_1 MULTISTATUS_2 X Offset MULTISTATUS_5 REMI Y Offset E d Comment View Filter k Show compatible Es Show all Show Lines for All Modes For the limit line overview the R amp S FPS searches for all stored limit lines with the file extension LIN in the limits
32. Demodulation spectrum 2 nete ennes 83 AP TIGGER e 27 29 All Functions SE 117 AM Offline SOKEY E 70 AM Spectrum Evaluation MEMO ceccsecccsceresserseesases recente 16 AM Time Domain el le UE 13 Amplitude Configuration SOoftKey i eret 62 Ge le EN EE 62 Analog Demodulation Measurement examples sese 132 Analysis Marker f nctioris treten err nen 113 FREMOE Control cierre rr eto irent 242 fupe 99 Analysis interval Configuration MSRA remote ssss 279 MSRA es e 73 181 ANALYSIS ING srera asa 42 V elle CT 124 Configuration MSRA remote ssssss 279 APX External Generator 2 oce nce e 35 39 AQT see Measurement time rre 10 ASCII trace export EE 240 lee oe o rece eege EE e cesta es 64 Auto Displayed EE 10 Eet UE 65 Manual Option Audio demodulation Volume remote control esses 173 Audio frequency EE 13 Auto adjustment Triggered measuremint nere 211 PAULO EU Baer CT 97 Auto frequellCy ner nn ohne irren 97 Auto level labii P Reference level E Ee Auto scaling Auto settings Meastime Auto sisi rentrer err ntn rer npe rng cues Meastime Manual err rr rts 98 Automatic coupling Frequencies external generator
33. FACTor NUMerator on page 164 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency OFFSet on page 165 Result Frequency Start For reference only The start frequency for the generator calculated from the config ured generator frequency and the start value defined for the R amp S FPS Result Frequency Stop For reference only The stop frequency for the generator calculated from the config ured generator frequency and the stop value defined for the R amp S FPS Source Calibration Functions The calibration functions of the external generator are available in the Source Calibra tion subtab of the External Generator tab but only if external generator control is active see Source State on page 53 Ow zs Spectrum d A Input Source Power Sensor Tracking Generator H Measurement Configuration Interface Configuration Source Calibration Calibfate Transmission is i i ceteris mra ee aeta eo a P c Maken aetna ee d ade 56 Calibrate Reflection e EE 56 Calibrate Reflection Open 56 Source Calibration Normalize 5 reca eee ee tc t e rr Dt a e res 56 FRO UE 56 Save AS Trd FACION EET T UTE 57 Reference POSIUOLD stage 57 Reference Value tret eei eee sette uere aet anas eee t dec ete deep eese tae dee eue qu 57 Input and Frontend Settings Calibrate Transmission Starts a transmission type measurement to determine a reference trace This trace is used to calculate the difference for the normalized values For details see chapt
34. ON OFF RST OFF Example PMET2 MTIM AVER ON Activates manual averaging Manual operation See Meas Time Average on page 60 SENSe PMETer lt p gt ROFFset STATe lt State gt This command includes or excludes the reference level offset of the analyzer for power sensor measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt State gt ON 1 Includes the reference level offset in the results OFF 0 Ignores the reference level offset RST 1 Example PMET2 ROFF OFF Takes no offset into account for the measured power Manual operation See Use Ref Lev Offset on page 61 SENSe PMETer lt p gt STATe State This command turns a power sensor on and off Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example PMET1 ON Switches the power sensor measurements on Manual operation See State on page 59 See Select on page 59 SENSe PMETer lt p gt UPDate STATe lt State gt This command turns continuous update of power sensor measurements on and off If on the results are update even if a single sweep is complete Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example PMET1 UPD ON The data from power sensor 1 is updated continuously Manual operation See Continuous Value Update on page 59 UNIT lt n gt PMETer lt p gt POWer lt
35. PM AFSPectrum RESult lt TraceMode gt SENSe JADEMod lt n gt SPECtrum RESult lt TraceMode gt This command reads the result data of the evaluated signal in the specified trace mode The data format of the output data block is defined by the FORMat command see FORMat DATA on page 233 The trace results are configured for a specific evaluation n is irrelevant The follow ing table indicates which command syntax refers to which evaluation method as well as the output unit of the results Command syntax Evaluation method Output unit AM ABSolute TDOMain RF time domain dBm AM RELative TDOMain AM time domain 96 AM RELative AFSPectrum AM spectrum 96 FM TDOMain FM time domain kHz FM AFSPectrum FM spectrum kHz PM TDOMain PM time domain rad or PM AFSPectrum PM spectrum rad or SPECtrum RF spectrum dBm logarithmic display or V linear display Query parameters lt TraceMode gt WRITe AVERage MAXHold MINHold VIEW The specified trace mode must be one of those configured by SENS ADEM lt Evaluation gt TYPE see SENSe J ADEMod lt n gt SPECtrum TYPE on page 215 Otherwise a query error is generated Example ADEM AM AVER MAXH MINH Sets up RF time domain results to be measured INIT WAI Starts measurement and waits for sync FORM ASC Selects output format EM AM RES AVER Reads RF time domain average results ADEM AM
36. Resolution bandwidth VBW 30000 Hz SWT 0 005 s Video bandwidth Sweep time Sweep Count 20 Number of sweeps set Ref Position 75 Position of reference level referred to diagram limits 0 lower edge Level Range 100 dB Display range in y direction Unit dB with x axis LOG 96 with x axis LIN User Manual 1176 8474 02 06 241 Analyzing Results File contents Description x Axis LIN Scaling of x axis linear LIN or logarithmic LOG y Axis LOG Scaling of y axis linear LIN or logarithmic LOG x Unit Hz Unit of x values Hz with span gt 0 s with span 0 dBm dB with statistics measurements y Unit dBm Unit of y values dB V A W depending on the selected unit with y axis LOG or with y axis LIN Data section for individual window Window 1 Frequency Sweep Window number and name Trace 1 Selected trace Trace Mode AVERAGE Display mode of trace CLR WRITE AVER AGE MAXHOLD MINHOLD Detector AUTOPEAK Detector set AUTOPEAK MAXPEAK MINPEAK AVER AGE RMS SAMPLE QUASIPEAK Values 1001 Number of measurement points 10000 10 3 15 7 10130 11 5 16 9 10360 12 0 17 4 Measured values lt x value gt lt y1 gt lt y2 gt lt y2 gt being available only with detector AUTOPEAK and containing in this case the smallest of the two measured values for a measurement point Data section for individual trace Tra
37. Search Settings tab of the Marker dialog box To display this tab do one of the following e Press the MKR key then select the Marker Config softkey Then select the hori zontal Search Settings tab e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker Config tab Then select the horizontal Search Settings tab Search Mode for Next Peak 110 Peak ECU SOn BEE 110 Search Mode for Next Peak Selects the search mode for the next peak search Left Determines the next maximum minimum to the left of the current peak Absolute Determines the next maximum minimum to either side of the current peak Right Determines the next maximum minimum to the right of the current peak Remote command chapter 11 8 1 4 Positioning the Marker on page 251 Peak Excursion Defines the minimum level value by which a signal must rise or fall so that it will be identified as a maximum or a minimum by the search functions Entries from 0 dB to 80 dB are allowed the resolution is 0 1 dB The default setting for the peak excursion is 6 dB Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt PEXCursion on page 251 Positioning Functions The following functions set the currently selected marker to the result of a peak search or set other characteristic values to the current marker value These functions are available as softkeys in the Marker To menu which is displayed when you press the MKR gt key or in the M
38. See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 65 INPut EATT STATe lt State gt This command turns the electronic attenuator on and off This command requires the electronic attenuation hardware option Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF 11 4 5 3 11 4 5 4 Configuring the Measurement Example INP EATT STAT ON Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 65 Configuring a Preamplifier INPUCGAIN GS TAT KEE 179 INPut GAIN STATe lt State gt This command turns the preamplifier on and off If activated the input signal is amplified by 20 dB If option R amp S FPS B22 is installed the preamplifier is only active below 7 GHz If option R amp S FPS B24 is installed the preamplifier is active for all frequencies Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP GAIN STAT ON Switches on 20 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier option B22 B24 on page 65 Scaling the Y Axis DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRAGe lt t gt Y SCALE ceccccccccceeceeneneneneeeeeeneteneneneneeeeeaeeeeeaee 179 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeteneneees 180 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MODE eese 180 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RPOSition seen 180 D
39. See on page 226 PM Time Domain Displays the phase deviations of the demodulated PM signal in rad or versus time User Manual 1176 8474 02 06 15 R amp S FPS K7 Measurements and Result Displays 1 PM Time Domain e iAP Clrw Ref 0 00 rad AC CF 100 0 MHz 1001 pts Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH XTIM PM See on page 226 AM Spectrum Displays the modulation depth of the demodulated AM signal in or dB versus AF span The spectrum is calculated from the demodulated AM signal in the time domain via FFT User Manual 1176 8474 02 06 16 R amp S FPS K7 Measurements and Result Displays 2 AM Spectrum e1AP Clrw Ref 100 00 96 AF CF 1 25 MHz 1001 pts AF Span 2 5 MHz Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH XTIMe AM REL AFSPectruml see L on page 226 FM Spectrum Displays the frequency deviations of the demodulated FM signal in Hz or dB versus AF span The spectrum is calculated from the demodulated AM signal in the time domain via FFT User Manual 1176 8474 02 06 17 R amp S FPS K7 Measurements and Result Displays 2 FM Spectrum e1AP Clrw Ref 250 00 kHz AF CF 1 25 MHz 1001 pts AF Span 2 5 MHz Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH XTIMe FM AFSPectruml see on page 226 PM Spectrum Displays the phase deviations of the demodulated PM signal in rad or dB versus AF span The spectrum is calculated from the demodulated AM signal in the time domain via FFT User Manual
40. The top of the diagram is 100 the bottom is 0 By default the 0 dB line is displayed at the top of the diagram 100 This setting is only available if normalization is on see Source Calibration Normalize on page 56 The reference line defined by the reference value and reference position is similar to the Reference Level defined in the Amplitude settings However this reference line only affects the y axis scaling in the diagram it has no effect on the expected input power level or the hardware settings The normalized trace 0 dB directly after calibration is displayed on this reference line indicated by a red line in the diagram If you shift the reference line the normalized trace is shifted as well Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition on page 180 Reference Value Defines the reference value to be displayed at the specified Result Frequency Start This setting can be used to shift the reference line and thus the normalized trace simi lar to the Shifting the Display Offset defined in the Amplitude settings shifts the ref erence level in the display Shifting the normalized trace is useful for example to reflect an attenuation or gain caused by the measured DUT If you then zoom into the diagram around the normal ized trace the measured trace still remains fully visible Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue on page 169 5 4
41. eral measured values are combined in one measurement point according to the method of the selected trace detector Remote command SENSe ADEMod n ZOOM STATe on page 197 Start Time Domain Zoom Defines the start time for the time domain zoom area For spectrum evaluations the start time is always 0 Remote command SENSe ADEMod n 200M STARt on page 196 Length Time Domain Zoom Defines the length of the time domain zoom area Enter the length as a time value manually or use the Auto setting to set the length to the current number of sweep points automatically Remote command SENSe ADEMod n 200M LENGth on page 196 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM LENGth MODE on page 196 Time per Division Time Domain Zoom Enables the Time Domain Zoom function and defines the zoom area length in one step The width of the zoom display is divided into 10 divisions thus by entering the time that is displayed in each division you indirectly define the zoom area length Time per Division 10 The starting point of the zoom area is determined automati cally To specify the starting point manually use the Start setting The Time per Division softkey is available from the main Analog Demodulation menu Zero Phase Reference Position PM Time Domain only Defines the position at which the phase of the PM demodulated signal is set to 0 rad The entry is made with respect to time In the default set
42. for all traces t is irrelevant The R amp S FPS adjusts the scaling of the y axis accordingly For measurements with the optional external generator control the command defines the position of the reference value Parameters Position RST 100 PCT AF spectrum display 50 PCT time display Example DISP TRAC Y RPOS 50PCT Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Position on page 57 See Reference Value Position on page 89 See Ref Level Position on page 91 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing lt ScalingType gt This command selects the scaling of the y axis for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant Configuring the Measurement For AF spectrum displays only the parameters LINear and LOGarithmic are permit ted Parameters lt ScalingType gt LOGarithmic Logarithmic scaling LiNear Linear scaling in LDB Linear scaling in the specified unit PERCent Linear scaling in RST LOGarithmic Example DISP TRAC Y SPAC LIN Selects linear scaling in Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Deviation on page 90 See Scaling on page 91 11 4 6 Configuring Data Acquisition The following remote commands are required to configure which data is to be acquired and then demodulated in a remote environment MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master channel actually captures data from the input signal The data acquisition commands for t
43. frequency lowpa carrier i frequency FM demodulator gen Coupling Trace Inter Trace Fein e fr ones e FM vaco peak FM SS k Detectors 1 2 pk pk amp ms GEES modulation frequency Trace Inter Trace Arithmetic Detector gt PM trace E peak PM peak Detectors 1 pk pk A rms Counter modulation frequency Fig 4 1 Block diagram of software demodulator Demodulation Bandwidth The AM DC FM DC and PM DC raw data of the demodulators is fed into the Trace Arithmetic block that combines consecutive data sets Possible trace modes are Clear Write Max Hold Min Hold and Average The output data of the Trace Arith metic block can be read via remote control SENS ADEM lt evaluation gt RES see SENSe ADEMod n AM ABSolute TDOMain RESult on page 232 The collected measured values are evaluated by the selected detector The result is displayed on the screen and can be read out via remote control In addition important parameters are calculated e A counter determines the modulation frequency for AM FM and PM average power carrier power RF power average frequency carrier frequency offset FM e The modulation depth or the frequency or phase deviation the deviations are determined from the trace data AC coupling is possible with FM and PM display 4 2 Demodulation Bandwidth The demodulation bandwidth determines the span of the signal that is demodulated It is not
44. if available on the R amp S FPS An internal YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FPS ensures that image frequen cies are rejected However this is only possible for a restricted bandwidth In order to use the maximum bandwidth for signal analysis you can deactivate the YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FPS which may lead to image frequency display Note that the YIG preselector is active only on frequencies greater than 8 GHz There fore switching the YIG preselector on or off has no effect if the frequency is below that value Remote command INPut FILTer YIG STATe on page 151 5 4 1 2 External Generator Control Settings The External Generator settings are available in the Input dialog box if the R amp S FPS External Generator Control option is installed For each measurement chan nel one external generator can be configured To switch between different configura tions define multiple measurement channels To display this dialog box press the INPUT OUPUT key and then select External Generator Config For more information on external generator control see chapter 4 7 1 Basics on Exter nal Generator Control on page 31 e Interface Configuration Eu e EE 50 e Measurement Settings A 52 e Source Calibration Funchlons nnne 55 Interface Configuration Settings The interface settings for the connection to the external generator are defined in the Interface Configuration subtab of the External Gene
45. 1176 8474 02 06 18 R amp S FPS K7 Measurements and Result Displays PAE Start 0 0 Hz AF Stop 1 0 MHz Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH XTIMe PM AFSPectruml see on page 226 RF Time Domain Displays the RF power of the input signal versus time The level values represent the magnitude of the UO data set User Manual 1176 8474 02 06 19 R amp S FPS K7 Measurements and Result Displays 1 RF Time Domain e iAP Clrw CF 100 0 MHz 1001 pts Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH XTIM AM see on page 226 RF Spectrum Displays the spectrum of the input signal In contrast to the Spectrum application the frequency values are determined using FFT from the recorded UO data set User Manual 1176 8474 02 06 20 R amp S FPS K7 Measurements and Result Displays rcr 100 0 MHz 1001 pts Span 1 0 MHz Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH XTIM SPECTRUM see on page 226 Result Summary The result summary displays the results of the demodulation functions for all windows in a table 4 Result Summary Carrier Power 7 17 dBm Carrier Offset 4 48 Hz Mod Depth 25 18 NAD Peak Peak iPeak RMS Mod Freq St THO AM 25 201 25 167 25 184 o 17 543 oe 1 0001 MHz 53 116 dB 58 491 dB For each demodulation the following information is provided Table 3 1 Result summary description Label Description Peak Positive peak maximum Peak Negative peak minimum
46. 20 dBm RST 10 dBm Example PMET2 TRIG LEV 10 dBm Sets the level of the trigger Manual operation See External Trigger Level on page 61 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger SLOPe lt Edge gt This command selects the trigger condition for external power triggers Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Edge gt POSitive The measurement starts in case the trigger signal shows a posi tive edge NEGative The measurement starts in case the trigger signal shows a neg ative edge RST POSitive Example PMET2 TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Slope on page 62 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger STATe lt State gt This command turns the external power trigger on and off This command requires the use of an R amp S NRP Z81 power sensor Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example PMET2 TRIG ON Switches the external power trigger on Manual operation See Using the power sensor as an external trigger on page 61 Configuring the Measurement 11 4 2 3 External Generator Control External generator control commands are available if the R amp S FPS External Generator Control option R amp S FPS B10 is installed For each measurement channel one exter nal generator can be configured To switch between different configurations define multiple measurement channels For more information on ext
47. 86 Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example FILT CCIR WEIG ON Activates the weighted CCIR filter Manual operation See Weighting on page 86 SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIR UNWeighted STATe State This command activates deactivates the unweighted CCIR filter in the specified win dow For details on weighting filters see Weighting on page 86 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example FILT CCIR UNW ON Activates the unweighted CCIR filter Manual operation See Weighting on page 86 SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIT State This command activates deactivates the CCITT CCITT P 53 weighting filter for the specified evaluation For details on weighting filters see Weighting on page 86 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example FILT CCIT ON Activates the CCITT weighting filter Manual operation See Weighting on page 86 SENSe FILTer lt n gt DEMPhasis TCONstant This command selects the deemphasis for the specified evaluation For details on deemphasis refer to Deemphasis on page 87 Parameters 25 us 50 us 75 us 750 us RST 50 us Example FILT DEMP TCON 750us Selects the deemphasis for the demodulation bandwidth range from 800 Hz to 4 MHz with a time constant of 750 us Configuring the Measurement Manual operation See Deemphasis on page 87 SENSe FILTer lt n gt DEMPhasis STATe lt State gt This c
48. AF CF 50 0 kHz 100 pts 4 Result Summary Carrier Power 10 37 dBm Carrier Offset 649 07 Hz Peak Peak Peak RMS Mod Freq SINAD THD FM 50 143 kHz 48 844 kHz 49 494 kHz 34 959 kHz 10 000 kHz 65 026 dB 66 413 dB Note that while the reference values at the top of both y axes are now identical the reference values indicated in the window title bars are not This is due to the fact that by default in AF time domain displays the reference value is defined at the reference position 50 center of diagram while in AF frequency domains it is defined at the position 100 top of diagram ESCH User Manual 1176 8474 02 06 137 10 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Mea surement If the results do not meet your expectations consider the following notes and tips to optimize the measurement Determining the demodulation bandwidth A frequent cause for measurement errors and false results is an incorrectly defined demodulation bandwidth DBW If the DBW is too large the actual signal takes up only a small part of the demodulated range That means that any noise or additional signal parts may be included in the measured results which are then false On the other hand if the DBW is too small part of the signal is cut off and thus not included in the calculation of the results An easy way to determine the required DBW is to display the RF spectrum of the input signal If the entire signal is displayed there and takes up
49. AM time domain 0 PCT FM time domain 0 Hz PM time domain 0 rad AM spectrum 100 PCT FM spectrum 250 kHz PM spectrum 10 rad Example DISP TRAC Y RVAL 0 Sets the value assigned to the reference position to 0 Hz Manual operation See Reference Value on page 89 Scaling for RF Evaluation These commands are required for RF evaluations and the result summary DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition on page 180 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 180 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 179 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE on page 180 Units The units define how the demodulated data is displayed UNITS ANGLE ct E sd eee reu e e ra c dern a e d nr te edt e e E e aa 205 WINS rapper TETE 205 UNIT lt n gt ANGLe Unit This command selects the unit for angles for PM display lt n gt is irrelevant This command is identical to CALC UNIT ANGL Parameters Unit DEG RAD RST RAD Example UNIT ANGL DEG Manual operation See Phase Unit Rad Deg on page 92 UNIT lt n gt THD Mode Selects the unit for THD measurements lt n gt is irrelevant This command is identical to CALC UNIT THD Parameters Mode DB PCT RST DB Example UNIT THD PCT Manual operation See THD Unit DB on page 92 Configuring the Measurement 11 4 8 9 Relative Demodulat
50. Analyzing Results CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt AOFF This command turns all delta markers off lt m gt is irrelevant Example CALC DELT AOFF Turns all delta markers off Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK lt State gt This command links delta marker lt m gt to marker 1 If you change the horizontal position x value of marker 1 delta marker lt m gt changes its horizontal position to the same value Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT2 LINK ON Manual operation See Linking to Another Marker on page 107 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK TO MARKer lt m gt State This command links delta marker lt m1 gt to any active normal marker m2 If you change the horizontal position of marker lt m2 gt delta marker lt m1 gt changes its horizontal position to the same value Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT4 LINK TO MARK2 ON Links the delta marker 4 to the marker 2 Manual operation See Linking to Another Marker on page 107 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MODE lt Mode gt This command defines whether the position of a delta marker is provided as an abso lute value or relative to a reference marker for all delta markers m is irrelevant Note that when the position of a delta marker is queried the result is always an abso lute value see CALCulate n DELTamarker m X o
51. Average of positive and negative peaks PK 2 4 RMS Detector function used for relative demodulation Parameters lt Mode gt WRITe Overwrite mode the detector value is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting AVERage The average result is determined over all sweeps MAXHold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S FPS saves each result only if the new value is greater than the previous one RST WRITe Example See CONFigure ADEMod RESults PM DETector lt det gt STATe on page 207 Manual operation See Mode on page 93 CONFigure ADEMod RESults UNIT lt Unit gt This command selects the unit for relative demodulation results Parameters lt Unit gt PCT DB RST PCT Example CONF ADEM RES AM DET2 STAT ON Activates relative demodulation for the negative peak detector CONF ADEM RES AM DET2 MODE AVER Sets the negative peak detector to average mode CONF ADEM RES UNIT PCT Defines the unit for relative values as percent CONF ADEM RES AM DET2 REF 1 415 Sets the reference value for relative results to 1 415 Manual operation See Relative Unit on page 92 11 4 9 Configuring the Measurement Adjusting Settings Automatically The following remote commands are required to adjust settings automatically in a remote environment The tasks for manual operation are described
52. ERR SOEN 188 TRiIGger SEQuence HEV E EE 189 TRIGger SEQuence E EVel RE ROWE rtt tete erp et re repre en eR n 188 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port ocu tro ttt terr tht eren 187 TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe TRIGger SEQuernce SOURCS rtr tenerte enn e ceni rn epar Coe AR AE Ee EES ng Sell UNITS zi Usdsl p UNIT n PMETersp POWher RKATIO i treno ertet n ene E here nene RE Eas 160 VIN AT Stn STAD dE 205 Index Symbols user HY 186 A A weighted filter Luc m 86 Aborting SWOOD xcci cdit trece cete esee era ge CL eu ede adve LEER 76 77 AC DC coupling E 26 49 66 80 89 Activating Analog Demodulation measurements remote 145 Pie On 13 AF Auto Scale BECHER ETE 90 98 AF center Demodulation spectrurm reete 82 plo m denna 11 AF coupling rir a 27 Awelglited WEE 86 CCIR ss EECH RRE 86 E ele ue LTE 85 Deactivating ES Deermiphiasls orcinec eene 87 elle 85 Low pass ES Weighting ono tr rer ee rnit AF full span Demodulation spectrum reete 83 AF span Demodulation spectrum ever 2 nettes 83 Displayed T Remote control neret ioris 197 AF SDOCIFUIm eniin irren hne me eni es 82 AF start Demodulation spectrum 2 eren 83 AF stop
53. Example CALC PMET2 REL AUTO ONCE Takes the current measurement value as reference value for rel ative measurements for power sensor 2 Usage Event Manual operation See Setting the Reference Level from the Measurement Meas gt Ref on page 60 CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative STATe lt State gt This command turns relative power sensor measurements on and off Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC PMET2 REL STAT ON Activates the relative display of the measured value for power sensor 2 FETCh PMETer lt p gt This command queries the results of power sensor measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Return values lt Level gt Power level that has been measured by a power sensor The unit is either dBm absolute measurements or dB relative measurements Usage Query only Configuring the Measurement READ PMETer lt p gt This command initiates a power sensor measurement and queries the results Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Usage Query only SENSe PMETer lt p gt DCYCle STATe lt State gt This command turns the duty cycle correction on and off Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example PMET2 DCYC STAT ON Manual operation See Duty Cycle on page 61 SENSe PMETer lt p gt DCYCle VALue lt Percentage
54. Example DISP TRAC Y RVAL 20dBm Sets the power value assigned to the reference position to 20 dBm Manual operation See Reference Value on page 57 SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire lt MeasType gt This command initiates a reference measurement calibration The reference mea surement is the basis for the measurement normalization The result depends on whether a reflection measurement or transmission measurement is performed see SENSe CORRection METHod on page 170 To obtain a correct reference measurement a complete sweep with synchronization to the end of the sweep must have been carried out This is only possible in the single sweep mode This command is only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 165 Parameters lt MeasType gt THRough TRANsmission mode calibration with direct connection between external generator and device input REFLection mode calibration with short circuit at the input OPEN only allowed in REFLection mode calibration with open input Example INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep operation CORR METH TRAN Selects a transmission measurement CORR COLL THR WAI Starts the measurement of reference data using direct connec tion between generator and device input and waits for the sweep end Usage Setting only SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Calibrate Reflection Short on page 56 See Calibrate Reflection Open
55. Ext Generator Fre Reverse sweep is performed frequencies are reduced to quency the minimum frequency then increased again see Reverse sweep on page 38 Ext Generator File Syntax Error Syntax error in the generator setup file see chap ter 4 7 1 3 Generator Setup Files on page 34 Ext Generator Command Error Missing or wrong command in the generator setup file see chapter 4 7 1 3 Generator Setup Files on page 34 Ext Generator Visa Error Error with Visa driver provided with installation very unlikely Overloading At a reference level of 10 dBm and at a external generator output level of the same value the R amp S FPS operates without overrange reserve That means the R amp S FPS is in danger of being overloaded if a signal is applied whose amplitude is higher than the reference line In this case either the message RF OVLD for overload or IF OVLD for exceeded display range clipping of the trace at the upper diagram border over range is displayed in the status line Overloading can be avoided as follows e Reducing the output level of the external generator Source Power on page 53 in External Generator Measurement Configuration Increasing the reference level Reference Level in the Amplitude menu 4 7 2 Input from Noise Sources The R amp S FPS provides an optional NOISE SOURCE CONTROL connector with a volt age supply for an external noise source By swit
56. IMMediate The current measurement results are used to calculate the FM offset AVERage The measurement results that were averaged over the given number of measurements are used to calculate the FM offset If no average measurement was active during the last measure ment sequence only the SENSe ADEMod n FM OFFSet IMMediate command will return a correct result data to calcu late the offset are taken from the last measured data set SENSe ADEMod n FM OFFSet AVERage Will cause a query error in this case Retrieving Results Example DEM SET 8MHz 32000 EXT POS 500 30 ets up demodulator parameters to execute 30 measurements DEM FM AVER OFF OFF elects FM results to perform averaging NIT WAI tarts measurement and waits for sync DEM FM OFFS IMM eads FM offset of last measurement of the sequence of 30 DEM FM OFFS AVER Reads FM offset averaged over 30 measurements HNP gt ZI Usage Query only 11 7 4 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format When trace data is retrieved using the TRAC DATA or TRAC IQ DATA command the data is returned in the format defined using the FORMat DATA The possible for mats are described here e ASCII Format FORMat ASCII The data is stored as a list of comma separated values CSV of the measured val ues in floating point format e Binary Format FORMat REAL 32 The data is stored as binary d
57. Measurement channels Multiple ZOOM siidist erre e ntn enda N n dB down BGA ValS rS 117 Marker 217 Remote Control reet tre tei decas 260 Name Limit lines Next Minimum Marker positioning Next Peak e Marker positlohihg rrr 111 Noise Density Marker EIER ER TTA NOR External generator 2 ater 35 39 Normalization Approximate external generator External Generator e eroe Number of Readings POoW r SENSON one EEN 61 Numerator Frequencies external generator 38 54 O Offset Analysis interval 1 5 tirer tonnes 75 Reference level 5 ien dentaires 63 Open circuit reflection measurement Calibration external generator ssssss 56 Options Electronic attenuation cinsini testiin 65 Preamplifier B24 sci so pese ederet 65 Output Config fatioti EE 94 Noise SOUC Esarte rareo EE 40 95 Parameters GL EE Bae Overload External generator a aret 35 Overloading External Generator ssis a 40 Overview GCorifig lation TT 46 ier ci 46 OVLD External generator n rre trne ees 35 P Parameters Input Sigpnal siete eege Eege le Peak excursion 5 iine etie ios ee tain nee e reir Peak list elt le io WEE Displaying RE Evaluation method EXP OWING BE Marker number
58. Presetting issis 45 see Digital standards 5 5 er 44 Statistics Programming example saticis 275 276 Status bar Error messages external generator 40 Step size MArKBIS 5 emiten Dp E tg Hebdos 108 Markers remote control sssees 249 Storage location Secure user mode crei e tres 45 Settings oi reete na exte e Pere ea 45 Suffixes COMMON TEEN 144 Remote command a iiie ee ote edes 141 Sweep ADOFUDG uniti tete titer o ee TRU eee ad 76 77 Count Points Settings Sweep points Displayed EE 11 Sweeps Performing remote AA Reverse external generator T TCP IP Address External generator ssssssssss 51 External generator Di tes Querying remote E Troubleshooting cocotte rettet rom Bj pe d Threshold MIME DEF GIVISION ness i rta p arret tr oet 81 Time per division DISPIAVOO x cnet oct rto ence Bieten o tema 11 Time domain ZOOM EE 81 Total harmonic distortion see THD tesselen dees ege 21 Traces Ne Ee 101 Averaging remote control seeesssse 217 Configuration Configuring remote control sssssss 212 D teClOr at perat pectet 101 Detector remote control 206 207 217 Export et ian ana escre o m tetas 104 Exporling trc enean 103 104 127 Hold MO
59. RES MAXH Reads RF time domain max hold results ADEM AM RES MINH Reads RF time domain min hold results User Manual 1176 8474 02 06 232 Retrieving Results Usage Query only FORMat DATA lt Format gt This command selects the data format that is used for transmission of trace data from the R amp S FPS to the controlling computer Note that the command has no effect for data that you send to the R amp S FPS The R amp S FPS automatically recognizes the data it receives regardless of the format Parameters lt Format gt ASCii ASCii format separated by commas This format is almost always suitable regardless of the actual data format However the data is not as compact as other for mats may be REAL 32 32 bit IEEE 754 floating point numbers in the definite length block format In the Spectrum application the format setting REAL is used for the binary transmission of trace data For UO data 8 bytes per sample are returned for this format set ting RST ASCII Example FORM REAL 32 Usage SCPI confirmed TRACe lt n gt DATA This command queries current trace data and measurement results The data format depends on FORMat DATA Query parameters lt ResultType gt Selects the type of result to be returned TRACE1 TRACE6 Returns the trace data for the corresponding trace Return values lt TraceData gt The trace data consists of a list of power levels that have
60. Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset on page 27 The value indicated here is ignored for lt trigger source gt IMMediate RST 0 Number of repetitions of the measurement to be executed The value indicated here is especially necessary for the average maxhold minhold function Range 0 to 32767 RST 0 ADEM SET 8MHz 32000 EXT POS 500 30 Performs a measurement at sample rate 8 MHz record length 32000 trigger source EXTernal trigger slope POSitive offset samples 500 500 samples before trigger occurred of meas 30 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt SPECtrum BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution Bandwidth Defines the resolution bandwidth for data acquisition From the specified RBW and the demodulation span set by SENSe ADEMod lt n gt SPECtrum SPAN MAXimum on page 199 or SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 184 the required measurement time is calculated If the available measurement time is not sufficient for the given bandwidth the measurement time is set to its maximum and the resolution bandwidth is increased to the resulting band width This command is identical to SENS BAND RES see the R amp S FPS User Manual lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Bandwidth gt Example refer to data sheet RST 61 2 kHz ADEM SPEC BAND 61 2kHz Sets the resolution bandwidth to 61 2 kHz Configuring the Measurement SENSe JADE
61. See Source Calibration Normalize on page 56 Configuring the Measurement SENSe CORRection TRANsducer GENerator Name This command uses the normalized measurement data to generate a transducer factor with up to 1001 points The trace data is converted to a transducer with unit dB and stored in a file with the specified name and the suffix tra under c r_s instr trd The frequency points are allocated in equidistant steps between start and stop frequency The generated transducer factor can be further adapted using the commands descri bed in the Remote Commands gt Configuring the R amp S FPS gt Working with Transduc ers section in the R amp S FPS User Manual Parameters lt Name gt lt name gt Example CORR DAN GEN SMW200A1 Creates the transducer file C r_s instr trd SMW200A trd Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Save As Trd Factor on page 57 Programming Example for External Generator Control The following example demonstrates how to work with an external generator in a remote environment It assumes a signal generator of the type SMAO1A is connected to the R amp S FPS via TCP IP as described in chapter 4 7 1 1 External Generator Connections on page 32 Reset the instrument RST Set the frequency span SENS FREQ STAR 10HZ SENS FREQ STOP 1MHZ Set the generator type to SMW06 with a frequency range of 100 kHz to 3GHz SYST COMM RDEV GEN TYPE SMAO1A Set the interfac
62. T Link Time Marker Links the markers in all time domain diagrams Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK on page 250 Link AF Spectrum Marker Links the markers in all AF spectrum displays Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK on page 250 Marker Search Settings and Positioning Functions Several functions are available to set the marker to a specific position very quickly and easily or to use the current marker position to define another characteristic value In order to determine the required marker position searches may be performed The search results can be influenced by special settings Most marker positioning functions and the search settings are available in the MKR gt menu Search settings are also available via the MARKER key or in the vertical Marker Con fig tab of the Analysis dialog box horizontal Search Settings tab The remote commands required to define these settings are described in chap ter 11 8 1 Working with Markers Remotely on page 243 Marker Search Settings E 110 Positioning FUNCIONS T 110 6 3 2 1 6 3 2 2 Working with Markers in the R amp S FPS Analog Demodulation application Marker Search Settings Markers are commonly used to determine peak values i e maximum or minimum val ues in the measured signal Configuration settings allow you to influence the peak search results These settings are available in the
63. Unit gt This command selects the unit for absolute power sensor measurements lt n gt is irrele vant Configuring the Measurement Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Unit gt DBM WATT W RST DBM Example UNIT PMET POW DBM Manual operation See Unit Scale on page 60 UNIT lt n gt PMETer lt p gt POWer RATio lt Unit gt This command selects the unit for relative power sensor measurements lt n gt is irrele vant Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Unit gt DB PCT RST DB Example UNIT PMET POW RAT DB Manual operation See Unit Scale on page 60 Triggering with Power Sensors SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger DTIME cessere nennen nunn tenens 160 SENSe PMETer p TRIGget HOEDoff 2 2 citri toco edere teorema EEN 161 SENSe IPMETersps TRIGger YS Teresis cpi reete eam euh enr n ucro ean daa aaa 161 SENSe PMETersp TRIGGerEEVel iiu cipere intere kate rete tine abend inan 161 SENSE PME Terep TRIGO SLOP En itu ouverte e dece cette Fere tena e eter 162 SENSe PMETer p TRIGgei S TATe icut erint eerte n 162 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger DTIMe Time This command defines the time period that the input signal has to stay below the IF power trigger level before the measurement starts Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Time gt Range Os to 1s Increment
64. additional functions are available e Marker SetingS E 105 e Marker Search Settings and Positioning Funchons 109 e Measunng Phase NOISE dr ce ase ere Ex ce dt t rd 112 e Marker F nction eet UI e DE 112 R amp S FPS KT Analysis larkers the R amp S FPS Analog Demodulat 6 3 14 Marker Settings Marker settings can be configured via the MARKER menu or in the Marker dialog box To display the Marker dialog box do one of the following Press the MKR key then select the Marker Config softkey nthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker tab The remote commands required to define these settings are described in chap ter 11 8 1 Working with Markers Remotely on page 243 Individual Marker Setup EE 105 e General Marker Settings icceeeeceen creen rene nane punte SEENEN 107 6 3 1 1 Individual Marker Setup In the Analog Demodulation application up to 17 markers or delta markers can be acti vated for each window simultaneously Initial marker setup is performed using the Marker dialog box ker Markers Marker Settings Search Settings Selected State Stimulus Ref Link to Marker The markers are distributed among 3 tabs for a better overview By default the first marker is defined as a normal marker whereas all others are defined as delta markers with reference to the first marker All markers are assigned to trace 1 but only the first marker is active
65. application Search Next Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next higher minimum of the selected trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 252 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 254 6 3 3 Measuring Phase Noise Phase noise is unintentional modulation of a carrier it creates frequencies next to the carrier frequency A phase noise measurement consists of noise density measure ments at defined offsets from the carrier the results are given in relation to the carrier level dBc In the Analog Demodulation application phase noise measurement markers are avail able for the AF Spectrum result displays For the FM Spectrum and PM Spectrum result displays the phase deviation in rad equals the phase noise at the marker posi tion For AM Spectrum displays the marker result equals the amplitude noise at the marker position The noise power density is measured at each marker for which the phase noise func tion is activated and set in relation to the measured carrier power A reference marker is not required In the marker table display the phase noise is indicated as the marker function result 6 3 4 Marker Function Configuration Special marker functions can be selected via the Marker Function dialog box To display this dialog box do one of the following e Press the MKR FUNC key then select the Sel
66. be ERE exu DRM REDE 198 SENSe ADEMod n AM RELative AFSPectrum RESUIt essere 232 SENSe JADEMod n AM RELative AFSPectrum TYPE sese nennen nennen 214 SENSe JADEMod n AM RELative TDOMainl RE Gu 232 SENSe ADEMod n AM RELative TDOMain TYPE eese nnns 214 SENSe ADEMod n AM ABSolute TDOMain RE Gul 232 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AM ABSolute TDOMain TYPE eese 214 SENSe JADEMod n FM AFSPectrum RESUIE eese enne nre eterne 232 SENSe ADEMods n FM AF SPectrum TYPE tetti tt terrre toners 215 SENSe JADEMod n FM OFFSet 239 SENSe ADEMod amp rnrs EMETDOMaiBb RESUIEE 1 i rrr erc ctor nr br tre eren cides 232 SENSe ADEMod n FMETDOMainlE TYPE 1t rette ge eit erdt epe ice aan 214 SENSe JADEMOd EEN ANE 181 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt PM AFGbechum RE Gu 232 SENS ADEMod lt n gt PM AFSPectrum TY PE cic icta rtt RU eden ee n Dt rete dee SENSe JADEModsris PM RPOiht X cite cio tiet eei cir ue E HS Ro ru ce pet d eeu NR AREE SENSe ADEMod lt n gt PM TDOMain RESult SENS JADEMod lt n gt PM TDOMAain h TYPE det sets cee tede t ete HE Dti ete SENSe JADEModsn PRESSGERESTOFe iore mente ead a ada ie p a caca eege SENSe ADEModsn PRESSES TORS rre tte rather eher Yer ay KERNEL PR EXER n Fe ERE Re FER dree d SENSe ADEModsn PRESet ST
67. can configure the Analog Demodulation application using predefined standard set tings This allows for quick and easy configuration for commonly performed measure ments For details see chapter 5 2 Configuration According to Digital Standards on page 44 Provided standard files The instrument comes prepared with the following standard settings e AM Broadcast e FM Narrowband e FM Broadcast e Frequency Settling None default settings The default storage location for the settings files is C FPS user predefined AdemodPredefined Predefined settings The following parameters can be stored in a standard settings file Any parameters that are not included in the xml file are set to their default values when the standard is loa ded Measurement settings e DBW e AQT e Demod Filter Sweep Points e Squelch State Level e Units Phase THD e RF Span Window display settings e Position e State e Window number e Window type all evaluation methods supported by the Analog Demodulation appli cation see chapter 3 Measurements and Result Displays on page 13 Scaling Ref Position Dev per Division e Time Domain Zoom State Start Length AF specific settings e AF Center e AF Span e AF Filters lowpass Highpass Deemphasis Weighting e Scaling for Spectrum Ref Value Deviation e Scaling for Time Domain Ref Value AF Coupling FM PM only Table 1 1 List of predefined standar
68. channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel INSTrument REName lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command renames a measurement channel Parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String containing the name of the channel you want to rename 11 4 Configuring the Measurement lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the new channel name Note that you can not assign an existing channel name to a new channel this will cause an error Example INST REN Spectrum2 Spectrum3 Renames the channel with the name Spectrum2 to Spectrum3 Usage Setting only INSTrument SELect lt ChannelType gt Selects the channel type for the current channel See also INSTrument CREate NEW on page 145 For a list of available channel types see table 11 1 Parameters lt ChannelType gt ADEMod Analog Demodulation application R amp S FPS K7 SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute This command restores the default instrument settings in the current channel Use INST SEL to select the channel Example INST Spectrum2 Selects the channel for Spectrum2 SYST PRES CHAN EXEC Restores the factory default settings to the Spectrum2 channel Usage Event Manual operation See Preset Channel on page 48 Configuring the Measurement The following remote commands are required t
69. data binary file see DataFilename element Every sample must be in the same format The format can be one of the following complex Complex number in cartesian format i e and Q values interleaved and Q are unitless real Real number unitless polar Complex number in polar format i e magnitude unitless and phase rad values interleaved Requires DataType float32 or f1oat64 DataType Specifies the binary format used for samples in the UO data binary file see DataFilename element and chapter B 2 I Q Data Binary File on page 292 The following data types are allowed int8 8 bit signed integer data int16 16 bit signed integer data int32 32 bit signed integer data float32 32 bit floating point data IEEE 754 float64 64 bit floating point data IEEE 754 ScalingFactor Optional describes how the binary data can be transformed into values in the unit Volt The binary UO data itself has no unit To get an I Q sample in the unit Volt the saved samples have to be multiplied by the value of the ScalingFactor For polar data only the magnitude value has to be multiplied For multi channel signals the ScalingFactor must be applied to all channels The attribute unit must be set to v The ScalingFactor must be gt 0 If the ScalingFactor element is not defined a value of 1 V is assumed NumberOfChan nels Optional specifies the number of channels e g of a MIMO signal contained in the UO dat
70. default serial numbers not yet assigned are automatically assigned to the next free power sensor index for which Auto Assignment is selected Alternatively you can assign the sensors manually by deactivating the Auto option and selecting a serial number from the list Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt STATe on page 159 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer p DEFine on page 153 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer lt p gt CONFigure AUTO STATe on page 152 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer COUNt on page 152 Zeroing Power Sensor Starts zeroing of the power sensor For details on the zeroing process refer to the R amp S FPS User Manual Remote command CALibration PMETer p ZERO AUTO ONCE on page 154 Input and Frontend Settings Frequency Manual Defines the frequency of the signal to be measured The power sensor has a memory with frequency dependent correction factors This allows extreme accuracy for signals of a known frequency Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt FREQuency on page 156 Frequency Coupling Selects the coupling option The frequency can be coupled automatically to the center frequency of the instrument or to the frequency of marker 1 Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt FREQuency LINK on page 157 Unit Scale Selects the unit with which the measured power is to be displayed Available units are dBm dB W and If dB or 96 is selected the display is relative to
71. enlarge several different areas of the trace simultane ously An overview window indicates the zoom areas in the original trace while the zoomed trace areas are displayed in individual windows The zoom area that corre sponds to the individual zoom display is indicated in the lower right corner between the scrollbars Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00OM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 279 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z0OM MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA on page 278 Restore Original Display Restores the original display and closes all zoom windows Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 278 single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 279 for each multiple zoom window X Deactivating Zoom Selection mode Deactivates any zoom mode Selecting a point in the display no longer invokes a zoom but selects an object Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M STATe on page 278 single zoom DISPlay WINDow n 2Z00M MULTiple czoom STATe on page 279 for each multiple zoom window 6 6 Analysis in MSRA Mode The data that was captured by the MSRA Master can be analyzed in the Analog Demodulation application The analysis settings and functions available in MSRA mode are those described for common Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode Analysis line settings In addition an analysis line can be positioned The analysis line is a common time marker
72. et dte eeu Ez 224 e Retrieving Resulls eet eret ex ee d ne e SEN 231 LEE urat E 242 e Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results 281 e Commands for Combpsatublliy 2 tenete mo ete ER ER EER d 283 e Programming Example iiec eese ti tede tn ttn i ENEE NEES ER edes 284 R amp S FPS K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 11 1 Introduction Commands are program messages that a controller e g a PC sends to the instru ment or software They operate its functions setting commands or events and request information query commands Some commands can only be used in one way others work in two ways setting and query If not indicated otherwise the com mands can be used for settings and queries The syntax of a SCPI command consists of a header and in most cases one or more parameters To use a command as a query you have to append a question mark after the last header element even if the command contains a parameter A header contains one or more keywords separated by a colon Header and parame ters are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank If there is more than one parameter for a command these are separated by a comma from one another Only the most important characteristics that you need to know when working with SCPI commands are described here For a more complete description refer to the User Manual of the R amp S FPS Remote co
73. firmware and measurement settings 2 3 Window title bar with diagram specific trace information 4 Diagram area 5 Diagram footer with diagram specific information depending on result display 6 Instrument status bar with error messages progress bar and date time display MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode additional tabs and elements are available A colored back ground of the screen behind the measurement channel tabs indicates that you are in MSRA operating mode For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FPS MSRA User Manual Channel bar information In the Analog Demodulation application the R amp S FPS shows the following settings Table 2 1 Information displayed in the channel bar in the Analog Demodulation application Ref Level Reference level m el Att Mechanical and electronic RF attenuation Offset Reference level offset AQT Measurement time for data acquisition RBW Resolution bandwidth User Manual 1176 8474 02 06 10 Understanding the Display Information DBW Demodulation bandwidth Freq Center frequency for the RF signal Window title bar information For each diagram the header provides the following information 1 FM Time Domain 1AP Clrw Ref 0 00 Hz DC Demod Out 1 2 345 6 7 8 9 Fig 2 1 Window title bar information in the Analog Demodulation application 1 Window number 2 Modulation type 3 Trace color 4 Tr
74. for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format 240 e Reference ASCII File Export Format essnee aaa aaia aai 240 Retrieving Trace Results The following remote commands are required to retrieve the trace results in a remote environment SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AM ABSolute TDOMain RESUIt sse 232 SENSe ADEMod n AM RELative TDOMainl RE Gu 232 ISGENZGeJADEMod nz AM REI ativeAtGbechum RE Gul 232 SENSe ADEMod n FM TDOMain RESUIt inrer ornat ntn erint nnne 232 SENSeTJADEMod n FMAFSPectrmiRESUlU aai ora tette crt tes 232 SENSe JADEMod n PM TDOMain RESuUlt 1 recettes ease taa eun NENG 232 SENSe ADEMod n PM AFSPectrum RESUIt eise enne 232 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt SPECtrumM RESU eene nnne nnn 232 FORMAI DATA Lace re Gatti lae RAD a died pda 233 TRAC lt r DATA EE 233 R amp S9FPS K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements PP M M E SENSe JADEMod lt n gt AM ABSolute TDOMain RESult lt TraceMode gt SENSe JADEMod lt n gt AM RELative TDOMain RESult lt TraceMode gt SENSe JADEMod lt n gt AM RELative AFSPectrum RESult lt TraceMode gt SENSe JADEMod lt n gt FM TDOMain RESult lt TraceMode gt SENSe JADEMod lt n gt FM AFSPectrum RESult lt TraceMode gt SENSe ADEMod lt n gt PM TDOMain RESult lt TraceMode gt SENSe JADEMod lt n gt
75. for all MSRA applications To hide or show and position the analysis line a dialog box is available To display the Analysis Line dialog box select the AL icon in the toolbar only available in MSRA mode The current position of the analysis line is indicated on the icon Analysis in MSRA Mode Position Show Line PS NON EE 125 STOW E EEN 125 Position Defines the position of the analysis line in the time domain The position must lie within the measurement time of the multistandard measurement Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALINe VALue on page 280 Show Line Hides or displays the analysis line in the time based windows By default the line is displayed Note even if the analysis line display is off the indication whether or not the currently defined line position lies within the analysis interval of the active application remains in the window title bars Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALINe SHOW on page 280 d Qn Import Export Functions IO Data Import and Export Baseband signals mostly occur as so called complex baseband signals i e a signal representation that consists of two channels the in phase lI and the quadrature Q channel Such signals are referred to as UO signals UO signals are useful because the specific RF or IF frequencies are not needed The complete modulation information and even distortion that originates from the RF IF or baseband domains can be ana ly
76. gt marker lt m1 gt changes its hori zontal position to the same value Analyzing Results Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK4 LINK TO MARK2 ON Links marker 4 to marker 2 Manual operation See Linking to Another Marker on page 107 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe State This command turns markers on and off If the corresponding marker number is cur rently active as a deltamarker it is turned into a normal marker Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3 Manual operation See Marker State on page 106 See Marker Type on page 106 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe Trace This command selects the trace the marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Parameters Trace 1to6 Trace number the marker is assigned to Example CALC MARK3 TRAC 2 Assigns marker 3 to trace 2 Manual operation See Assigning the Marker to a Trace on page 107 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X Position This command moves a marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the marker If the marker has been used as a delta marker the command turns it into a normal marker Analyzing Results Parameters lt Position gt Numeric value that defines the marker position on the
77. gt Pulse length in seconds Manual operation See Pulse Length on page 73 Configuring Demodulation The following remote commands are required to configure the demodulation parame ters in a remote environment The tasks for manual operation are described in chap ter 5 8 Demodulation on page 78 e Basic Demodulation Zetting 194 Time Domain Zoom TE e EE 195 e Configuring the Demodulation Gpectum nens 197 11 4 8 1 Configuring the Measurement Post processing AF tege erc eden dr Dr ende cor eat boe lee d dud 200 Defining the Scaling Wuer 204 e Scaling for AF Evaluatton seen nennen nennen nnn 204 Scaling tori Evaluation ceder er eder re reete ae 205 LEM Ic M 205 e Relative Demodulation ISesulls 2 eret e tbe tex ER ethos 206 Basic Demodulation Settings The basic demodulation measurement parameters define how the measurement is performed Useful commands described elsewhere chapter 11 4 8 2 Time Domain Zoom Settings on page 195 Basic demodulation commands ISENSeJTABEMe EE COUPIING EE 194 DIE EE PM RPOIM KEE 194 SENSe ADEMod n SQUelch STATe eee tnt te tnttenttet 195 BENSE JADEMOd an gt SOUEM D iac nece tai eter edere nacen entendu cua 195 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF COUPling Coupling This command selects the coupling of the AF path of the analyzer in the specified win dow Parameters Coupling AC DC RST AC PM
78. in a remote environment e General Window Commandes 224 e Working with Windows in the Display 225 11 6 1 General Window Commands The following commands are required to configure general window layout independent of the application Note that the suffix n always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel see INSTrument SELect on page 148 Ei FORMU m PE 224 o E Eau Bre sedecim 225 DISPlay FORMat Format This command determines which tab is displayed Configuring the Result Display Parameters lt Format gt SPLit Displays the MultiView tab with an overview of all active chan nels SINGle Displays the measurement channel that was previously focused RST SING Example DISP FORM SPL DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE Size This command maximizes the size of the selected result display window temporarily To change the size of several windows on the screen permanently use the LAY SPL command see LAYout SPLitter on page 228 Parameters lt Size gt LARGe Maximizes the selected window to full screen Other windows are still active in the background SMALI Reduces the size of the selected window to its original size If more than one measurement window was displayed originally these are visible again RST SMALI Example DISP WIND2 LARG 11 6 2 Working with Windows in the Display The following commands are required to change the evaluatio
79. is the default mode Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m X SSIZe on page 249 Defining a Fixed Reference Instead of using a reference marker that may vary its position depending on the mea surement results a fixed reference marker can be defined for trace analysis 6 3 2 Working with Markers in the R amp S FPS Analog Demodulation application When you set the State to On a vertical and a horizontal red display line are dis played marked as FXD The normal marker 1 is activated and set to the peak value of the trace assigned to marker 1 and a delta marker to the next peak The fixed refer ence marker is set to the position of marker 1 at the peak value The delta marker refers to the fixed reference marker If activated the fixed reference marker FXD can also be selected as a Reference Marker instead of another marker The Level and Frequency or Time settings define the position and value of the ref erence marker Alternatively a Peak Search can be performed to set the current maximum value of the trace assigned to marker 1 as the fixed reference marker Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed STATe on page 256 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y on page 256 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint X on page 255 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint MAXimum PEAK on page 255 T
80. logarithmic Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer SPACing on page 268 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer SPACing on page 271 CALCulate n LIMit k LOWer MODE on page 267 CALCulate n LIMit k UPPer MODE on page 270 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DOMain on page 265 Y Axis Describes the vertical axis on which the data points of the limit line are defined Includes the following settings Level unit e Scaling mode absolute or relative dB values Relative limit values refer to the reference level Limit type upper or lower limit values must stay above the lower limit and below the upper limit to pass the limit check Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UNIT on page 269 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer SPACing on page 268 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer SPACing on page 271 Data points Each limit line is defined by a minimum of 2 and a maximum of 200 data points Each data point is defined by its position x axis and value y value Data points must be defined in ascending order The same position can have two different values Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DATA on page 265 CALCulate n LIMit k LOWer DATA on page 267 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer DATA on page 269 Zoom Functions Insert Value Inserts a data point in the limit line above the selected one in the Edit Limit Line dia log box
81. lt UserDefinedElement gt lt UserData gt lt PreviewData gt lt PreviewData gt lt RS_IQ TAR FileFormat Element Description RS IQ TAR File The root element of the XML file It must contain the attribute ileFormatVersion Format that contains the number of the file format definition Currently fileFormatVersion 2 is used Name Optional describes the device or application that created the file Comment Optional contains text that further describes the contents of the file DateTime Contains the date and time of the creation of the file Its type is xs dateTime see RsIqTar xsd UO Parameter XML File Specification Element Samples Description Contains the number of samples of the UO data For multi channel signals all chan nels have the same number of samples One sample can be e A complex number represented as a pair of and Q values e A complex number represented as a pair of magnitude and phase values Areal number represented as a single real value See also Format element Clock Contains the clock frequency in Hz i e the sample rate of the I Q data A signal gen erator typically outputs the UO data at a rate that equals the clock frequency If the UO data was captured with a signal analyzer the signal analyzer used the clock fre quency as the sample rate The attribute unit must be set to Hz Format Specifies how the binary data is saved in the UO
82. marker position in the dia gram In the Analog Demodulation application this function is only available for normal mark ers If activated the normal markers display the phase noise measured at their current position in the marker table 6 3 4 2 Working with Markers in the R amp S FPS Analog Demodulation application For details see chapter 6 3 3 Measuring Phase Noise on page 112 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise STATe on page 263 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise RESult on page 264 Switching All Phase Noise Measurements Off Deactivates phase noise measurement for all markers Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise STATe on page 263 Marker Peak List Configuration In the Analog Demodulation application the search limits are not available To display the Marker Peak List dialog do one of the following Press the MKR FUNC key then select the Marker Peak List softkey e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Peak List tab State Settings SearchLimits 5 Sort Mode X Value edel E 00Hz Right Limit L 26 5 GHz Maximum Number of Peaks 50 4 V Threshold E 120 0 dBm Peak Excursion 6 0 dB e Use Zoom Limits eu on Display Marker Numbers Gn Search Limits Off Export Export Peak List Decimal Separator Point Peak Hiet States E 11
83. measurement While the measurement is running the Continue Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONMeas on page 219 Refresh This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated and only for MSRA applications The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by the currently active application only The results for any other applications remain unchanged This is useful for example after evaluation changes have been made or if a new sweep was performed from another application in this case only that application is updated automatically after data acquisition Note To update all active applications at once use the Refresh all function in the Sequencer menu Remote command INITiate lt n gt REFResh on page 221 Measurement Time AQT Defines how long data is acquired for demodulatation For details on the measurement time see chapter 4 3 Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset on page 27 Remote command SENSe ADEMod n MTIMe on page 181 Sweep Points Defines the number of measured values to be collected during one sweep All values from 101 to 32001 can be set The default value is 1001 sweep points Remote command SENSe SWEep POINts on page 185 Sweep Average Count Defines the number of sweeps to be performed in the single
84. measurement channels which are required in order to replace or delete the channels Activating Analog Demodulation Measurements Return values lt ChannelType gt For each channel the command returns the channel type and lt ChannelName gt channel name see tables below Tip to change the channel name use the INSTrument REName command Example INST LIST Result for 3 measurement channels ADEM Analog Demod IQ IQ Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer2 Usage Query only Table 11 1 Available measurement channel types and default channel names in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode Application lt ChannelType gt Default Channel Name Parameter Spectrum SANALYZER Spectrum UO Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer Analog Demodulation R amp S FPS K7 ADEM Analog Demod GSM R amp S FPS K10 GSM GSM Noise R amp S FPS K30 NOISE Noise Phase Noise R amp S FPS K40 PNOISE Phase Noise VSA R amp S FPS K70 DDEM VSA 3GPP FDD BTS R amp S FPS K72 BWCD 3G FDD BTS 3GPP FDD UE R amp S FPS K73 MWCD 3G FDD UE TD SCDMA BTS R amp S FPS K76 BTDS TD SCDMA BTS TD SCDMA UE R amp S FPS K77 MTDS TD SCDMA UE cdma2000 BTS R amp S FPS K82 BC2K CDMA2000 BTS cdma2000 MS R amp S FPS K83 MC2K CDMA2000 MS 1xEV DO BTS R amp S FPS K84 BDO 1xEV DO BTS 1xEV DO MS R amp S FPS K85 MDO 1xEV DO MS WLAN R amp S FPS K91 WLAN WLAN LTE R amp S FPS K10x LTE LTE Note the default
85. minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Analyzing Results 11 8 1 5 Configuring Special Marker Functions The following commands are required to configure the special marker functions that are available in the Analog Demodulation application e Fixed Reference Marker Settings 2 c cccccccceecccechteeseescceceeedaeceeteedecccnteesessenees 255 Marker Peak Lists ete Fe Cad rere EE Cor ra eee EO Pee Ope de pred Ege Pe i 257 e MEB Down MaAtket ete rr rn Renee eode EENS AER 260 e Phase Noise Measurement Marker eese nennen enne 263 Fixed Reference Marker Settings The following commands configure a fixed reference marker CALOCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint MAXimum PEAK 255 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint 3 255 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOintY esses 256 CALCulate nz DEL TamarkercmzFUNCHontl edRbOmntv OFtzet 256 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mzFUNCHontizedtSTATel seen 256 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint MAXimum PEAK This command moves the fixed reference marker to the peak power Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO MAX Sets the reference point level for delta markers to the peak of the selected trace Usage Event Manual operation See Defining a Fixed Reference on page 108 CALCulat
86. most of the diagram width the DBW should be appropriate This procedure is demonstrated in the measurement example described in chapter 9 Measurement Example Demodulating an FM Signal on page 132 For further recommendations on finding the correct demodulation bandwidth see chap ter 4 2 Demodulation Bandwidth on page 26 Adjusting the displayed span Be aware that the span of the RF Spectrum display is not automatically increased for a wider DBW since it may be useful to display only a small range from the demodulated bandwidth However this means the RF spectrum may not show the entire demodula ted bandwidth In this case you must increase the span manually to show the entire signal Determining the SINAD and THD The signal to noise and distortion ratio SINAD and the total harmonic distortion THD of the demodulated signal are a good indicator of the signal quality sent by the DUT Both values are calculated inside the AF spectrum span and thus only if an AF spectrum window is displayed If either value deviates strongly from the expected result make sure the demodulation bandwidth is defined correctly see Determining the demodulation bandwidth 11 Remote Commands for Analog Demodula tion Measurements The commands required to perform measurements in the Analog Demodulation appli cation in a remote environment are described here It is assumed that the R amp S FPS has already been set up for remote c
87. n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod PM RESult t on page 236 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod PM RESult t RELative on page 237 Marker Table Displays a table with the current marker values for the active markers This table may be displayed automatically if configured accordingly see Marker Table Display on page 108 R amp S FPS K7 Measurements and Result Displays 4 Marker Table Wnd Type X value 1 M1 13 25 GHz 600 0 kHz 1 M 1 M1 600 0 kHz 1 V 2 0 MHz Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MTAB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 226 Results CALCulate n MARKercm X on page 244 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 245 Marker Peak List The marker peak list determines the frequencies and levels of peaks in the spectrum or time domain How many peaks are displayed can be defined as well as the sort order In addition the detected peaks can be indicated in the diagram The peak list can also be exported to a file for analysis in an external application You can define search and sort criteria to influence the results of the analysis see chapter 6 3 2 1 Marker Search Settings on page 110 2 Marker Peak List PI Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PEAK see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 226 Results CALCulate n MARKercm X on page 244 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 245 User Manual 1176 8474 02 06 23 Demodulation Process 4 M
88. n gt ZOOM STARt on page 196 If the zoom function is disabled data reduction is used to adapt the measruement points to the number of points available on the display Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example ADEM ZOOM ON Switches on the zoom function Manual operation See State on page 80 Configuring the Demodulation Spectrum The demodulation spectrum defines which span of the demodulated data is evaluated EE EIERE eegen 197 EE TEE 199 AF evaluation These settings are only available for AF Spectrum evaluations not in the time domain SENSe JADEModsens AF G MER 197 SENSe JADEModsn gt AFiS DEE 197 SENSe JADEMed lt n gt AF SPAN FULL EE 198 I SENSe ADEModsen AF S TAR EE 198 SENSe JADEMed lt n gt AFiS VO E 198 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF CENTer Frequency This command sets the center frequency for AF spectrum result display lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Frequency gt RST 1 25 MHz Manual operation See AF Center on page 82 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF SPAN Span This command sets the span around the center frequency for AF spectrum result dis play Configuring the Measurement The span is limited to DBW 2 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 184 lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Span gt RST 9 MHz Example ADEM AF SPAN 200 kHz Sets the AF span to 200 kHz Manual operation See AF Span on page 83 SENSe ADEMo
89. need to use the suffix you have to include the optional keyword Otherwise the suffix of the missing keyword is assumed to be the value 1 Optional keywords are emphasized with square brackets Introduction Example Without a numeric suffix in the optional keyword SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as FREQuency CENTer With a numeric suffix in the optional keyword DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe DISPlay ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 1 no suffix DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 4 11 1 5 Alternative Keywords A vertical stroke indicates alternatives for a specific keyword You can use both key words to the same effect Example SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution In the short form without optional keywords BAND 1MHZ would have the same effect as BWID 1MHZ 11 1 6 SCPI Parameters Many commands feature one or more parameters If a command supports more than one parameter these are separated by a comma Example LAYout ADD WINDow Spectrum LEFT MTABle Parameters may have different forms of values e REES Pra HERE pereo Fax Ve e EE 142 e EE 143 e Oharacter D ascites samrerte et tre enu Pete e Fen Y rr pnto e ae de de ro Rn 144 Gharacter E CET 144 MBI OG Ie Wp PEERS LIN 144 11 1 6 1 Numeric Values Numeric values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point or exponent In case of physical quant
90. numeric suffix ofETRACe 1 6 commands Trace Mode Defines the update mode for subsequent traces Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several sweep s and dis played The R amp S FPS saves each trace point in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one User Manual 1176 8474 02 06 100 Trace Settings Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FPS saves each trace point in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one Average The average is formed over several sweep s The Sweep Average Count determines the number of averaging procedures View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed Blank Removes the selected trace from the display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 212 Detector Defines the trace detector to be used for trace analysis Auto Selects the optimum detector for the selected trace and filter mode This is the default setting Type Defines the selected detector type Remote command SENSe WINDow lt n gt DETector lt t gt FUNCtion on page 217 SENSe WINDow lt n gt DETector lt t gt FUNCtion AUTO on page 218 Hold If activated traces in Min Hold Max Hold and Average mode are not re
91. of errors Boolean Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logically true is represen ted by ON or a numeric value 1 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numeric value 0 Querying boolean parameters When you query boolean parameters the system returns either the value 1 ON or the value 0 OFF Example Setting DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe ON Query DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe would return 1 Common Suffixes 11 1 6 3 Character Data Character data follows the syntactic rules of keywords You can enter text using a short or a long form For more information see chapter 11 1 2 Long and Short Form on page 141 Querying text parameters When you query text parameters the system returns its short form Example Setting SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE NORMal Query SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE would return NORM 11 1 6 4 Character Strings Strings are alphanumeric characters They have to be in straight quotation marks You can use a single quotation mark or a double quotation mark Example INSTRument DELete Spectrum 11 1 6 5 Block Data Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data The ASCII character introduces the data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 follow ing digits in
92. oiii a pd aulinin Manta Yanna teases Lee Ee E ME CE CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt TRACe lt t gt CHECk CALC oleate sin Mit EE 269 CALCulate lt n gt LIMitsk UPPer MARGIN scssi nian wae owt 270 CAL Culatesn gt EIMitsk gt UPPer MODE rco ttt e ete re Ei baw avliniaeaien EREE R 270 CALOCulate n LIMit k UPPer OFFSet esses essseee innen nennt nN E eE ATIE OSER 270 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer SHIFt 271 CALGulatesn gt LIMitek gt UPP er SPAGIFI cia reir ioscan Bee o trib ce ce sete erect E Dn aen ERE 271 CAL Culat esn gt EIMitsk gt UPPGE S TAT 271 CAL Culate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer THReshold irre tte trece t EEN 272 CAL GCulatesn bIMitsks PPer DATA c tette ta e eerta rit Lern cerei en BdE EE EEN 269 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod AFRequency RE Gu CAL CGulate nz MAbker mz FUNGCon ADEMod AMIREGul GTREL atived 237 CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz EUNGCionADEMod AMIRE Gutts 236 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod CARRier RESult 238 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod FERRor RE Guter 238 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod FM RESult t RELative sess 237 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod FM RESult t sse 236 CA
93. operation See Frequency Coupling on page 60 SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe lt Duration gt This command selects the duration of power sensor measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Duration gt SHORt NORMal LONG RST NORMal Example PMET2 MTIM SHOR Sets a short measurement duration for measurements of station ary high power signals for the selected power sensor Manual operation See Meas Time Average on page 60 Configuring the Measurement SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe AVERage COUNt lt NumberReadings gt This command sets the number of power readings included in the averaging process of power sensor measurements Extended averaging yields more stable results for power sensor measurements espe cially for measurements on signals with a low power because it minimizes the effects of noise Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt NumberReadings gt An average count of 0 or 1 performs one power reading Range 0 to 256 Increment binary steps 1 2 4 8 Example PMET2 MTIM AVER ON Activates manual averaging PMET2 MTIM AVER COUN 8 Sets the number of readings to 8 Manual operation See Average Count Number of Readings on page 61 SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe AVERage STATe lt State gt This command turns averaging for power sensor measurements on and off Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt
94. respect to the defined reference position The position may vary for different windows For time domain and frequency domain windows for example a different reference value may be displayed although the same reference is actually used but the posi tions vary Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RVALue on page 204 AF Coupling Controls the automatic correction of the frequency offset and phase offset of the input signal This function is only available for FM or PM time domain evaluations e FM time evaluation If DC is selected the absolute frequency is displayed i e an input signal with an offset relative to the center frequency is not displayed symmetrically with respect to the zero line 5 8 4 2 Demodulation If AC is selected the frequency offset is automatically corrected i e the trace is always symmetric with respect to the zero line e PM time evaluation If DC is selected the phase runs according to the existing frequency offset In addi tion the DC signal contains a phase offset of Tr If AC is selected the frequency offset and phase offset are automatically corrected i e the trace is always symmetric with respect to the zero line Remote command SENSe ADEMod n AF COUP1ing on page 194 Deviation Switches between logarithmic and linear display of the modulation depth or the phase deviation or the frequency deviation Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt
95. settings can be configured in the Traces dialog box Trace Data Export tab Traces 1 111 Transient Analysis Traces Trace Data Export Export all Traces and Marker Table Results Indude Instrument Measurement Settings Decimal Separator Pont Export to ASCII File Export all Traces and all Table Results seseeeeeenm 103 Include Instrument Measurement Gettings A 103 Mac TO EMO OM M O cea cadaniceazavannees 104 Decimal SSP TEE 104 Export Tracs to EE 104 Export all Traces and all Table Results Selects all displayed traces and result tables e g Result Summary marker table etc in the current application for export to an ASCII file Alternatively you can select one specific trace only for export see Trace to Export The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen window by window trace by trace and table row by table row Remote command FORMat DEXPort TRACes on page 235 Include Instrument Measurement Settings Includes additional instrument and measurement settings in the header of the export file for result data Working with Markers in the R amp S FPS Analog Demodulation application See chapter 11 7 5 Reference ASCII File Export Format on page 240 for details Remote command FORMat DEXPort HEADer on page 235 Trace to Export Defines an individual trace that will be exported to a file This setting is not available if Expor
96. source y Input Ji Source M Frequency Input Coupling Digital IQ Impedance YIG Preselector Radio Frequency State ee eet pr netten em tete rr aetas e RE A eR x RUN ERE 49 Aig UNC OU ING EE 49 MPCO EE 49 le 50 Radio Frequency State Activates input from the RF INPUT connector Remote command INPut SELect on page 152 Input Coupling The RF input of the R amp S FPS can be coupled by alternating current AC or direct cur rent DC AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 150 Impedance The reference impedance for the measured levels of the R amp S FPS can be set to 50 O or 75 OQ Input and Frontend Settings 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a 75 Q adapter of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 This value also affects the unit conversion see Reference Level on page 63 Remote command INPut IMPedance on page 151 YIG Preselector Activates or deactivates the YIG preselector
97. steps are allowed The default setting is 0 dB Offsets are indicated by the LVL label in the channel bar see also chapter 4 7 1 8 Displayed Information and Errors on page 39 Input and Frontend Settings With this offset attenuators or amplifiers at the output connector of the external gener ator can be taken into account for the displayed output power values on screen or dur ing data entry for example Positive offsets apply to an amplifier and negative offsets to an attenuator subsequent to the external generator Remote command SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet on page 166 Source Frequency Coupling Defines the frequency coupling mode between the R amp S FPS and the generator For more information on coupling frequencies see chapter 4 7 1 7 Coupling the Fre quencies on page 37 Auto Default setting a series of frequencies is defined one for each Sweep point based on the current frequency at the RF input of the R amp S FPS see Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denomi nator Offset on page 54 the RF frequency range covers the cur rently defined span of the R amp S FPS unless limited by the range of the signal generator Manual The generator uses a single fixed frequency defined by Manual Source Frequency which is displayed when you select Manual cou pling Remote command SOURce EXTernal FREQuency COUPling STATe on page 163 Manual Source Frequency Defines the fixe
98. stet sona eaaet ve ttr den Y xo ENEE 199 ISENZGeJADEMod nz GbPECirum GPANTMANimum nnne 199 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt SPEC SPAN ZOOM lt Span gt This command sets the span around the center frequency for RF spectrum result dis play The span is limited to the demodulation bandwidth see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 184 lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Span gt RST 5 MHz Example ADEM SPEC SPAN ZOOM 200 kHz Sets the rF span to 200 kHz Manual operation See Span on page 84 SENSe JADEMod lt n gt SPECtrum SPAN MAXimum lt FreqRange gt Sets the DBW to the specified value and the span around the center frequency of the RF data to be evaluated to its new maximum the demodulation bandwidth lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt FreqRange gt RST 5 MHz Default unit Hz Manual operation See Span on page 84 See RF Full Span on page 84 11 4 8 4 Configuring the Measurement Post processing AF Filters The AF filter reduces the evaluated bandwidth of the demodulated signal and can define a weighting function AF filters are only available for AM or FM time domain evaluations SENSe FILTer n AWEIghted STATe 2 22222 rer terrere aca ce HOENEN EE EEN 200 SENSE IFT erm AOF F EE 200 SENSe FILTeren CCIRWEIGhtegd STAT natat erue aidaa aida 200 SENSe FIL Ter n CCIR UNWeighted S TATe eese 201 ISENSeJFIETer
99. sweep measurement in a remote environment The limit lines configured in Example Configuring Limit Lines on page 275 are assumed to exist and be active a EE Preparing the instrument RST Resets the instrument INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep mode FREQ CENT 100MHz Defines the center frequency FREQ SPAN 200MHz Sets the span to 100 MHz on either side of the center frequency SENS ONE COON 10 Defines 10 sweeps to be performed in each measurement DISP TRAC1 Y RLEV OdBm Sets the reference level to 0 dBm TRIG SOUR IFP TRIG LEV IFP 10dBm Defines triggering when the second intermediate frequency rises to a level of 10 dBm DISP TRAC2 ON DISP TRAC2 MODE AVER DISP TRAC3 ON DISP TRAC3 MODE MAXH Configures 3 traces 1 default clear write 2 average 3 max hold fe5eeeRBeSRERE Configuring the limit check MMEM LOAD TYPE REPL MMEM LOAD STAT 1 LimitLines FM1 FM3 11 8 3 11 8 3 1 Analyzing Results Loads the limit lines stored in LimitLines FM1 FM3 CALC LIM1 NAME FMI1 CALC LIM1 UPP STAT ON Activates upper limit FM1 as line 1 CALC LIM3 NAME FM3 CALC LIM3 LOW STAT ON Activates lower limit line FM3 as line 3 CALC LIM ACT Queries the names of all active limit lines Result FM1 FM3 CALC LIMI1 TRAC3 CHEC ON Activates the upper limit to be checked against trace3 maxhold trace CALC LIM3 TRAC2 CHEC ON Activate
100. sweep mode Values from 0 to 200000 are allowed If the values 0 or 1 are set one sweep is performed The sweep count is applied to all the traces in all diagrams If the trace modes Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set this value also deter mines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures Demodulation Display In continuous sweep mode if sweep count 0 default averaging is performed over 10 sweeps For sweep count 1 no averaging maxhold or minhold operations are per formed Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 185 SENSe AVERage lt n gt COUNt on page 216 5 7 Demodulation Display The demodulated signal can be displayed using various evaluation methods All evalu ation methods available for the Analog Demodulation application are displayed in the evaluation bar in SmartGrid mode when you do one of the following Select the EJ SmartGrid icon from the toolbar e Select the Demod Display button in the Overview e Press the MEAS key e Select the Display Config softkey in the main Analog Demod menu Up to six evaluation methods can be displayed simultaneously in separate windows The Analog Demodulation evaluation methods are described in chapter 3 Measure ments and Result Displays on page 13 o For details on working with the SmartGrid see the R amp S FPS Getting Started manual 5 8 Demodulation Demodulation parameters can be configured in the Demodulation Settings di
101. the R amp S FPS 2 Set the center frequency to 500 MHz 3 Set the reference level to 0 dBm 4 Select the MODE key and then the Analog Demod button By default the FM Time Domain result display and a Result Summary are shown R amp S FPS K7 Measurement Example Demodulating an FM Signal MultiView SS Spectrum Analog Demod Ref Level 0 00 dBm Att OdB AQT 62 5us DBW 5MHz Freq 500 0 MHz CF 500 0 MHz 4 Result Summary Carrier Power 10 32 dBm Carrier Offset 38 03 kHz Peak Peak Epl RMS Mod Freq SINAD FM 51 433 kHz 38 157 kHz 44 795 kHz 33 595 kHz Fig 9 2 Default Analog Demodulation measurement result display 5 Set the measurement time AQT to 7 ms in order to measure 10 periods of the sig nal 6 Adjust the y axis scaling to the measured frequency deviation automatically by selecting the Scale Config softkey and in the Scaling tab setting AF Auto Scale to ON MultiView SS Spectrum Analog Demod Ref Level 0 00 dBm Att 10dB AQT 10ms DBW 5MHz Freq 500 0 MHz CF 500 0 MHz 100 pts 1 0 ms 4 Result Summary Carrier Power 10 33 dBm Carrier Offset 694 78 Hz Peak Peak Peak 2 RMS Mod Freq SINAD FM 52 799 kHz 51 025 kHz 51 912 kHz 34 931 kHz 10 000 kHz Fig 9 3 Auto scaled measurement of 10 signal periods continuous 7 Display the RF spectrum of the measured signal to determine the required demod ulation bandwidth Select the Display Config softkey and add an RF Spectrum win
102. the marker step size mode for all markers in all windows lt m gt n are irrelevant The step size defines the distance the marker moves when you move it with the rotary knob It therefore takes effect in manual operation only Parameters lt StepSize gt Example Manual operation Analyzing Results STANdard the marker moves from one pixel to the next POINts the marker moves from one sweep point to the next RST POINts CALC MARK X SSIZ STAN Sets the marker step size to one pixel See Marker Stepsize on page 108 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK lt DisplayType gt Links the specified marker in all displays of the specified type Parameters lt DisplayType gt Manual operation TIME SPECtrum BOTH NONE TIME Links the markers in all time domain diagrams SPECtrum Links the markers in all AF Spectrum displays BOTH Links the markers both in the time domain diagrams and in the AF Spectrum displays NONE Markers are not linked RST NONE See Link Time Marker on page 109 See Link AF Spectrum Marker on page 109 DISPlay MTABle lt DisplayMode gt This command turns the marker table on and off Parameters lt DisplayMode gt Example Manual operation ON Turns the marker table on OFF Turns the marker table off AUTO Turns the marker table on if 3 or more markers are active RST AUTO DISP MTAB ON Activates the marker table See Marker Table
103. the negative peak detector to 1 415 96 CONF ADEM RES PM DET2 MODE AVER Sets the negative peak detector to average mode CONF ADEM RES PM DET2 REF MEAS Sets the reference value for the negative peak detector to the average of the currently calculated value and the previous refer ence value Manual operation See State on page 93 CONFigure ADEMod RESults AM DETector lt det gt REFerence MEAStoref CONFigure ADEMod RESults FM DETector lt det gt REFerence MEAStoref CONFigure ADEMod RESults PM DETector lt det gt REFerence MEAStoref Sets the reference value to be used for relative demodulation results to the currently measured value for all relative detectors If necessary the detectors are activated A reference value 0 would provide infinite results and is thus automatically corrected to 0 1 Suffix det irrelevant Example See CONFigure ADEMod RESults PM DETector det STATe on page 207 Usage Event Manual operation See Meas Reference on page 94 Configuring the Measurement CONFigure ADEMod RESults AM DETector lt det gt MODE lt Mode gt CONFigure ADEMod RESults FM DETector lt det gt MODE lt Mode gt CONFigure ADEMod RESults PM DETector lt det gt MODE lt Mode gt Defines the mode with which the demodulation result is determined Suffix lt det gt 1 Positive peak 2 Negative peak 3
104. the reference value for relative measurements in the unit dBm Remote command CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude on page 154 Use Ref Lev Offset If activated takes the reference level offset defined for the analyzer into account for the measured power see Shifting the Display Offset on page 63 If deactivated takes no offset into account Remote command SENSe PMETer p ROFFset STATe on page 158 Average Count Number of Readings Defines the number of readings averages to be performed after a single sweep has been started This setting is only available if manual averaging is selected Meas Time Average setting The values for the average count range from 0 to 256 in binary steps 1 2 4 8 For average count 0 or 1 one reading is performed The general averaging and Sweep count for the trace are independent from this setting Results become more stable with extended average particularly if signals with low power are measured This setting can be used to minimize the influence of noise in the power sensor measurement Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe AVERage COUNt on page 158 Duty Cycle Sets the duty cycle to a percent value for the correction of pulse modulated signals and activates the duty cycle correction With the correction activated the sensor calculates the signal pulse power from this value and the mean power Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p
105. the reference value that is defined with either the Meas gt Ref setting or the Reference Value setting Remote command UNIT lt n gt PMETer lt p gt POWer on page 159 UNIT n PMETer p POWer RATio on page 160 Meas Time Average Selects the measurement time or switches to manual averaging mode In general results are more precise with longer measurement times The following settings are recommended for different signal types to obtain stable and precise results Short Stationary signals with high power gt 40dBm because they require only a short measurement time and short measurement time provides the highest repetition rates Normal Signals with lower power or modulated signals Long Signals at the lower end of the measurement range lt 50 dBm or Signals with lower power to minimize the influence of noise Manual Manual averaging mode The average count is set with the Average Count Number of Readings setting Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe on page 157 SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe AVERage STATe on page 158 Setting the Reference Level from the Measurement Meas gt Ref Sets the currently measured power as a reference value for the relative display The reference value can also be set manually via the Reference Value setting Remote command CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude AUTO ONCE on page 155 Input and Frontend Settings Reference Value Defines
106. the status bar Reverse Sweep via min Ext Generator Frequency Example Example for reverse sweep via minimum frequency FanalyzerStart 100 MHz FanalyzerStop 200 MHz Forse 150 MHz F min 20 MHz Numerator Denominator 1 gt F Generatorstart 90 MHz gt F GeneratorStop 90 MHz via Fmin Displayed Information and Errors Channel bar If external generator control is active some additional information is displayed in the channel bar Label Description EXT TG source power External generator active signal sent with source power level LVL Power Offset see Source Offset on page 53 FRQ Frequency Offset see Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denomi nator Offset on page 54 NOR Normalization on No difference between reference setting and measurement APX approximation Normalization on Deviation from the reference setting occurs Aborted normalization or no calibration performed yet Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output Error and status messages The following status and error messages may occur during external generator control Message Description Ext Generator TCPIP Handshake Error Connection to the generator is not possible e g due toa cable damage or loose connection or wrong address Ext Generator Limits Exceeded The allowed frequency or power ranges for the generator were exceeded Reverse Sweep via min
107. to compensate for the effects of the test setup e g frequency response of connecting cables GEN OUTPUT DUT RF INPUT Fig 4 4 Test setup for transmission measurement Reflection Measurement Scalar reflection measurements can be carried out using a reflection coefficient mea surement bridge GEN OUTPUT RF INPUT DUT Fig 4 5 Test setup for reflection measurement Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output Generated signal input In order to use the functions of the external generator an appropriate generator must be connected and configured correctly In particular the generator output must be con nected to the RF input of the R amp S FPS External reference frequency In order to enhance measurement accuracy a common reference frequency should be used for both the R amp S FPS and the generator If no independent 10 MHz reference fre quency is available it is recommended that you connect the reference output of the generator with the reference input of the R amp S FPS and that you enable usage of the external reference on the R amp S FPS via SETUP gt Reference gt External Refer ence For more information on external references see the Instrument Setup section in the R amp S FPS User Manual Connection errors If no external generator is connected if the connection address is not correct or the generator is not ready for operation an error message is displayed e g Ext Genera tor TCPIP Handshake Er
108. us 3072 s 3072 s 26843 5456 s 3 2 kHz 3 90625 kHz 256 us 6144s 6144 s 53687 0912 s 1 6 kHz 1 953125 kHz 512 us 12288 s 12288 s 107374 1824 s es User Manual 1176 8474 02 06 27 R amp S9FPS K7 ES User Manual 1176 8474 02 06 Measurement Basics JEE Demod band Sample rate Measurement time Trigger offset width Min Max Min Max 800 Hz 976 5625 Hz 1 024 ms 24576 s 24576 s 214748 3648 s 400 Hz 488 28125 Hz 2 048 ms 49152s 49152 s 429496 7296 s 200 Hz 244 140625 Hz 4 096 ms 98304 s 98304 s 858993 4592 s 100 Hz 122 0703125 8 192 ms 196608 s 196608 s 1717986 918 s Hz 2 only available with option B40 Table 4 2 Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset using a Gaussian demodulation filter Demod band Sample rate Measurement time Trigger offset width Min Max Min Max 28 MHz 112 MHz 8 929 ns 214 286 ms 214 286 ms 1 872457134 s 18 MHz 2 72 MHz 13 88 ns 333 333 ms 333 333 ms 2 912711097 s 10 MHz 40 MHz 25ns 600 ms 600 ms 5 242879975 s 8 MHz 32 MHz 31 25 ns 750 ms 750 ms 6 553599969 s 5 MHz 12 MHz 83 33 ns 2s 2s 10 48575995 s 3 MHz 10 666 MHz 93 75 ns 2 25s 2 25 s 17 47626667 s 1 6 MHz 6 4 MHz 156 25 ns 3 75s 3 75 s 32 76799984 s 800 kHz 3 2 MHz 312 5 ns 7 58s 7 58 65 53599969 s 400 kHz 1 6 MHz 625 ns 15s 15s 131 0719994 s 200 kHz 800 kHz 1 25 us 3
109. 0 Set analog demodulator to execute 30 sweeps with 32000 samples each at a sample rate of 8 MHz use FM trigger trigger on positive slope with a pretrigger offset of 500 samples INIT CONT OFF Stop continuous sweep INIT WAI Start a new measurement with 30 sweeps and wait for the end CALC MARK FUNC ADEM CARR Queries the carrier power Result 10 37 dBm CALC2 MARK FUNC ADEM SIN RES Queries the signal to noise and distortion ratio from the FM Spectrum Result 65 026 dB CALC2 MARK FUNC ADEM THD RES Queries the total harmonic distortion of the demodulated signal from the FM Spectrum Result 66 413 dB CALC MARK FUNC ADEM FERR Queries the FM carrier offset frequency error for the most recent measurement trace 1 Result 649 07 Hz ADEM FM OFFS AVER Queries FM carrier offset averaged over 30 measurements Result 600 Hz TRAC DATA TRACE1 Retrieve the trace data of the most recent measurement trace 1 Result 1 201362252 1 173495054 1 187217355 1 186594367 1 171583891 1 188250422 1 204138160 1 181404829 1 186317205 1 197872400 TRAC DATA TRACE2 Retrieve the averaged trace data for all 30 measurements trace 2 Result 1 201362252 1 173495054 1 187217355 1 186594367 1 171583891 1 188250422 1 204138160 1 181404829 1 186317205 1 197872400 A Predefined Standards and Settings You
110. 0 Hz DC CF 1 0 GHz Fig 4 2 FM time domain measurement with a very long measurement time 200 ms 1 FM Time Domain AP Clrw Ref 0 00 Hz DC Time per DIVISION x Start 0 0 s Fig 4 3 FM time domain measurement with time domain zoom 2 0 ms per division The time domain zoom area affects not only the diagram display but the entire evalua tion for the current window In contrast to the time domain zoom the graphical zoom is available for all diagram evaluations However the graphical zoom is useful only if more measured values than trace points are available The time span represented by each measurement point remains the same User Manual 1176 8474 02 06 30 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output 4 t t t t t 45 5 4 45 5 Time domain zoom Graphical zoom 4 7 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output The R amp S FPS can analyze signals from different input sources and provide various types of output such as noise or trigger signals 4 7 1 Basics on External Generator Control Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used for external genera tor control is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration set tings Demodulation and Noise Figure applications o External generator control is only available in the Spectrum UO Analyzer Analog External Generator Connections 5 9 2 rtt ott cer eh ret d v ee eee e
111. 09 CAL Culate nzMAbkercmzFEUNGCionRtterence AA 176 CALG latesn gt MARKerem gt BN 250 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK TOMAbRkercmz nennen renes e enr n nnn rnn nennen 243 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT GALCulatesn MARKer m MAXimum3NEXT irc kept rane ea cen i cada anv ieee CAL Culate cnz MAh ker mz MAximum HIGH CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK CALCulatesn gt MARKer lt m gt MINIMUMILEF Vi 0090 ect ibn rere tints came Gane nies CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT m CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimUM RIGH E assess geri eeteneeeeees CALGulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt M Nim m PEAK i AA CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt PEXCUISION c cccceeceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeceaeeeseaeeesenaeeeseneeeseaeeeseeaeeeseeeeeseeaeeeees CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe TEE EE EE 244 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SSIZe GALGulatesn MARKersm Y rere rra eene n Rr Eo et EK TENPE Nhe YE SPESA XE ESI 245 EIER RE 244 GALGulatesn MSRA ALING amp SHOW trit tenor tn etr e ee XR ERR rd ne XX EXER eR 280 GALGulatesn MSRA ALINe VALUe ni ocn er nhi tert rho nevera 280 CALCulatesn MSRA WINDowsn IMVAL suue eene ttn tet qos censessendeeagumesacanceansacesagenennconconeane 281 GALGulate n PMETersp RELative S TAT6 teer eerte nii ii CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude aig CALCulate lt n
112. 0s 30s 262 1439988 s 100 kHz 400 kHz 2 5us 60s 60s 524 2879975 s 50 kHz 200 kHz 5 us 120s 120s 1048 575995 s 25 kHz 100 kHz 10 us 240s 240 s 2097 15199 s 12 5 kHz 50 kHz 20 us 480 s 480 s 4194 30398 s 6 4 kHz 25 6 kHz 39 0625 us 937 5 s 937 5 s 8191 999961 s 3 2 kHz 12 8 kHz 78 125 us 1875s 1875 s 16383 99992 s 1 6 kHz 6 4 kHz 156 25 us 3750s 3750 s 32767 99984 s 800 Hz 3 2 kHz 312 5 us 7500s 7500 s 65535 99969 s 400 Hz 1 6 kHz 625 us 15000 s 15000 s 131071 9994 s 200 Hz 800 Hz 1 25 ms 30000 s 30000 s 262143 9988 s 100 Hz 400 Hz 2 5 ms 60000 s 60000 s 524287 9975 s 2 only available with option B40 Gaussian filter curve is limited by UO bandwidth 28 4 4 4 5 4 6 AF Triggers Large numbers of samples Principally the R amp S FPS can handle up to 1 6 million samples However when 480001 samples are exceeded all traces that are not currently being displayed in a window are deactivated to improve performance The traces can only be activated again when the samples are reduced Effects of measurement time on the stability of measurement results Despite amplitude and frequency modulation the display of carrier power and carrier frequency offset is stable This is achieved by a digital filter which sufficiently suppresses the modulation provi ded however that the measurement time is 2 3 x 1 modulation frequency i e that at least three periods of the AF signal are recorded The mean carrier power
113. 1 Complex sample 0 2 01 Q 2 0 Channel 2 Complex sample 0 O 1 Q 0 1 Channel 0 Complex sample 1 ITT gir Channel 1 Complex sample 1 2 1 Of27 111 Channel 2 Complex sample 1 01 2 1 Q 0 21 Channel 0 Complex sample 2 11 21 OTI 21 Channel 1 Complex sample 2 21 215 C121 12 Channel 2 Complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel This example demonstrates how to store complex cartesian data in float32 format using MATLAB o Save vector of complex cartesian I Q data i e iqiqiq N 100 iq randn 1 N 1j randn 1 N fid fopen xyz complex float32 w for k 1 length iq fwrite fid single real iq k float32 fwrite fid single imag iq k float32 end fclose fid List of Remote Commands AnalogDemod SENSe WINDowsn 7 DE Tector t E FUNCtlon erret tte ete 217 ISENS WINDOW lt n gt DE Techor GlEUNGC nonl AUTO 218 SENSe JADEMod lt n AF e IRC 197 SENSe JADEMod lt n gt AF COUPIING ii eot etre ce Ire he EEN Seale cede 194 SENSe JADEModsris AF SPAN ciant nui eee ista cran tenete Hn EVE Nue Ru sea Ru LE DER Eed 197 SENSe ADEModsri AF SPAN FULL icon teret hp etta eer the rh e tentari ko ENTES ESV TOTEEN 198 SENSe JADEMod lt n gt AF S DARLU etti tee Pe o matre t e e E gp s E D vea ets 198 SENSe JADEMOdsris AF STOP arcea Eet Hx rav eee die duc ae ERU
114. 127 L Export Trace to ASCII File dices rhet tret teretes 127 L Trace Export Confouratlon entente tenente teen 127 L 51 0 Mi ERE 127 Import Export Functions Import Provides functions to import data UO Import Import Opens a file selection dialog box to select an import file that contains IQ data This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process UO data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applications Note that the I Q data must have a specific format as described in the R amp S FPS UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Remote command MMEMory LOAD 1Q STATe on page 281 Export Opens a submenu to configure data export Export Trace to ASCII File Export Opens a file selection dialog box and saves the selected trace in ASCII format dat to the specified file and directory The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen window by window trace by trace and table row by table row For details on the file format see chapter 11 7 5 Reference ASCII File Export For mat on page 240 Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device
115. 148 SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute ccccceeceeeeeeeeee eee ee cae aeaeaeeeaeaaaaaaeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 148 INSTrument CREate DUPLicate This command duplicates the currently selected measurement channel i e creates a new measurement channel of the same type and with the identical measurement set tings The name of the new channel is the same as the copied channel extended by a consecutive number e g Spectrum gt Spectrum 2 The channel to be duplicated must be selected first using the INST SEL command Example INST SEL Spectrum INST CRE DUPL Duplicates the channel named Spectrum and creates a new measurement channel named Spectrum 2 Usage Event INSTrument CREate NEW lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName gt This command adds an additional measurement channel The number of measurement channels you can configure at the same time depends on available memory Parameters lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 146 Activating Analog Demodulation Measurements lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The channel name is displayed as the tab label for the measurement channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see INSTrument LIST on page 146 Example INST CRE SAN Spectrum 2
116. 159 SENSe PMETer p UPDateESTATe nier retta neut nter derer override 159 CIE Ne 159 UNI cnzs PMETercps POVWerbRAaTio cece eee ee eee ae ae ae aeaaae a cedeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaesaea 160 CALibration PMETer lt p gt ZERO AUTO ONCE This commands starts to zero the power sensor Note that you have to disconnect the signals from the power sensor input before you start to zero the power sensor Otherwise results are invalid Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters ONCE Example CAL PMET2 ZERO AUTO ONCE WAI Starts zeroing the power sensor 2 and delays the execution of further commands until zeroing is concluded Usage Event Manual operation See Zeroing Power Sensor on page 59 CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude lt RefValue gt This command defines the reference value for relative measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt RefValue gt Range 200 dBm to 200 dBm RST 0 Example CALC PMET2 REL 30 Sets the reference value for relative measurements to 30 dBm for power sensor 2 Manual operation See Reference Value on page 61 Configuring the Measurement CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude AUTO ONCE This command sets the current measurement result as the reference level for relative measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters ONCE
117. 2 5 4 2 1 Input and Frontend Settings Power Sensor The R amp S FPS can also analyze data from a connected power sensor For background information on working with power sensors see the R amp S FPS User Manual Power Sensor Settings Power sensor settings are available in the Power Sensor tab of the Input dialog box Each sensor is configured on a separate tab Input Source Power Sensor State C Continuous Update Sensori 9j Select Sensor2 e Zeroing Power Sensor Meas gt Ref Sensor3 Frequency Manual Reference Value 67 19 dBm Sensor4 Ee IN ve E e Rev T OTI Center gt Use Ref Level Offset Unit Scale Le Number of Readings Meas Time Average La Duty Cycle External Power Trigger External Trigger Level 20 0 dBm Hysteresis 0 0 dB Dropout Time 100 0 us Holdoff Time 0 0s Slope Rising Falling Zeroing Power Setsor eesi sees entend enint aen d daa e ea Ran a da 59 Frequency Matlual certet O I nee ctas 60 Frequency Coupling eric irre reete e Eee eee d nde 60 Miri m tase 60 Meas Tilme AVOlLatje E 60 Setting the Reference Level from the Measurement Meas Ref 60 Ser WV AMG RS E 61 Us Ret LEV ONSOR T 61 Average Count Number of Readings t rte eere ec e tren 61 aieo T EEUU 61 Using the power sensor as an external trigger 61 L extemal Tigger Laval EE 61 WEE 62 Inp
118. 210 AF Auto Scale Activates automatic scaling of the y axis for AF measurements RF power and RF spectrum measurements are not affected by the auto scaling Remote command SENSe ADJust SCALe Y AUTO CONTinuous on page 212 6 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 3 1 6 3 2 6 3 3 6 3 4 6 4 6 4 1 6 4 2 6 5 6 6 6 1 0 Trace Settings Analysis General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers lines etc can be config ured via the Analysis button in the Overview They are identical to the analysis func tions in the base unit except for the special marker functions The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chapter 11 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements on page 139 Tra Setting E 99 Trace Data Export Configuration eese eee nennen nnns 103 Working with Markers in the R amp S FPS Analog Demodulation application 104 Marker Settings reece erede arie epe t agg de Eutr o RESI Roca e eeu o aT anaes 105 Marker Search Settings and Positioning Funchons 109 Measuring Phase Noise enne nennen nnne nennen ener nennen 112 Marker Function Configuration sese 112 Limit Line Settings and Functions eeeeeesesseeeeeeeeenennenen nennen nnne 117 Limit Line Management 117 Barre 120 ZOOM FUNCUONS teee M 123 Analysis in MSRA Modoe cereum ee tine kne
119. 23 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer SPACing lt InterpolType gt This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the calculation of an upper limit line from one horizontal point to the next Parameters lt InterpolType gt LINear LOGarithmic RST LIN Manual operation See X Axis on page 122 See Y Axis on page 122 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer STATe State This command turns an upper limit line on and off Before you can use the command you have to select a limit line with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt NAME on page 269 lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Visibility on page 119 11 8 2 2 Analyzing Results CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer THReshold lt Limit gt This command defines an absolute limit for limit lines with a relative scale The R amp S FPS uses the threshold for the limit check if the limit line violates the thresh old lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Limit gt Numeric value The unit depends on CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UNIT on page 269 RST 200 Default unit dBm Manual operation See Threshold on page 121 Managing Limit Lines Useful commands for managing limit lines described in the R amp S FPS User Manual MMEM SEL ITEM LIN ALL MMEM STOR TYPE MMEM LOAD TYPE Remote commands
120. 5 elei e 116 Maximum Number Of Peaks scascccavsssvaciaveassaaveacacesasaas conasaasavacavacssssaeiaadeavjueasaaaee 116 Peak EXCUrsiO EE 116 Displaying Marker INurmbers 7 cocotte toe dde ria 116 Exporting the Peak LIS uin eire erre Ire Rede edu rsen d 116 Peak List State Activates deactivates the marker peak list If activated the peak list is displayed and the peaks are indicated in the trace display For each listed peak the frequency time X value and level Y value values are given Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks STATe on page 259 6 3 4 3 Working with Markers in the R amp S FPS Analog Demodulation application Sort Mode Defines whether the peak list is sorted according to the x values or y values In either case the values are sorted in ascending order Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks SORT on page 258 Maximum Number of Peaks Defines the maximum number of peaks to be determined and displayed Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks LIST SIZE on page 258 Peak Excursion Defines the minimum level value by which a signal must rise or fall so that it will be identified as a maximum or a minimum by the search functions Entries from 0 dB to 80 dB are allowed the resolution is 0 1 dB The default setting for the peak excursion is 6 dB Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt PEXCursion on page 251 D
121. 75 Amplitude Reference Level Input Settings Value 0 0 dBm Preamplifier Offset 0 0 dB Input Coupling Unit Dennen Impedance Mechanical Attenuation Electronic Attenuation State Mode Mode Value Mechanical AMGNUAUOM EE 64 L Attenuation Mode WANG eege ees Eer 64 Using Electronic Attenuation ccccccceccieeeccceteeeescecctseseccecnteseeccedesebencecertessecectteesees 65 luede EE 65 L Preamplifier option B33IB241 tette 65 L EE 66 EP cre MENO m 66 Reference Level Defines the expected maximum reference level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display OVLD for digitial baseband input The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the hardware of the R amp S FPS is adapted according to this value it is recommen ded that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 176 Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level The scal ing of the y axis is changed accordingly User Manual 1176 8474 02 06 63 Input and Frontend Settings Define an offset if the s
122. 9 RST 200 dBm Manual operation See Threshold on page 121 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt NAME Name This command selects a limit line that already exists or defines a name for a new limit line Parameters Name String containing the limit line name RST REM 1 to REM8 for lines 1 to 8 Manual operation See Name on page 121 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UNIT Unit This command defines the unit of a limit line lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Unit gt If you select dB as the limit line unit the command automatically turns the limit line into a relative limit line RST DBM Manual operation See Y Axis on page 122 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer DATA lt LimitLinePoints gt This command defines the vertical definition points of an upper limit line Analyzing Results lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt LimitLinePoints gt Variable number of level values Note that the number of vertical values has to be the same as the number of horizontal values set with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DATA If not the R amp S FPS either adds missing values or ignores surplus values The unit depends on CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UNIT on page 269 RST Limit line state is OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Data points on page 122 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer MARGin lt Margin gt This command defines an area around an u
123. ABORt GE 221 INITiate lt n gt SEQu ncer IMMediate E 222 ll NEI E ee le EE 222 INITiatesn SEQuencerREFResh ALL tn rtr a ren tne 223 INITiate lt n gt IMMediate TN REI TEE INPut AT Ten ation AU TO ME 177 Jl Diere llo M R INPUT p RAS DITE ly iol a o INPUtEATT AUTO C INPut EATT STATe ll Een dE RE VE 151 ll Del RRE 179 WIN PUI ns ee ee 151 IN PULSE Cty T a EEE 152 INSTrument CREateDUPILICALC poit cas rerit pret identi arn Svea et a e I iae ies 145 INS Trument e LE TEE 146 INSTr ment CREate NEW rtr her e n tn ret rere err ene reper te ee iE INR 145 INS Tr meht RE 146 DEA fois ABIBIBII prope 226 Ree e ROT NEE 227 LAYoutlDENtifyEWINDOW KEE 227 geen VERT Ee EE 228 LAY outgREPLace WINDOW ttn rre ret ren tri enr rne ner rc trn eere xeu 228 EAYOQUUSPIEIHOE EE 228 LAYOUCWINDOwW EDD IM 230 EAYOUtWINDOWSnD IDENUR race trece t nec ette tog c EE x c agn 230 LAYout WINDowsn 7 REMOVe in tero ri te eren hh e nene PER EXE E EE REY CERE SEENEN EE YR ES LER ERE FEE oan 230 EAYOUtWINDOWSM gt REPLACE ccs usur corretto ter peret end Cod oreet ENE eet x Rb INE REY CHE KNEE VO ETETA 231 MMEMory EOAD IQ S TATe ctnaaoett ttr recen tr trea tre e eoa ena e en n tor c tne en F
124. AL Culate nz M AbkermFUNCUonRtterence sse 176 CALCulatesn UNIT POW GM cci veio aves cid ove aoa de ede na ded ed bv ev rE2 ed vea v ab va ver tanya iver 176 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectvlSCALelRLEVel eene 176 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet eeeeesessssses 177 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion REFerence This command matches the reference level to the power level of a marker If you use the command in combination with a delta marker that delta marker is turned into a normal marker Example CALC MARK2 FUNC REF Sets the reference level to the level of marker 2 Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer lt Unit gt This command selects the unit of the y axis The unit applies to all measurement windows Parameters lt Unit gt DBM V A W DBPW WATT DBUV DBMV VOLT DBUA AMPere RST dBm Example CALC UNIT POW DBM Sets the power unit to dBm Manual operation See Unit on page 64 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel lt ReferenceLevel gt This command defines the reference level for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant With a reference level offset 0 the value range of the reference level is modified by the offset Parameters lt ReferenceLevel gt The unit is variable Range see datasheet RST 0 dBm Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Level on p
125. ALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks SORT ccccccccccesceccssseeseseeeceseeeseeseseanees 258 CAL Culate nz M b kermzFUNCHiontbtakeziAaTe eene nennt 259 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEC akS X cccccccccceesceeessseceesececeseseaseeeeeaeeeees 259 CAL Culate nz M Ab kermzFUNCHontbteakey sees nn nns 259 MMEMorny STOResn AUS p ENT 259 MMEMon STORES EE 260 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks ANNotation LABel STATe lt State gt This command turns labels for peaks found during a peak search on and off The labels correspond to the marker number in the marker peak list Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE ANN LAB STAT OFF Removes the peak labels from the diagram Manual operation See Displaying Marker Numbers on page 116 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks COUNt This command queries the number of peaks that have been found during a peak search The actual number of peaks that have been found may differ from the number of peaks you have set to be found because of the peak excursion lt n gt lt m gt are irrelevant Return values lt NumberOfPeaks gt Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE COUN Queries the number of peaks Analyzing Results Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks IMMediate Peaks This command initiates a peak search
126. ANdard 5 antreten a e EES oe Foe SENSe ADEModsris REENGIEI eit t o ete epus a DR Ui LEE eae RR IRR nee SEN 182 SENSE e KEE SENSe ADEMod lt n gt SPEC SPAN ZOOM SENSe JADEMod n SPECtrum BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution eene 183 SENSe ADEMods n SPECtrum RESU IE iiic retra tari ir teh rhet Rr rrr ce RENE 232 SENSe JADEMod n SPECtrum SPAN MAXimum eese nnne 199 SENSe JADEModsris SPECtr m TYPE eiat tte ne ate t adie eei caucasian AEN 215 SENSe JADEModsn SQUelch EEVel i oa Eo c E eee eta E eroe EELER 195 SENSe ADEModxn SQUelch STATS cca docete en Hon rne tio Otero ere Ete eta 195 SENSe ADEModsris SRAT eei ei ike eee Erud Edi staat HERR Tr baie ER eu hae ne REPE 184 SENSe JADEModsn ZOOM ENGIi iiie ce iria ace cor i e reete EEN 196 SENSe ADEMod n 7 ZOOMELENGIFi MODE 2 it rette ttr ra etre eee an the sa Pene EP EE 196 SENSe JADEModsris ZOOM S TARE iicet tais tot c ea iie HE uud o eee EL HS oda cuu Eu aleen Shania nee SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM STATe SENSE JADJUSTAL tiir i et pda du AE ei SENSe ADJ st CONFigure DUPRGliOn icio ent rio repente acide ints sae Che NNE SENSe JADJust CONFigure DURation MODE 2 eorr enne tiit rn theta inn 210 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYS Teresis LOWer cette rrt dae a rh rh Ren Rana 210 SENSe ADJust CONFigure H YS Tleresis UPBer rrr reap e
127. AXimum on page 199 Demodulation 5 8 3 AF Filter The AF filter reduces the evaluated bandwidth of the demodulated signal and can define a weighting function It is configured in the AF Filter tab of the Demodulation Settings dialog box e AF filters are only available for AF time domain evaluations AF filters are configured in the AF Filter tab of the Demodulation Settings dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Inthe Analog Demodulation Overview select the Demod Settings button then select the AF Filter tab Select the MEAS CONFIG key and then the AF Filter Config softkey ren x Demod Spectrum AfFilter Scaling Unit High Pass Low Pass Weighting Deemphasis All Filter Off Se 2 AM Spectrum t High 85 OWE PASS cci ee b er use A 86 Ae D 86 RE e E 87 Deactivating all i c 87 High Pass Defines a high pass filter with the given limit to separate the DC component The filters are indicated by the 3 dB cutoff frequency The 50 Hz and 300 Hz filters are designed as 2nd order Butterworth filter 12 dB octave The 20 Hz filter is designed as 3rd order Butterworth filter 18 dB octave The high pass filters are active in the following demodulation bandwidth range None No AF Filter used default 20 Hz 100 Hz lt demodulation bandwidth x 1 6 MHz
128. AdemodPredefined lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Standard gt String containing the file name If you have stored the file in a subdirectory of the directory men tioned above you have to include the relative path to the file Return values lt Standard gt The query returns the name of the currently loaded standard Manual operation See Load Standard on page 46 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt PRESet RESTore This command restores the default configurations of predefined Analog Demodulation standards Note that the command will overwrite customized standards that have the same name as predefined standards lt n gt is irrelevant Usage Event Manual operation See Restore Standard Files on page 46 Configuring the Measurement SENSe ADEMod lt n gt PRESet STORe Standard This command saves the current Analog Demodualtion measurement configuration Standard definitions are stored in an xml file The default directory for Analog Demodu altion standards is C r_s instr user predefined AdemodPredefined lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Standard gt String containing the file name You can save the file in a subdirectory of the directory men tioned above In that case you have to include the relative path to the file Manual operation See Save Standard on page 46 11 4 2 Configuring the Input SC ne 150 e Working with Power SOlsSOfe aad ebrei tate aute dvi Eco Lx ay ERR H
129. AximumNENT senes nne snh sns ne sensus 252 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum PEAK esses enne 252 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzM AximumbRlGHt see eee nsns n nsns sensns aan 252 Analyzing Results CAL Culate nz M Abkermmz MiNimum LEET 252 CAL Culate nz M Abkermz MiNimumNENT nennen nnne n nins nnn nni 252 CALCulate n MARKer m MlNimum PEAK cessisse nnne 253 CAL Culate nz M bker mmz MiNimum BIG 253 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 111 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 111 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker pos
130. CONtinuous essent nennen nennen DISPlay WINDowsn TRAGCe t SEL6GCL EE DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing DISPlayEWINDowsri NEE d Re DEE DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE cece tec cee eee tee sees sees seeeeseeeteeeeteeeee DISPlay WINDow lt n TRACest Y SCALeE MODE sinners rep rnt t rne nen trennen DISPlayi WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel nennen nennen neret DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet seen enne DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue DISPlay WINDowsn gt TRAGe st S lATe ent erro thee ttu tte sena ther err daN ESENS BISPlay WINDowsn ZOOM AREA ip correre tree d aor tain aix erronee kane tenebunt Eve ER RR Een DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA nennen eee nerr trennen DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe BISPlay WINDowsrn ZOOM S TAT HE i Sue Hago 155 FORMatDEXPort DSEParaltor 5 5 rrr rne rtr e eg n RE o ER EEVI e SNE 234 FORMAaEDEXP On HEAD 6 lisse 235 FORMat DEXPont NEE 235 TOONE RBI Np M E INITiate lt n gt CONMeas INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous INimatesn gt EE EE INITiatesn gt SEQu encer
131. Capturing and exporting UO data 1 Press the PRESET key 2 Press the MODE key and select the IQ Analyzer or any other application that supports UO data Configure the data acquisition Press the RUN SINGLE key to perform a single sweep measurement Select the E Save icon in the toolbar Select the I Q Export softkey In the file selection dialog box select a storage location and enter a file name o NO Dm 5 o Select Save The captured data is stored to a file with the extension iq tar Importing UO data 1 Press the MODE key and select the IQ Analyzer or any other application that supports UO data If necessary switch to single sweep mode by pressing the RUN SINGLE key Select the FJ Open icon in the toolbar Select the I Q Import softkey Select the storage location and the file name with the iq tar file extension o oco F o Ww Select Open The stored data is loaded from the file and displayed in the current application Previewing the UO data in a web browser How to Export and Import UO Data The iq tar file format allows you to preview the I Q data in a web browser 1 Use an archive tool e g WinZip or PowerArchiver to unpack the ig tar file into a folder Locate the folder using Windows Explorer Open your web browser Drag the UO parameter XML file e g example xml into your web browser ES Jos G le teva e D a Saved by FSV IQ Analyze
132. Ctrum RF spectrum Note The trace modes for each trace and each window can also be configured individ ually using the DISP TRAC MODI TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 212 E command see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt TraceMode gt WRITe Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting AVERage The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Average Count determines the number of averag ing procedures MAXHold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S FPS saves the sweep result in the trace mem ory only if the new value is greater than the previous one MINHold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FPS saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one VIEW The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and dis played OFF Hides the selected trace RST WRITe OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Example ADEM AM AVER MAXH MINH OFF OFF OFF Determines average max hold and min hold values simultane ously for the traces 1 3 of the RF time domain evaluation ADEM AM WRIT OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Determines only the current measurement values for trace 1 ADEM AM OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Switches AM demodulation off SENSe JAVERage lt n gt COUNt lt AverageCount gt This command defines the number of s
133. DC FM Example ADEM AF COUP DC Switches on DC coupling Manual operation See AF Coupling on page 80 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt PM RPOint X Time This command determines the position where the phase of the PM demodulated signal is set to 0 rad The maximum possible value depends on the measurement time selected in the instrument this value is output in response to the query ADEM PM RPO X MAX lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Time gt 0 s to measurement time RST 0s Example ADEM PM RPO 500us Sets the position where the phase to 0 rad setting to 500 us Usage SCPI confirmed 11 4 8 2 Configuring the Measurement Manual operation See Zero Phase Reference Position PM Time Domain only on page 81 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt SQuelch STATe State This command activates the squelch function i e if the signal falls below a defined threshold see SENSe ADEMod lt n gt SQUelch LEVel on page 195 the demodu lated data is automatically set to 0 lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DEM SQU ON Signals below the level threshold are squelched Manual operation See Squelch State on page 79 SENSe ADEMod n SQUelch LEVel Threshold This command defines the level threshold below which the demodulated data is set to 0 if squelching is enabled see SENSe ADEMod lt n gt SQUelch STA
134. DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe on page 179 Remote commands exclusive to trace configuration bISPlayPWINDowensETRAGCBSESMODE iere ree td ea te edere trt etes 212 DiSblavlfWiNDow nztTR ACectsMODE HCOhNtnuous nee 213 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt SEL Ct cccecccceceeee eee eceeeeeteceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseaesanaeaaae 214 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t STATe essere nnne nnns 214 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AM ABSolute TDOMain TYPE eene 214 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AM RELative TDOMain PE 214 SENSe ADEMod n AM RELative AFSPectrum PE 214 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt FM TDOMain TYPE eene 214 SENSe ADEMod n FM AFSPectrum TYPE auctae tete etse tuuc 215 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt PM TDOMAain TYPE ecce 215 SENSe JADEMod lt n gt PM AFSPectrum TvpEL eere 215 SENSe ADEModx n SPECtr m TYPE tacet iaceo etta 215 SENSeJAVERaOESh COBNME EE 216 IGENZGelAVERage nzJ TAfectl nennen nnns nnns en ere ne nri reri rnnt 217 ISENSeJAVERagestims YPE uiia eeu te etre ee cedente ae ae et 217 ISENGe JiuiNDow nz JDETechorzfFUNGCHon nene 217 SENSe WINDow n DETector t FUNCtion AUTO cesses 218 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE Mode This command selects the trace mode Configuring the Measurement In case of max hold min hold or average trace mode you c
135. Display on page 108 11 8 1 3 11 8 1 4 Analyzing Results Marker Search Settings The following commands define criteria for searches CAL Culate nzM bkercmz PENCursion cesses enne nnns enn rra nna 251 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt PEXCursion Excursion This command defines the peak excursion for all markers in all windows m n are irrelevant The peak excursion sets the requirements for a peak to be detected during a peak search The unit depends on the measurement Application Result display Unit Spectrum dB ADEMOD RF dB ADEMOD AM PCT ADEMOD FM kHz ADEMOD PM RAD Parameters Excursion The excursion is the distance to a trace maximum that must be attained before a new maximum is recognized or the distance to a trace minimum that must be attained before a new minimum is recognized RST 5 PCT in AM displays 50 kHz in FM displays 0 5 RAD in PM displays Example CALC MARK PEXC 10dB Defines peak excursion as 10 dB Manual operation See Peak Excursion on page 110 Positioning the Marker This chapter contains remote commands necessary to position the marker on a trace e Positioning Normal Markers nennen 251 Positioning Delta Mates etre rt hend ee Rente n ae rta e a expe eun nnde 253 Positioning Normal Markers The following commands position markers on the trace CAL Culate nz M bkermz M Aximum LEET 252 CAL Culate nz M AbkermzM
136. E ER LN TA EE 267 CAL Culate nz LUlMitcks LOMerM AhcGim esae ener sensn inadina side 267 CALCulate lt n gt LlMit lt k gt LOWer MODE nn nn nn ennn nsns ness n sss ss nndis 267 CAL Culatesn gt LIMitsk LOW er DEFSel 2 iren tte ettet ae so dete e tendere oneris 268 GAL Gulate mEIMiESk S TEOWoerSSEMEL uo dicere e edocet eode evo vence 268 ee E EI A Be ele D 268 CAL Culate nz LUlMitcks L Mer iaTfe enne nsns snn insi ss esti sa sss nnda as 268 CAL CulatesmLIMisesLoOWerTHResholg 2 tenti raa ri need aree 269 GALbGulatesm LIMIEKSINAME EE 269 CALC HIE E RTE E UN RE 269 CAL Culatesm gt LIMitsk UPPerE DATA EE 269 Analyzing Results CAL Culatesn gt LIMitsk UPPer MARGIN vaciccsisscextccivasadecebveaadsdeceteeaeatenuvasedsiddtesadicedetaae cues 270 GALCulate n LIMitek UPPerMOBDB 22 rir oot te Ea ENEA aAA aahi 270 CALCu late lt n gt LlMit lt k gt UPPer QFFS6ft nen ssnesetns asse ssh snas ass nsa an 270 CAL CulatesmsL Kita HS Ee SHIP deae eoe enne nue nutre rnnt a rure necant 271 CALCulate n LIMit k PPer SPACing iieri esee cesi ak c dus hae sns i esi cea 271 GALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer STAT 2 2 020 cc0sccesssccnseecatsceccncnatsccesactnasenccabaacansanceaces 271 CAL Culate nz LUlMitcks UbPberTHesbold eene nennen nnne nnns 272 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt COMMent Comment This command defines a comment for a limit line lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters Commen
137. EQuencer IMMediate on page 222 the mode is only considered the next time the measurement in that channel is activated by the Sequencer Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 Continuous sweep OFF 0 Single sweep RST 0 Example INIT CONT OFF Switches the sweep mode to single sweep INIT CONT ON Switches the sweep mode to continuous sweep Manual operation See Continuous Sweep RUN CONT on page 76 INITiate lt n gt IMMediate This command starts a single new measurement With sweep count or average count gt 0 this means a restart of the corresponding number of measurements With trace mode MAXHold MINHold and AVERage the previous results are reset on restarting the measurement Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps You can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FPS User Manual Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Usage Event Manual operation See Single Sweep RUN SINGLE on page 76 INITiate lt n gt REFResh This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated SySTem SEQuencer SYST SEQ OFF and only for applications in MSRA mode not the MSRA Master The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by the currently active application only The results for any other applications remain unchanged The application channel must be selected before t
138. F Power D Trigger Level 20 0 dBm Drop Out Time 0 0 D Trigger Offset E Slope Rising Falling Hysteresis Holdoff gt To display this dialog box do one of the following e Select the Trigger button in the Analog Demodulation Overview e Select the TRIG key and then the Trigger Config softkey Trigger SOURCE ne E 69 Trigger input and Output Settings E 72 Trigger Configuration 5 5 1 Trigger Source Settings The trigger source settings are configured in the Trigger Source tab of the Trigger dialog box MUA GE SS EE 69 uli 1r MENTRE NO TT T 69 L Esumal THOSE ett EE 69 H eg TT AMNEM OE 70 3l 0 m 70 L FM AM PM RF Offline 70 E E E AE E 70 e e EE 71 Tigger Oey e PO 71 ek 71 Dor Out TIM EE 71 OPE E 72 NG GSU NOTO EE 72 Trigger Source In the Analog Demodulation application the next measurement can be triggered if the selected input signal exceeds the threshold specified using the Trigger Level setting see Trigger Level on page 71 Thus a periodic signal modulated onto the carrier frequency can be displayed It is recommended that the measurement time covers at least five periods of the audio signal Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 190 Free Run Trigger Source No trigger source is considered Data acquisition is started manually or automatically and continues until stopped explicitely Remote command TRIG SO
139. I confirmed CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL This command queries the result of a limit check To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 220 Return values lt Result gt 0 PASS 1 FAIL Example INIT WAI Starts a new sweep and waits for its end CALC LIM3 FAIL Queries the result of the check for limit line 3 Usage Query only SCPI confirmed 11 8 2 4 Analyzing Results Programming Example Using Limit Lines The following examples demonstrate how to work with limit lines in a remote environ ment Example Contiguring LMt Elles oed ls a attend asta eee ee 275 e Example Performing a Limit Check eiae EE eves 276 Example Configuring Limit Lines This example demonstrates how to configure 2 limit lines an upper and a lower limit for a measurement in a remote environment ffe5e59e59esesese Configuing the limit lines CALC LIM1 NAME FM1 Names limit line 1 FM1 CALC LIM1 CONT MODE ABS Selects absolute scaling for the horizontal axis CALC LIM1 CONT 1 MHz 50MHz 100 MHz 150MHz 200MHz Defines 5 horizontal definition points for limit line 1 CALC LIM1 UPP MODE ABS Selects an absolute vertical scale for limit line 1 CALC LIM1 UNIT DBM
140. IGSerES TE Le idonei terni rare eite c eet ee oin E Etc 162 SENSe PMETer lt p gt UPDatel STATO rari tet nunt Lr reden s kh suede d Eng i qp ETENE EESE AEA 159 SENSE PME Ters p gt STATS rater trecenti reet etta ge dene a tpi tee ege 159 SENSe SWEep COUNt SENSe SWEep POINts CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FlXed RPOint MAXimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt sm gt FUNCtion FlXed RPO Nt X eee 255 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOintY esses 256 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y OFFSet sss 256 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed STATe essent 256 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK TO MARKer lt m gt CALCulate lt n gt DEL Tamarker lt m gt MAXimumiLEFT cii uere on re acriter enero neg CAL CGulate nz D I Tamarker mz MANimum NENT CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimumy PEAK esses isa A CAL CGulate nz D I Tamarker zmz MiNimum LEET CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker mz MiNimumNENT A CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINIMUM RIGHTL A CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK CALGCulatesn DELTamarkersmo MONPDE arcos Fr mettent erret ete cote ure M Rd eta Oe Re vas 246 CAL Culatesn gt DEL Tamarkersm gt MREF cin rtr eee caet E co
141. IONING Positioning remote control Querying position remote Remote control Search settings remote wi 251 Setting up remote control 243 State 106 Step S ZE cem 108 Step size remote control ssssusssse 249 Table vie e 108 Table evaluation method sssssusssss 22 Table remote control 249 Type e 106 POM H 106 Maximizing Windows remote 1 2 sete e etai et 225 Measurement accuracy External generator eere tnter nne n 35 Measurement channel Creating remote 2 aeterne 145 146 Deleting remote AA 146 Duplicating remote we 145 Querying remote 2 tre tert teet 146 Renaming remote we 147 Replacing remote eese 146 Measurement examples Analog Demodulation siirsin aiir 132 Measurement time wi 75 7 AUtO Selris cai dci dE EE Si ae eat UE 98 Displayed 10 Effects 120 Power sensor Value range e lte Un DI EE 111 Marker positioning Nextt horreo dati ect ree iere Podio 112 MKR eener geed 109 110 MKR FUNCT ROY ege Eet Deeg 112 Modulation Bro E Depth scaling RE Une MSRA Analysis interval 5 er treten Operating mode AL Ee E MSRA applications Capture offset 75 Capture offset remote Multiple
142. ISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SPACing eese nennen 180 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe Range This command defines the display range of the y axis for all traces t is irrelevant Parameters Range If the y axis shows the power the unit is dB with a range from 10 dB to 200 dB If the y axis shows the frequency the unit is Hz with a variable range RST 100 dB frequency domain 500 kHz time domain Example DISP TRAC Y 110dB Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Range on page 91 Configuring the Measurement DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE Automatic scaling of the y axis is performed once then switched off again for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Auto Scale Once on page 91 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE Mode This command selects the type of scaling of the y axis for all traces t is irrelevant When the display update during remote control is off this command has no immediate effect Parameters Mode ABSolute absolute scaling of the y axis RELative relative scaling of the y axis RST ABSolute Example DISP TRAC Y MODE REL Manual operation See Scaling on page 91 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition Position This command defines the vertical position of the reference level on the display grid
143. L CGulate nz MAbker mz FUNGCon ADEMod PMIREGut GTEREL atived 237 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod PM RESult t CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod SINad RESult t sse CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod THD RESUlt t 2 239 CAlCulate cnzMAbker mzFUNGCiontbtzke ANNotaton Apel GTATel cc eceeeeeeeeerereeeeeneeeee 257 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks COUNt CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks LIST SIZE essent a CAL Culate cnz MAh ker mz FUNGCion bake GOHRT seen nennen neret CAL Culate nzMAbkercmzFUNGCiontptakeGfATe A CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks IMMediate eese 258 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEeaks X 259 CAL Culate nz MAbkercmzEUNGCiontbteake Vd 259 GALCulate sn MARKer m FUNCtion NDBJ DOWrFi 1c aE EEEa A N 260 CAlCulate nzMAbRker mz FUNGonNDBDown FR Ouencyg cee cee eee eeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeteaeeeeeeee 261 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown QFACtor 2261 CAL Culate nz MAbker zmz FUNGC onNDPBDown REG 262 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtionN NDBDown STAT 0 c ccccceeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeseeaeeeseceeeseseetetenaees 262 CAL CGulate nz MAbker mz FUNGConNDPBDown TIME 263 CALGulatesn gt MARKerem gt FUNCtion PNOISe RESUR enne entente 264 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise STATe 252
144. M RFPower XTIM AMSummary Result summary XTIM AMSummary RELative XTIM FMSummary XTIM FMSummary RELative XTIM PMSummary XTIM PMSummary RELative XTIM SUMMary Programming Example 11 11 Programming Example In this example we will configure and perform an analog demodulation measurement to demonstrate the remote control commands Signal generator settings e g R amp S SMW Frequency 500 MHz Level 10 dBm Modulation FM Modulation frequency 10 kHz Frequency deviation 50 kHz ee ees Preparing the measurement RST Reset the instrument FREQ CENT 500 MHz Set the center frequency to 500 MHz DISP TRAC Y SCAL RLEV 0 Set the reference level to 0 dBm INST CRE NEW ADEM FMDemodulation Activate an Analog Demodulation measurement channel named FMDemodulation ADEM MTIM ims Set the measurement time to 1 ms 10 periods SENS ADJ SCAL Y AUTO ON Optimize the scaling of the y axis for the current measurement continuously BAND DEM 400 kHz Set the demodulation bandwidth to 400 kHz TRIG SOUR FM Use offline FM trigger TRIG LEV FM 500MHz Trigger when signal reaches 500 MHz LAY ADD WIND 1 BEL XTIM FM AFSP Add an FM Spectrum result display below FM Time Domain ADEM FM AFSP WRIT AVER OFF OFF OFF OFF Defines two traces in the FM Spectrum 1 Clear write 2 average Programming Example ADEM SET 8MHz 32000 FM POS 500 3
145. Mod lt n gt SRATe This command returns the sample rate set up for the current analog demodulation measurement lt n gt is irrelevant Example ADEM SRAT Returns the current sample rate Usage Query only SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod Bandwidth This command sets the bandwidth for analog demodulation Depending on the selected demodulation bandwidth the instrument selects the required sampling rate For details on the correlation between demodulation bandwidth and sampling rate refer to chapter 4 3 Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset on page 27 This command is identical to SENS ADEM BAND DEM Parameters Bandwidth RST 5MHz Example BAND DEM 1MHz Sets demodulation bandwidth to 1 MHz Manual operation See Demodulation Bandwidth on page 74 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod TYPE FilterType This command defines the type of demodulation filter to be used This command is identical to SENS ADEM BAND DEM TYPE Parameters lt FilterType gt FLAT Standard flat demodulation filter GAUSs Gaussian filter for optimized settling behaviour RST FLAT Manual operation See Demodulation Filter on page 74 SENSe BANDwidth RESolution Bandwidth This command defines the resolution bandwidth and decouples the resolution band width from the span For statistics measurements this command defines the demodulation bandwidth Configu
146. Ogere port 0TYPe Suffix port Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 TRG AUX Parameters lt Level gt HIGH TTL signal LOW OV RST LOW Manual operation See Trigger 2 on page 72 See Level on page 73 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe lt OutputT ype gt This command selects the type of signal generated at the trigger output Note For offline AF or RF triggers no output signal is provided 11 4 8 Configuring the Measurement Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 TRG AUX Parameters lt OutputType gt DEVice Sends a trigger signal when the R amp S FPS has triggered inter nally TARMed Sends a trigger signal when the trigger is armed and ready for an external trigger event UDEFined Sends a user defined trigger signal For more information see OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel RST DEVice Manual operation See Output Type on page 72 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate This command generates a pulse at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 TRG AUX Usage Event Manual operation See Send Trigger on page 73 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth lt Length gt This command defines the length of the pulse generated at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 TRG AUX Parameters lt Length
147. Only Lecce c etcetera 81 Squelch State Activates the squelch function i e if the signal falls below a defined threshold the demodulated data is automatically set to 0 This is useful for example to avoid demodulation noise during transmission breaks Remote command SENSe ADEMod lt n gt SQUelch STATe on page 195 User Manual 1 176 8474 02 06 79 Demodulation Squelch Level Defines the level threshold below which the demodulated data is set to 0 if squelching is enabled The squelch level is an absolute value Remote command SENSe ADEMod lt n gt SQUelch LEVel on page 195 AF Coupling Controls the automatic correction of the frequency offset and phase offset of the input signal This function is only available for FM or PM time domain evaluations e FM time evaluation If DC is selected the absolute frequency is displayed i e an input signal with an offset relative to the center frequency is not displayed symmetrically with respect to the zero line If AC is selected the frequency offset is automatically corrected i e the trace is always symmetric with respect to the zero line e PM time evaluation If DC is selected the phase runs according to the existing frequency offset In addi tion the DC signal contains a phase offset of rr If AC is selected the frequency offset and phase offset are automatically corrected i e the trace is always symmetric with respect to the zero line Re
148. Ot o ceret enr te t rever el da 61 F Falling Slope Power sensor sekiin oai 62 File format Ep ico t ro ore rr me te onte 240 Trace e rette cb reet eon OP ett it serena 240 File name fere 45 Files Format VQ data x ctc teet centes 288 UO data binary XML sssees 292 UC parameter XML n eren 289 Filters A weighted AF 2 tette teorico 86 GGIR AP iss cost 86 CCITT AE EE 86 Demodulation High pass E 85 Low pass AP mI 86 Weighting AF YIG remote ise iet iet eed Fixed reference DEMING e Remote control FM Offline ife cia 70 FM Spectrum Evaluation method Rete 17 FM Time Domain Eval ation meltfiod 2 eet 14 Format Data ott eL ehh eu e UH Cuts 240 Data remote 233 235 see also File format sredini eini 240 Free Run let GE 69 Frequency Config tatioti EE 82 Coupling power sensor nens 60 Beemphasis filler eet tmr 87 DeViatiOn p S 26 Deviation scaling 88 External geherator n rennen 54 POWer SCNSOF oc Mace ee eevee 60 Remote control i LCE i um 66 Cr 84 Frequency coupling Automatic external generator ssssssssss External generator Reverse sweep external generator Frequency denominator External Generator 5 2 rere 54 Frequency numerator Externa
149. Q REL 25PCT Selects the low pass filter as 25 96 of the demodulation band width Manual operation See Low Pass on page 86 SENSe FILTer lt n gt LPASs STATe State This command activates deactivates the selected low pass filter for the specified evalu ation For details on the low pass filter refer to Low Pass on page 86 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example FILT LPAS ON Activates the selected low pass filter Manual operation See Low Pass on page 86 Defining the Scaling and Units The scaling parameters define the range of the demodulated data to be displayed Scaling for AF Evaluation These settings are only available for AF evaluations Useful commands described elsewhere SENSe ADJust SCALe Y AUTO CONTinuous on page 212 SENSe ADEMod n AF COUP1ing on page 194 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition on page 180 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 180 Specific commands DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RVALue esses nnne 204 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RVALue Value This command defines the reference value assigned to the reference position in the specified window Separate reference values are maintained for the various displays 11 4 8 7 11 4 8 8 Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt Value gt RST
150. R amp S9FPS K7 Analog Demodulation Option User Manual start 0 0 s 09 4 Result Summary Carrier Power Peak i FM 75 860 kHz 75 813 kHz 1001 pts 8 499 dB 98 suring 1176 8474 02 06 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Measuremen TH 865 dB Test amp Measurement User Manual This manual applies to the following R amp S9FPS models with firmware version 1 30 and higher R amp S FPS4 1319 2008K04 R amp S FPS7 1319 2008K07 R amp S FPS13 1319 2008K13 R amp S FPS30 1319 2008K30 R amp S FPS40 1319 2008K40 The following firmware options are described e R amp S FPS K7 1321 4079 02 The firmware of the instrument makes use of several valuable open source software packages For information see the Open Source Acknowledgement on the user documentation CD ROM included in delivery Rohde amp Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing 2015 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 81671 M nchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S9FPS is abbreviated as R amp S FPS
151. Ra Pinna nn Rau se 124 UO Data Import and Export ssssseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeee 126 Import Export Functlons reiner nente nnb inne roro EeE rarah SEENEN 126 How to Export and Import UO Data een 128 How to Perform Measurements in the Analog Demodulation Appli pallone OR REI A EM A QA KR M E EEUU 130 Measurement Example Demodulating an FM Signal 132 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement 138 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 139 Int MUCHO m E 140 Common Suffixes eene nnne enit ta insu itia sauna na Pera naa RASSEN 144 Activating Analog Demodulation Measurements eene 145 Configuring the Measurement eese enne nennen nnne nnn nnns 148 Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps eene 218 Configuring the Result Display eeeeeeeennenenennnn nennen nennen 224 Retrieving Results nemen retine ss seactteecesccteecessasteessesasseeees 231 Analyzing Results cire oiii eerie toot ri teste riii i enar EEs 242 Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results eee 281 Commands for Compatibility eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenen nnne nens 283 Programming Examplo cuisinier nennt a iria nennt iius nna RE Drs innu n Re Ru Rand 284 Predefined
152. Reference Fixed Linked Markers State off on Level 70 0 Time Frequency 15 1Hz AF Spectrum eon Sweep Points Peak Search Marker Table Display reete teinte etn tte hte Rte n tne ee Lek eil 108 WANK EE ET 108 Defining a Fixed Referee erai er enn eder oae 108 Link Tie Market opor tente e rr epe Har ride Run Sonatinas sedan Xen Rp ciel Rame kx d rp 109 Link AF Spectrum MaIKG ccce aene petat ot d ed d Rete ea repete ente tke eee 109 Marker Table Display Defines how the marker information is displayed On Displays the marker information in a table in a separate area beneath the diagram Off Displays the marker information within the diagram area Auto Default Up to two markers are displayed in the diagram area If more markers are active the marker table is displayed automatically Remote command DISPlay MTAB1e on page 250 Marker Stepsize Defines the size of the steps that the marker position is moved using the rotary knob Standard The marker position is moved in Span 1000 steps which corre sponds approximately to the number of pixels for the default display of 1001 sweep points This setting is most suitable to move the marker over a larger distance Sweep The marker position is moved from one sweep point to the next This Points setting is required for a very precise positioning if more sweep points are collected than the number of pixels that can be displayed on the screen It
153. S K7 Measurement Example Demodulating an FM Signal Eh 9 Now the RF spectrum shows that part of the FM signal is cut off The missing sig nal parts are not included in the calculated results Increase the demodulation bandwidth to 400 kHz to include the entire signal but no interfering frequencies The span is not automatically increased for the wider DBW since it may be useful to display only a small range from the demodulated bandwidth However this means the RF spectrum will still not show the entire signal 10 Increase the span manually to show the entire demodulated bandwidth a Select the RF Spectrum window b Press the SPAN key c Select the Full Span softkey MultiView SS Spectrum Analog Demod z Freq 500 0 MHz 1AP Clrw Ref 0 00 Hz DC CF 500 0 MHz 1001 pts 5 RF Spectrum CF 500 0 MHz 100t pts Span 400 0 kHz 4 Result Summary Carrier Power 10 35 dBm Carrier Offset 667 85 Hz Peak Peak ipeak 2 RMS Mod Freq SINAD FM 50 031 kHz 48 717 kHz 49 374 kHz 34 941 kHz 10 000 kHz Fig 9 6 RF spectrum with demodulation bandwidth 400 kHz 11 Once the correct DBW has been determined you can replace the RF spectrum by the FM spectrum result display to analyze the spectrum of the FM signal Select the Display Config softkey and move an FM Spectrum window over the RF Spectrum window in the display um gt Ee ae User Manual 1176 8474 02 06 135 R amp S FPS K7 Measurement Example Demodulating an FM Si
154. SPECtrum RF Spectrum LAYout CATalog WINDow This command queries the name and index of all active windows in the active mea surement channel from top left to bottom right The result is a comma separated list of values for each window with the syntax lt WindowName_1 gt lt Windowlndex_1 gt lt WindowName_n gt lt Windowlndex_n gt Return values lt WindowName gt string Name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Windowlndex numeric value Index of the window Example LAY CAT Result zt e DEE yD Two windows are displayed named 2 at the top or left and 1 at the bottom or right Usage Query only LAYout IDENtify WINDow lt WindowName gt This command queries the index of a particular display window in the active measure ment channel Note to query the name of a particular window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify query Query parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window Return values lt WindowIndex gt Index number of the window Usage Query only Configuring the Result Display LAYout REMove WINDow lt WindowName gt This command removes a window from the display in the active measurement channel Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Usage Event LAYout REPLace WINDow lt WindowName gt lt Window
155. Selected BEE 106 Marker LE 106 Marker Position X ValUGC cccesccseeeeeecteseeeceectaneesaaecdneeeecsccnpecaeaetenneeaaeectaeeuaat nents 106 IUE cM hue 106 User Manual 1176 8474 02 06 105 Working with Markers in the R amp S FPS Analog Demodulation application eher MAIKO M 106 eat ehre Bei 107 Assigning the Marker to a Trace 107 PAN NANI OU EE 107 Selected Marker Marker name The marker which is currently selected for editing is highlighted orange Remote command Marker selected via suffix lt m gt in remote commands Marker State Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 244 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 247 Marker Position X value Defines the position x value of the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 244 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 248 Marker Type Toggles the marker type The type for marker 1 is always Normal the type for delta marker 1 is always Delta These types cannot be changed Note If normal marker 1 is the active marker switching the Mkr Type activates an additional delta marker 1 For any other marker switching the marker type does not activate an additional marker it only switches the type of the selected marker Normal A normal marker indicates the absolute value at the defined position in t
156. Selects the unit dBm for limit line 1 CALCETLIMI UPP 910 5 0 95 10 Defines 5 definition points for limit line 1 CALC LIM1 UPP MARG 5dB Defines an area of 5 dB around limit line 1 where limit check violations are still tolerated CALC LIM1 UPP SHIF 10DB Shifts the limit line 1 by 10 dB CALC LIM1 UPP OFFS 3dB Defines an additional 3 dB offset for limit line 1 CALC LIM3 NAME FM3 Names limit line 3 FM3 CALC LIM3 LOW MODE REL Selects a relative vertical scale for limit line 3 CALC LIM3 UNIT DB CALC LIM3 CONT 1 MHz 50MHz 100 MHz 150MHz 200MHz Defines 5 horizontal definition points for limit line 3 CALC LIM3 LOW 90 60 40 60 90 Defines 5 definition points relative to the reference level for limit line 3 CALC LIM3 LOW SHIF 2 Shifts the limit line 3 by 2dB Analyzing Results CALC LIM3 LOW OFFS 3 Defines an additional 3 dB offset for limit line 3 CALC LIM3 LOW THR 200DBM Defines a power threshold of 200dBm that must be exceeded for limit to be checked CALC LIM3 LOW MARG 5dB Defines an area of 5dB around limit line 3 where limit check violations are still tolerated Ji Storing the limit lines MMEM SEL CHAN LIN ALL ON MMEM STOR TYPE CHAN MMEM STOR STAT 1 LimitLines FM1 FM3 Example Performing a Limit Check This example demonstrates how to perform a limit check during a basic frequency
157. Standards and Settings 286 VQ Data File Format itai nene titht nin vu cu he ehre een 288 UO Parameter XML File Gpechftcation REENEN EEN 289 VQ Data Binary File 2n sccessesie ccsdcedvesscaysdece eveetivesscned seteesestdecssdanesss 292 List of Remote Commands AnalogDemoo Q 294 j dur M en em 301 User Manual 1176 8474 02 06 4 R amp S9FPS K7 Preface 1 Preface 1 1 About this Manual This Analog Demodulation User Manual provides all the information specific to the application All general instrument functions and settings common to all applications and operating modes are described in the main R amp S FPS User Manual The main focus in this manual is on the measurement results and the tasks required to obtain them The following topics are included Welcome to the Analog Demodulation Application Introduction to and getting familiar with the application Measurements and Result Displays Details on supported measurements and their result types Measurement Basics Background information on basic terms and principles in the context of the mea surement Configuration Analysis A concise description of all functions and settings available to configure measure ments and analyze results with their corresponding remote control command UO Data Import and Export Description of general functio
158. TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 180 AF Auto Scale Activates automatic scaling of the y axis for AF measurements RF power and RF spectrum measurements are not affected by the auto scaling Remote command SENSe ADJust SCALe Y AUTO CONTinuous on page 212 RF Evaluation These settings are only available for RF evaluations and the result summary Demod Spectrum Scaling Unit Scaling CH Logarithmic Range 100 dB hi E Linear Percent E Linear with Unit Ref Level Position 100 0 Absolute es Relative Sel ejie miclal 6 RF Time Domain 5 8 5 Demodulation Range Defines the displayed y axis range in dB The default value is 100 dB For Analog Demodulation measurements time domain scaling is defined in Hz default 500 kHz Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 179 Ref Level Position Defines the reference level position i e the position of the maximum AD converter value on the level axis in 9e where 0 96 corresponds to the lower and 100 to the upper limit of the diagram Only available for RF measurements Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition on page 180 Auto Scale Once Automatically determines the optimal range and reference level position to be dis played for the current measurement settings The display is only set once it is not adapted further if the measurement settings are changed again Remote co
159. Te on page 195 lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Threshold gt numeric value The absolute threshold level Range 150 dBm to 30 dBm RST 40 dBm Example DEM SQU LEV 80 If the signal drops below 80 dBm the demodulated data is set to 0 Manual operation See Squelch Level on page 80 Time Domain Zoom Settings Using the time domain zoom the demodulated data for a particular time span is extrac ted and displayed in more detail SENSeJADEMe dsn ZOOMELEN Gi DE 196 SENSE JADEModsn ZOOM LEN GINIMO DE to tte arena een ety YE E aE 196 SENS amp JADEModsn cZOOMSS TAL tradet tuoi o rite sod nina aaia iaa an E da i aua 196 SENSe ADEMod n ZOOML ESTATe eee attt RE ee ant cH Ree ERR REED apr Dads 197 Configuring the Measurement SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM LENGth Length The command allows you to define the length of the time domain zoom area for the analog demodulated measurement data in the specified window manually If the length is defined manually using this command the zoom mode is also set to manual Parameters lt Length gt RST sweep time Length of the zoom area in seconds Example ADEM ZOOM LENG 2s Zoom mode is set to manual and the zoom length to 2 seconds Manual operation See Length on page 81 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM LENGth MODE Mode The command defines whether the length of the zoom area for the analog demodula ted measurement data is defined a
160. Tem COMMunicate PEXPress RDEVice GENerator ADDRess CATalog eese 167 SYSTem GOMMunicate PEXPress RES QGah rtr terr Rn rn n de ERE EXE E a en Ead 167 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator INTertace nennen 167 SYSTem cOMMunicate RDEVice GENerator I Y PE aer err rer etre rene uere ne tu neri 168 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer COUNIE rrr rrr rnnt tree in a 152 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer p CONFigure AUTO STATe eene 152 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer lt p gt DEFine SYSTem COMMunicate TCPip RDEVice GENerator ADDRess esee 168 SYSIem iPRESSECEANnel EXEG Ulte cities a enc tr tr E Ede pa pace carie og eR RR ER EE RO 148 SEO EIERE REESEN 223 SYS LEM SPEAKE VOLUME sasasi rtp Re rv d i PE RR Enn Ge d e a Ee ea kee 173 Mise EE EE 233 TRIGGER SEQUENCE EECH lies reegen eege 186 TRIGger SEQuernce HOLDOoff TIME ttr rene rn trn eene ente 186 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDofF 5 trt nre araia r rerea ra ii ATEETAN iaiT 187 TRiGger SEQuence kI FPOwer AYS Teresis uiscera he epi ere ue eee p ANE EEEE 187 TRIGger SEQuernce LEVel AM REELative cte ttt erret etr rnt rece ene 189 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel AM ABSolute 189 TRIGgEer SEQuence HEV CEM e H 189 TRIGger SEQuernce LEVel IFPOWSLE ecit rte rnt trn ttn etr ren rr n eee tn 188 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPOWer rnt ttr mr rrr zea tnt rt irr rr
161. Thus the settings indicated in the Overview and configured in the dialog boxes vary depending on the selected window Select an active window from the Specifics for selection list that is displayed in the Overview and in all window specific configuration dialog boxes The Overview and dialog boxes are updated to indicate the settings for the selected window Input and Frontend Settings The source and characteristics of the input signal to be demodulated are configured in the Input and Frontend Settings dialog box gt To display this dialog box do one of the following e Selectthe Input Frontend button in the Analog Demodulation Overview e Selectthe INPUT OUTPUT key and then the Input Source Config softkey e Input ource DEER ENEE BERENS Ie a E 48 LEE eerste 58 E oi SET i a 62 6 i e ie 66 Input Source Settings The input source determines which data the R amp S FPS will analyze Input settings can be configured in the Input dialog box 5 4 1 1 Input and Frontend Settings Some settings are also available in the Amplitude tab of the Amplitude dialog box e adio Frequency Input E 49 e External Generator Control Settings nina aaa 50 Radio Frequency Input The default input source for the R amp S FPS is Radio Frequency i e the signal at the RF INPUT connector of the R amp S FPS If no additional options are installed this is the only available input
162. Type gt This command replaces the window type for example from Diagram to Result Sum mary of an already existing window in the active measurement channel while keeping its position index and window name To add a new window use the LAYout ADD WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows in the active measurement channel use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt WindowType gt Type of result display you want to use in the existing window See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 226 for a list of availa ble window types Example LAY REPL WIND 1 MTAB Replaces the result display in window 1 with a marker table LAYout SPLitter lt Index1 gt lt Index2 gt lt Position gt This command changes the position of a splitter and thus controls the size of the win dows on each side of the splitter Compared to the DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE on page 225 command the LAYout SPLitter changes the size of all windows to either side of the splitter per manently it does not just maximize a single window temporarily Note that windows must have a certain minimum size If the position you define con flicts with the minimum size of any of the affected windows the command will not work but does not return an error R amp S FPS K7 Remote Commands for An
163. UR IMM see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 190 External Trigger 1 2 Trigger Source Data acquisition starts when the TTL signal fed into the specified input connector meets or exceeds the specified trigger level See Trigger Level on page 71 Note The External Trigger 1 softkey automatically selects the trigger signal from the TRG IN connector For details see the Instrument Tour chapter in the R amp S FPS Getting Started manual External Trigger 1 Trigger signal from the TRG IN connector Trigger Configuration External Trigger 2 Trigger signal from the TRG AUX connector Note Connector must be configured for Input in the Outputs con figuration see Trigger 2 on page 72 Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR EXT2 See TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 190 UO Power Trigger Source Triggers the measurement when the magnitude of the sampled UO data exceeds the trigger threshold The trigger bandwidth corresponds to the resolution bandwidth setting for data acquisi tion see Resolution Bandwidth on page 75 Remote command TRIG SOUR IQP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 190 IF Power Trigger Source The R amp S FPS starts capturing data as soon as the trigger level is exceeded around the third intermediate frequency For frequency sweeps the third IF represents the start frequency The trigger band width at the third IF depends on the RBW and sweep type For
164. Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 111 Analyzing Results CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 111 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher minimum value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 112 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 111 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher
165. a binary file For multi channels the UO samples of the channels are expected to be interleaved within the UO data file see chapter B 2 I Q Data Binary File on page 292 If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is assumed DataFilename Contains the filename of the I Q data binary file that is part of the iq tar file It is recommended that the filename uses the following convention lt xyz gt lt Format gt lt Channels gt ch lt Type gt e xyz a valid Windows file name e Format complex polar or real see Format element e Channels Number of channels see NumberOfChannels element e Type float32 float64 int8 int16 int32 or int64 see DataType element Examples xyz complex 1ch float32 e xyz polar 1ch float64 e xyz eal 1ch int16 xyz complex 16ch int8 UO Parameter XML File Specification Element UserData Description Optional contains user application or device specific XML data which is not part of the iq tar specification This element can be used to store additional information e g the hardware configuration User data must be valid XML content PreviewData Optional contains further XML elements that provide a preview of the UO data The preview data is determined by the routine that saves an iq tar file e g R amp S FPS For the definition of this element refer to the RsIqTar xsd schema Note that the preview can be onl
166. ace number 5 Detector 6 Trace mode 7 Reference value at the defined reference position 8 AF coupling AC DC only in AF time domains if applicable 9 Results are selected for demodulation output Diagram footer information The diagram footer beneath the diagram contains the following information depend ing on the evaluation RF Spectrum CF Center frequency Sweep points Span measured span of input signal RF Time domain CF Center frequency Sweep points Time per division of input signal AF Spectrum AF CF center fre Sweep points AF Span evaluated span quency of demodula ted signal AF Time domain CF Center frequency Sweep points Time per division of input signal For most modes the number of sweep points shown in the display are indicated in the diagram footer In zoom mode the rounded number of currently displayed points are indicated Understanding the Display Information Status bar information Global instrument settings the instrument status and any irregularities are indicated in the status bar beneath the diagram Furthermore the progress of the current operation is displayed in the status bar 3 Measurements and Result Displays The data that was measured by the R amp S FPS can be evaluated using various different methods In the Analog Demodulation application up to six evaluation methods can be displayed simultaneo
167. age 63 11 4 5 2 Configuring the Measurement DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines a reference level offset for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Offset gt Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST OdB Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB Manual operation See Shifting the Display Offset on page 63 Configuring the Attenuation IPRA TN AUTON EE 177 INPURAT Tee Hee 8 ete npe t cea EENS 177 ld wg iissdecesaceadaact egene ASA sua yaase aucune qaaeesdedegans a a 178 INPUCEATT AUTO EE 178 deis ER 178 INPut ATTenuation lt Attenuation gt This command defines the total attenuation for RF input If an electronic attenuator is available and active the command defines a mechanical attenuation see INPut EATT STATe on page 178 If you set the attenuation manually it is no longer coupled to the reference level but the reference level is coupled to the attenuation Thus if the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level Parameters lt Attenuation gt Range see data sheet Increment 5 dB RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Example INP ATT 30dB Defines a 30 dB attenuation and decouples the attenuation from the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 64 INPut ATTenuation AUTO lt State gt Th
168. ally corrected to 0 1 Suffix det 1 Positive peak 2 Negative peak 3 Average of positive and negative peaks PK 2 4 RMS Detector function used for relative demodulation Parameters lt RefValue gt double value The unit depends on the demodulation type AM FM Hz PM depends on UNIT lt n gt ANGLe setting RST 1 0 Example See CONFigure ADEMod RESults PM DETector lt det gt STATe on page 207 Manual operation See Reference Value on page 93 CONFigure ADEMod RESults AM DETector lt det gt STATe lt State gt Configuring the Measurement CONFigure ADEMod RESults FM DETector lt det gt STATe lt State gt CONFigure ADEMod RESults PM DETector lt det gt STATe lt State gt Activates relative demodulation for the selected detector If activated the demodulated result is set in relation to the reference value defined by CONFigure ADEMod RESults AM DETector lt det gt REFerence Suffix lt det gt 1 Positive peak 2 Negative peak 3 Average of positive and negative peaks PK 2 4 RMS Detector function used for relative demodulation Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 1 0 RST OFF Example CONF ADEM RES PM DET2 STAT ON Activates relative demodulation for the negative peak detector CONF ADEM RES UNIT PCT Defines the unit for relative values as percent CONF ADEM RES PM DET2 REF 1 415 Sets the reference value for
169. alog Demodulation Measurements y 100 x 100 y 100 1 01 GHz 102 12 dim x 0 y 0 x 100 Fig 11 1 SmartGrid coordinates for remote control of the splitters Parameters lt Index1 gt The index of one window the splitter controls Index2 The index of a window on the other side of the splitter Position New vertical or horizontal position of the splitter as a fraction of the screen area without channel and status bar and softkey menu The point of origin x 0 y 0 is in the lower left corner of the screen The end point x 100 y 100 is in the upper right cor ner of the screen See figure 11 1 The direction in which the splitter is moved depends on the screen layout If the windows are positioned horizontally the splitter also moves horizontally If the windows are positioned vertically the splitter also moves vertically Range 0 to 100 Example LAY SPL 1 3 50 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Table to the center 50 of the screen i e in the fig ure above to the left Example LAY SPL 1 4 70 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Peak List towards the top 70 of the screen The following commands have the exact same effect as any combination of windows above and below the splitter moves the splitter vertically AY SPL 3 2 70 AY SPL 4 1 70 AY SPL 2 1 70 User Manual 1176 8474 02 06 229 C
170. alog Demodulation applications Automatic Settings When you select an auto adjust function a measurement is performed to determine the optimal settings If you select an auto adjust function for a triggered measurement you are asked how the R amp S FPS should behave e default The measurement for adjustment waits for the next trigger o Adjusting settings automatically during triggered measurements The measurement for adjustment is performed without waiting for a trigger The trigger source is temporarily set to Free Run After the measurement is com pleted the original trigger source is restored The trigger level is adjusted as fol lows For IF Power and RF Power triggers Trigger Level Reference Level 15 dB For Video trigger Trigger Level 85 96 Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure TRIG on page 211 Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto All 97 Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Freq eese 97 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 98 Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto 98 Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual 98 Upper level KT 98 Lower Level EE 98 AF Auto CONG m 98 Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto All Activates all automatic adjust
171. alog box which is displayed when you select the Demod Settings button in the Overview e Basic Demodulation Measurement Parameters Demo 78 6 Demodulation Spectelti uu coectetuer aes 82 AE dice ERE 85 COMING EE 88 Acc 91 e Result Table Setfirige eite e dete c er aa ue 92 5 8 1 Basic Demodulation Measurement Parameters Demod The basic demodulation measurement parameters define how the measurement is performed R amp S FPS K7 Configuration J see They are configured in the Demod tab of the Demodulation Settings dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Inthe Analog Demodulation Overview select the Demod Settings button then select the Demod tab e Select the MEAS CONFIG key and then the Demod Config softkey N Ref 10 00 rad p2 PM Tie um AF Filter Scaling Unit Settings Time Domain Zoom Squelch State State Squelch Level Start AF Coupling Length Auto Manual Selected Trace PM Settings Zero Phase Ref Pos Phase Wrapping ETiTdelif ais 2 PM Time Domain s Sie E e E 79 Suele Level ET 80 PARE COUNT ET 80 ee ENEE 80 Time Domain ZOOM mM TEILT 80 ee 80 ee 81 ei EEN 81 E Time EE 81 Zero Phase Reference Position PM Time Domain only 81 Phase Wrap Omn OIf PM Time Domain
172. an set the number of single measurements with SENSe SWEep COUNt Note that synchronization to the end of the measurement is possible only in single sweep mode In the Analog Demodulation application when you configure the traces for a window with a specific evaluation e g AM time domain the traces in all windows with the same evaluation are configured identically Parameters Mode Example Manual operation WRITe Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting AVERage The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Aver age Count determines the number of averaging procedures MAXHold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S FPS saves the sweep result in the trace mem ory only if the new value is greater than the previous one MINHold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FPS saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one VIEW The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and dis played BLANk Hides the selected trace RST Trace 1 WRITe Trace 2 6 BLANk INIT CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode SWE COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 DISP TRAC3 MODE WRIT Selects clear write mode for trace 3 INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the measure ment See Tra
173. and off The measurement continues in the background Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 for TRACe1 0 for TRACe 2 to 6 Example DISP TRAC3 ON Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys on page 102 SENSe JADEMod lt n gt AM ABSolute TDOMain TYPE SENSe JADEMod lt n gt AM RELative TDOMain TYPE SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AM RELative AFSPectrum TYPE SENSe ADEMod lt n gt FM TDOMain TYPE Configuring the Measurement SENSe ADEMod lt n gt FM AFSPectrum TYPE SENSe ADEMod lt n gt PM TDOMain TYPE SENSe ADEMod lt n gt PM AFSPectrum TYPE SENSe ADEMod lt n gt SPECtrum TYPE lt TraceMode1 gt lt TraceMode2 gt lt TraceMode3 gt lt TraceMode4 gt lt TraceMode5 gt lt TraceMode6 gt This command selects the trace modes of the evaluated signal to be measured simul taneously For each of the six available traces a mode can be defined The trace modes are configured identically for all windows with a specific evaluation lt n gt is irrelevant The following table indicates which command syntax refers to which evaluation method Command syntax Evaluation method AMEABSolute TDOMain RF time domain AM RELative TDOMain AM time domain AM RELative AFSPectrum AM spectrum FM TDOMain FM time domain FM AFSPectrum FM spectrum PM TDOMain PM time domain PM AFSPectrum PM spectrum SPE
174. are provided If necessary these files can be edited or duplicated for varying measurement setups or other instruments The existing setup files can be displayed in an editor in read only mode directly from the External Generator configuration dialog box From there they can be edited and stored under a different name and are then available on the R amp S FPS For details see the R amp S FPS User Manual Calibration Mechanism A common measurement setup includes a signal generator a device under test DUT and a signal and spectrum analyzer Therefore it is useful to measure the attenuation or gain caused by the cables and connectors from the signal generator and the signal analyzer in advance The known level offsets can then be removed from the measure ment results in order to obtain accurate information on the DUT Calculating the difference between the currently measured power and a reference trace is referred to as calibration Thus the measurement results from the controlled external generator including the inherent distortions can be used as a reference trace to calibrate the measurement setup The inherent frequency and power level distortions can be determined by connecting the R amp S FPS to the signal generator The R amp S FPS sends a predefined list of frequen cies to the signal generator see also chapter 4 7 1 7 Coupling the Frequencies on page 37 The signal generator then sends a signal with the specified l
175. arker menu ee dl EE 111 SCAN EE 111 Search Next EE 111 Search MINIMU DEE 111 Search Next MIM MMU ac oua reta ce Para o a A EENE NAAG 112 Working with Markers in the R amp S FPS Analog Demodulation application Select Marker The Select Marker function opens a dialog box to select and activate or deactivate one or more markers quickly mm Selected State Selected State Selected State ees on Recall oeta Con Msi Con Recall oeaio oe EN veka 16 OFF Remote command Marker selected via suffix lt m gt in remote commands Peak Search Sets the selected marker delta marker to the maximum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK on page 252 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK on page 254 Search Next Peak Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next lower maximum of the assigned trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 252 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum NEXT on page 253 Search Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the minimum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum PEAK on page 253 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum PEAK on page 254 Working with Markers in the R amp S FPS Analog Demodulation
176. ata Definite Length Block Data according to IEEE 488 2 each measurement value being formatted in 32 Bit IEEE 754 Floating Point Format The schema of the result string is as follows 41024 lt valuel gt lt value2 gt lt value n with 4 number of digits 4 in the example of the following number of data bytes 1024 number of following data bytes 1024 in the example lt Value gt 4 byte floating point value Reading out data in binary format is quicker than in ASCII format Thus binary format is recommended for large amounts of data 11 7 5 Reference ASCII File Export Format Trace data can be exported to a file in ASCII format for further evaluation in other applications This reference describes in detail the format of the export files for result data The file consists of the header containing important scaling parameters and a data sec tion containing the trace data Optionally the header can be excluded from the file see Include Instrument Measurement Settings on page 103 R amp S9FPS K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements em r P V J Fe Po rM P S qe The data of the file header consist of three columns each separated by a semicolon parameter name numeric value basic unit The data section starts with the keyword Trace lt n gt n number of stored trace followed b
177. ation Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Average Mode on page 101 SENSe WINDow lt n gt DETector lt t gt FUNCtion lt Detector gt Defines the trace detector to be used for trace analysis Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps Parameters lt Detector gt APEak Autopeak NEGative Negative peak POSitive Positive peak SAMPle First value detected per trace point RMS RMS value AVERage Average RST APEak UO Analyzer RMS Example DET POS Sets the detector to positive peak Manual operation See Detector on page 101 SENSe WINDow lt n gt DETector lt t gt FUNCtion AUTO State This command couples and decouples the detector to the trace mode Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example DET AUTO OFF The selection of the detector is not coupled to the trace mode Manual operation See Detector on page 101 11 5 Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps MSRA operating mode Note that in MSRA operating mode capturing data is only possible for the MSRA Mas ter channel In Analog Demodulation application channels the sweep configuration commands define the analysis interval Be sure to select the correct measurement channel before using these commands ABORT EN 219 Ile 219 TREI Ee elC M te TE 220 INI Tiate n IMMediate EE 220 INUTIate SI EE 221 Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps IN Tigte lt n SEQUENCEMABORE EE 221 INITlate nz GEOue
178. ation method have the same traces thus the window is irrelevant lt m gt is irrelevant Retrieving Results Query parameters lt MeasType gt PPEak MPEak MIDDle RMS PPEak Postive peak PK MPEak NPEak Negative peak PK MIDDle Average of positive and negative peaks PK 2 RMS Root mean square value Example CALC FEED XTIM PM TDOM Switches on the PM time domain result display DISP TRAC ON Switches on the trace CALC MARK FUNC ADEM PM PPE Queries the peak value of the demodulated PM trace Usage Query only Manual operation See Result Summary on page 21 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod AM RESult lt t gt RELative lt MeasType gt CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod FM RESult lt t gt RELative lt MeasType gt CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod PM RESult lt t gt RELative lt MeasType gt This command queries the current relative value of the demodulated signal for the specified trace as displayed in the Result Summary in manual operation Note that all windows with the same evaluation method have the same traces thus the window lt n gt and marker lt m gt are irrelevant The unit of the results depends on the CONFigure ADEMod RESults UNIT setting Query parameters lt MeasType gt PPEak Postive peak PK MPEak NPEak Negative peak PK MIDDle Average of positive and negative peaks PK 2 RMS Root mean sq
179. bc dup 152 External Generator CoOnlkol u aeree ERR Esc R RR REX aa aa 163 11 4 2 1 RF Input lu ee PIRO RE REMIS 150 INPUEDPA NEE 150 INP Ut FIL Ter YIGES TAU EE 151 let E EE 151 INPUES EWG Gt idee E SEENEN SEENEN Se een 152 INPut COUPling lt CouplingType gt This command selects the coupling type of the RF input Parameters lt CouplingType gt AC AC coupling DC DC coupling RST AC Example INP COUP DC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Coupling on page 49 INPut DPATh lt State gt Enables or disables the use of the direct path for frequencies close to 0 Hz Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt State gt AUTO 1 Default the direct path is used automatically for frequencies close to 0 Hz OFF 0 The analog mixer path is always used RST 1 Example INP DPAT OFF Usage SCPI confirmed INPut FILTer YIG STATe State This command turns the YIG preselector on and off Note the special conditions and restrictions for the YIG filter described in YIG Prese lector on page 50 Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 0 for UO Analyzer GSM VSA and MC Group Delay measurements Example INP FILT YIG OFF Deactivates the YIG preselector Manual operation See YIG Preselector on page 50 INPut IMPedance Impedance This command selects the nominal input impedance of the RF input 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed
180. been measured The number of power levels in the list depends on the currently selected number of sweep points The unit depends on the measurement and on the unit you have currently set If you are measuring with the auto peak detector the command returns positive peak values only To retrieve negative peak val ues define a second trace with a negative peak detector Example TRAC TRACE3 Queries the data of trace 3 11 7 2 Retrieving Results Usage SCPI confirmed Exporting Trace Results Trace results can be exported to a file For more commands concerning data and results storage see the R amp S FPS User Man ual MMEMory STORe sn TRAQS 1 nre sei ee ed pra e Dex adu aao ses EY a PEE ud 2e 234 FORMaEDEXPort DSEPaFatot crac E SNNAER SEENEN NEESS a RET E a E 234 FORMADE XPO HEADET ma a r a a E Te Ta aA TE a E aaa AEA aE E ai aa aa Aiia EE ADi a A 235 FORMat DEXPOM Re 235 MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe lt Trace gt lt FileName gt This command exports trace data from the specified window to an ASCII file Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User M
181. ce 2 Next trace in same window Data section for individual window Window 2 Data section for individual trace Name of next window Trace 1 First trace 11 8 Analyzing Results The following remote commands are required to configure general result analysis set tings concerning the trace markers lines etc in a remote environment They are iden tical to the analysis functions in the base unit except for some special marker functions which are not available in the Analog Demodulation application More details are described for manual operation in chapter 6 Analysis on page 99 e Working with Markers Remote 243 e Defining Limit Chigcks iue n ccc e eec eec iterates 264 ZOOMING INTO the BISplay eie Here t e enn eset ex REN 277 e Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only 279 11 8 1 11 8 1 1 Analyzing Results Working with Markers Remotely In the Analog Demodulation application up to 16 markers or delta markers can be acti vated for each window simultaneously More details are described for manual operation in chapter 6 3 4 Marker Function Configuration on page 112 Setting Up individual Markesina aaia 243 EEN e in EE 249 e Marker Search Gettngs AAA 251 Positioning the ET TE 251 e Configuring Special Marker Functions cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaneeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 255 Setting Up Individua
182. ce Mode on page 100 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE HCONtinuous State This command turns an automatic reset of a trace on and off after a parameter has changed The reset works for trace modes min hold max hold and average Configuring the Measurement Note that the command has no effect if critical parameters like the span have been changed to avoid invalid measurement results Parameters lt State gt ON The automatic reset is off OFF The automatic reset is on RST OFF Example DISP WIND TRAC3 MODE HCON ON Switches off the reset function Manual operation See Hold on page 101 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt SELect This command selects the trace specified by the index lt t gt in the window specified by the index lt n gt Only traces that are active in the specified result display can be selected The selected trace is used to determine the Result Summary for the corre sponding result display see Result Summary on page 21 The query returns the number of the currently selected trace in the window specified by the index lt n gt trace index is ignored Traces can only be queried for graphical result displays not Result Summary Marker Table or Peak Marker List Return values lt TraceNo gt Number of the currently selected trace Example DISP TRAC3 SEL Usage SCPI confirmed DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe State This command turns a trace on
183. ching the supply voltage for an exter nal noise source on or off in the firmware you can activate or deactive the device as required External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the R amp S FPS itself for example when measuring the noise level of an amplifier In this case you can first connect an external noise source whose noise power level is known in advance to the R amp S FPS and measure the total noise power From this 4 7 3 Analog Demodulation in MSRA Operating Mode value you can determine the noise power of the R amp S FPS Then when you measure the power level of the actual DUT you can deduct the known noise level from the total power to obtain the power level of the DUT The noise source is controlled in the Output settings see Noise Source on page 95 Receiving and Providing Trigger Signals Using one of the TRG IN AUX connectors of the R amp S FPS the R amp S FPS can use a signal from an external reference as a trigger to capture data Alternatively the internal trigger signal used by the R amp S FPS can be output for use by other connected devices Using the same trigger on several devices is useful to synchronize the transmitted and received signals within a measurement For details on the connectors see the R amp S FPS Getting Started manual External trigger as input If the trigger signal for the R amp S FPS is provided by an external refer
184. command SYSTem COMMunicate TCPip RDEVice GENerator ADDRess on page 168 Input and Frontend Settings Serial Number For PCle connections only Displays the serial numbers of the detected signal genera tors If more than one signal generator is found select the one to use as the external tracking generator Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate PEXPress RDEVice GENerator ADDRess CATalog on page 167 SYSTem COMMunicate PEXPress RDEVice GENerator ADDRess on page 167 Reference Selects the internal R amp S FPS or an external frequency reference to synchronize the R amp S FPS with the generator default internal Remote command SOURce EXTernal ROSCillator SOURce on page 166 Edit Generator Setup File Displays the setup file for the currently selected Generator Type in read only mode in an editor Although the existing setup files are displayed in read only mode in the editor they can be saved under a different name using File SaveAs Be careful however to adhere to the required syntax and commands Errors will only be detected and displayed when you try to use the new generator see also chap ter 4 7 1 8 Displayed Information and Errors on page 39 For details see chapter 4 7 1 3 Generator Setup Files on page 34 Rescan Repeats a scan for external generators connected to the R amp S FPS This is useful if new generators were connected recently and are not yet displayed in the list of serial numbers
185. d frequency to be used by the generator Remote command SOURce EXTernal FREQuency on page 163 Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denominator Offset With automatic frequency coupling a series of frequencies is defined one for each sweep point based on the current frequency at the RF input of the R amp S FPS However the frequency used by the generator may differ from the input from the R amp S FPS The RF frequency may be multiplied by a specified factor or a frequency offset can be added or both Note The input for the generator frequency is not validated i e you can enter any val ues However if the allowed frequency ranges of the generator are exceeded an error message is displayed on the R amp S FPS and the values for Result Frequency Start and Result Frequency Stop are corrected to comply with the range limits The value range for the offset depends on the selected generator The default setting is 0 Hz Offsets lt gt 0 Hz are indicated by the FRQ label in the channel bar Negative offsets can be used to define reverse sweeps Input and Frontend Settings For more information on coupling frequencies and reverse sweeps see chapter 4 7 1 7 Coupling the Frequencies on page 37 For more information on error messages and the channel bar see chapter 4 7 1 8 Displayed Information and Errors on page 39 Remote command SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor DENominator on page 164 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency
186. d lt n gt AF SPAN FULL This command sets the maximum span for AF spectrum result display The maximum span corresponds to DBW 2 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 184 lt n gt is irrelevant Example ADEM BAND 5 MHz Sets the demodulation bandwidth to 5 MHz ADEM AF SPAN FULL Sets the AF span to 2 5 MHz Manual operation See AF Full Span on page 83 SENSe JADEMod lt n gt AF STARt Frequency This command sets the start frequency for AF spectrum result display lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Frequency gt RST 0 MHz Example ADEM AF STAR 0 kHz Sets the AF start frequency to 0 kHz ADEM AF STOP 500 kHz Sets the AF stop frequency to 500 kHz Manual operation See AF Start on page 83 SENSe JADEMod lt n gt AF STOP Frequency This command sets the stop frequency for AF spectrum result display lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters Frequency RST 9 MHz Configuring the Measurement Example ADEM AF STAR 0 kHz Sets the AF start frequency to 0 kHz ADEM AF STOP 500 kHz Sets the AF stop frequency to 500 kHz Manual operation See AF Stop on page 83 RF evaluation These settings are only available for RF evaluation both in time and frequency domain Useful commands described elsewhere SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 174 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 184 Specific commands SENSE JADEMod lt n SPEC SPANZ OOM
187. d mode only the offset of the analysis interval from the start of the capture buffer Optionally select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for example an offline demodulation trigger to start capturing data only when a useful signal is transmitted Select the Demod Display button and select the demodulation displays that are of interest to you up to 6 Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences Exit the SmartGrid mode and select the Overview softkey to display the Over view again Select the Demodulation Settings button to define demodulation parameters for each evaluation e Configure the Squelch function on the Demod tab to suppress noise dur ing demodulation e Fortime domain evaluations zoom into the areas of interest by defining a zoom area on the Demod tab e For AF evaluations use special filters to eliminate certain effects of demodula tion or to correct pre emphasized modulated signals on the AF Filters tab e Adapt the diagram scaling to the displayed data on the Scaling tab Select the Analysis button in the Overview to make use of the advanced analy sis functions in the demodulation displays e Configure a trace to display the average over a series of sweeps on the Trace tab if necessary increase the Sweep Count in the Data Acquisition settings e Configure markers and delta markers to determine deviations and offsets within the demo
188. d trace Note that this value is only calculated if an AF Spectrum window is displayed lt m gt is irrelevant Parameters lt SINAD gt The signal to noise and distortion ratio in dB Usage Query only Retrieving Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod THD RESult lt t gt This command queries the result of the total harmonic distortion THD measurement in the specified window Note that this value is only calculated if an AF Spectrum window is displayed lt m gt is irrelevant Parameters lt THD gt Total harmonic distortion of the demodulated signal in dB Usage Query only SENSe JADEMod lt n gt FM OFFSet lt ResultType gt This command calculates the FM carrier offset from the currently available measure ment data set If averaging has been activated before acquiring the data set using SENSe ADEMod lt n gt FM TDOMain RESult on page 232 the averaged FM offset over several measurements can also be obtained by setting ResultType AVERage The offset thus determined differs from the one calculated by the CALCulate lt n gt MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod FERRor RESult t on page 238 command since for determination of the frequency deviation the modulation is removed by means of low pass filtering producing results that are different from those obtained by averaging lt n gt is irrelevant Query parameters lt ResultType gt IMMediate AVERage
189. dance on page 151 5 4 4 Frequency The center frequency of the input signal is configured in the Frequency tab of the Input Frontend dialog box P To display this dialog box do one of the following e Selectthe Input Frontend button in the Analog Demodulation Overview and Switch to the Frequency tab e Selectthe FREQ key and then the Frequency Config softkey Input and Frontend Settings ma npu cade Input Source Power Sensor Amplitude Frequency Center 13 25 GHz EE 0 1 Demod BW H IT 67 TE Ee 67 Center frequency Defines the normal center frequency of the signal The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span gt 0 SpaNmin 2 S fce fmax SPAN min 2Z fmax and span i depend on the instrument and are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 174 Center Frequency Stepsize Defines the step size of the center frequency The step size can be coupled to the demodulation bandwidth or it can be manually set to a fixed value 0 1 Demod Sets the step size for the center frequency to 10 96 of the demodula BW tion bandwidth This is the default setting 0 5 Demod Sets the step size for the center frequency to 50 96 of the demodula BW tion bandwidth X Demod Sets the step size for the center frequency to a manually defined fac Bw tor of the demodulation bandwidth The X Factor defines the pe
190. dicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes follow During the trans mission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted 0 specifies a data block of indefinite length The use of the indefinite for mat requires a NL END message to terminate the data block This format is useful when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation of the data into blocks of definite length 11 2 Common Suffixes In the Analog Demodulation application the following common suffixes are used in remote commands Suffix Value range Description lt k gt 1 8 Limit line m 1 16 Marker Activating Analog Demodulation Measurements Suffix Value range Description lt n gt 1 6 Window or Evaluation t 1 6 Trace 11 3 Activating Analog Demodulation Measurements Analog demodulation measurements require a special application on the R amp S FPS The measurement is started immediately with the default settings INSTIrument GREate DUPLiIcale 21 2 eere rc edere e y nene AE RAD NNER 145 INS Fr ment oREate NEW tete tetas tt t attt eate center e guy ceo tee cc eben en 145 INS Tr mebt GREateREPI dO ei ee etr rore e esiste oeste cedo ved vera 146 INSTIumentDELele rte rnt esu ease dae x tae e TN SSES 146 TS ERGO KE 146 INS Tramient EE 147 INSTt ment p SE ect PPP SE
191. dow to the display User Manual 1176 8474 02 06 133 R amp S FPS K7 Measurement Example Demodulating an FM Signal MultiView SS Spectrum Analog Demod Ref Level 0 00 dBm Att 10dB AQT 10 ms Freq 500 0 MHz CF 500 0 MHz _ 0 RUIA 5 RF Spectrum 1AP Clrw CF 500 0 MHz 1001 pts Span 5 0 MHz 4 Result Summary Carrier Power 10 40 dBm Carrier Offset 642 31 Hz Peak Peak HI RMS Mod Freq SINAD FM 52 705 kHz 51 811 kHz 52 258 kHz 34 984 kHz 10 0000 kHz Fig 9 4 RF spectrum of FM signal with default demodulation bandwidth 5 MHz 8 As you can see in the default demodulation bandwidth of 5 MHz is much too large the actual signal takes up only a small part of the displayed range That means that any noise or additional signals apart from the FM signal of interest may be included in the measured results Select the Demod BW softkey and reduce the value to 200 kHz MultiView SS Spectrum Analog Demod Ref Level 0 00 d m Att 10dB AQT 10ms DBW Freq 500 0 MHz CF 500 0 MHz 5 RF Spectrum CF 500 0 MHz 100 pts Span 200 0 kHz 4 Result Summary Carrier Power 10 34 dBm Carrier Offset 679 70 Hz Peak Peak Ep RMS Mod Freq SINAD FM 49 853 kHz 48 649 kHz 49 251 kHz 34 914 kHz 10 000 kHz Fig 9 5 RF spectrum with demodulation bandwidth 200 kHz The span is automatically reduced to 200 kHz as well as only the demodulated range can be displayed User Manual 1176 8474 02 06 134 R amp S FP
192. ds and settings Setting AM Broadcast FM Narrowband FM Broadcast Frequency Set None Default tling Demod band 100 kHz 100 kHz 400 kHz 5 MHz 5 MHz width Aquisition time 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms 10 ms 62 5 us Input coupling AC AC AC Squelch level 30 dBm 20 dBm Windows RF Spectrum RF Spectrum RF Spectrum FM Time Domain FM Time Domain AM Time Domain FM Time Domain FM Time Domain RF Time Domain Result Summary AM Spectrum FM Spectrum FM Spectrum Result Summary Result Summary Result Summary AF filter High 20 kHz 50 Hz pass AF filter Low 15 kHz 3 kHz 150 kHz pass RF Spectrum Span 50 kHz 25 kHz 400 kHz AM FM Time Domain Time domain 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms zoom Dev per division 1 kHz 20 kHz 100 kHz 50 kHz AM FM Spectrum Start freq 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz Stop freq 15 kHz 5 kHz 63 33 kHz Ref value 5 kHz 75 kHz The Frequency Settling scenario requires a manually defined trigger B UO Data File Format iq tar UO data is packed in a file with the extension iq tar An iq tar file contains UO data in binary format together with meta information that describes the nature and the source of data e g the sample rate The objective of the iq tar file format is to separate UO data from the meta information while still having both inside one file In addition the file format allows you to preview the UO data in a web browser and allows you to include user specific data
193. dulated signal on the Marker tab e Use special marker functions to calculate phase noise or an n dB down band width on the Marker Config tab e Configure a limit check to detect excessive deviations on the Lines tab 10 Start a new sweep with the defined settings In multistandard mode you may want to stop the continuous measurement mode by the Sequencer and perform a single data acquisition a Select the Sequencer icon B from the toolbar b Set the Sequencer state to OFF c Press the RUN SINGLE key 11 Optionally export the trace data of the demodulated signal to a file a In the Traces tab of the Analysis dialog box switch to the Trace Export tab b Select Export Trace to ASCII File c Define a file name and storage location and select OK 9 Measurement Example Demodulating an FM Signal A practical example for a basic Analog Demodulation measurement is provided here It demonstrates how operating and measurement errors can be avoided using correct configuration settings The measurement is performed using the following devices e An R amp S FPS with application firmware R amp S FPS K7 Analog Demodulation e A vector signal generator e g R amp S SMW Fig 9 1 Test setup Signal generator settings e g R amp S SMW Frequency 500 MHz Level 10 dBm Modulation FM Modulation frequency 10 kHz Frequency deviation 50 kHz Procedure 1 Preset
194. dulation bandwidth and demodulation filter If the AF fil ter or the AF trigger are not active the measurement time increases by 20 A maximum of 24 million samples can be captured assuming sufficient memory is available thus the maximum measurement time can be determined according to the following formula Meas time 4 Sample counts sample rate The minimum trigger offset is Meas time max Table 4 1 Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset using a flat demodulation filter Demod band Sample rate Measurement time Trigger offset width Min Max Min Max 160 MHz 200 MHz 5 ns 120 ms 120 ms 1 0486 s 80 MHz 128 MHz 7 8125 ns 187 5 ms 187 5 ms 1 6384 s 40 MHz 64 MHz 15 625 ns 375 ms 375 ms 3 2768 s 28 MHz 64 MHz 15 625 ns 375 ms 375 ms 3 2768 s 18 MHz 32 MHz 31 25 ns 750 ms 750 ms 6 5536 s 10 MHz 32 MHz 31 25 ns 750 ms 750 ms 6 5536 s 8 MHz 16 MHz 62 5 ns 1 5ms 1 5ms 13 1072 s 5 MHz 8 MHz 125 ns 3 ms 3 ms 26 2144 s 3 MHz 4 MHz 250 ns 6 ms 6 ms 52 4288 s 1 6 MHz 2MHz 500 ns 12 ms 12 ms 104 8576 s 800 kHz 1 MHz 1 us 24 ms 24 ms 209 7152 s 400 kHz 500 kHz 2 us 48 ms 48 ms 419 4304 s 200 kHz 250 kHz 4us 96 s 96 s 838 8608 s 100 kHz 125 kHz 8 us 192 s 192 s 1677 7216 s 50 kHz 62 5 kHz 16 us 384 s 384 s 3355 4432 s 25 kHz 31 25 kHz 32 us 768 s 768 s 6710 8864 s 12 5 kHz 15 625 kHz 64 us 1536 s 1536 s 13421 7728 s 6 4 kHz 7 8125 kHz 128
195. e avail able memory on the instrument Only one measurement can be performed at any time namely the one in the currently active channel However in order to perform the configured measurements consecu tively a Sequencer function is provided If activated the measurements configured in the currently active channels are per formed one after the other in the order of the tabs The currently active measurement is indicated by a amp 9 symbol in the tab label The result displays of the individual channels are updated in the tabs as well as the MultiView as the measurements are per formed Sequential operation itself is independent of the currently displayed tab For details on the Sequencer function see the R amp S FPS User Manual User Manual 1176 8474 02 06 em R amp S FPS K7 Welcome to the Analog Demodulation Application 2 2 Understanding the Display Information The following figure shows a measurement diagram during an Analog Demodulation measurement All different information areas are labeled They are explained in more detail in the following sections MultiView Spectrum Analog Demod 1 Time per Division Ref Level 0 0 x Att Oms DBW 5MHz Freq 1 0 GHz I FM Time Domain 2 TA Ref 3 D Start 0 0 s Lt pts 2 0 ms 4 Result Suminarny Carrier Power 82 dB Carrier Offset Peak Peak EPEaK 2 RMS Mod Frec FM 85 041 kHz 84 715 kHz 84 878 kHz 50 313 kHz 3 Mec ne eeasuring 12 00 45 1 Channel bar for
196. e ci innen d asnasa 124 Trace Settings You can configure the settings for up to 6 individual traces The trace settings are configured in the Traces dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Press the TRACE key then select Trace Config e Inthe Overview select Analysis then switch to the vertical Traces tab In the Analog Demodulation application when you configure the traces for a window with a specific evaluation e g AM time domain the traces in all windows with the same evaluation are configured identically Trace data can also be exported to an ASCII file for further analysis For details see chapter 6 2 Trace Data Export Configuration on page 103 R amp S FPS K7 Analysis Traces Trace Export Copy Trace Trace Math Spectrogram Detector Mode Auto Type Hold Trace 1 Clear Write La RS os Lad M Linear wf DT INI ES P Lf DN I a Em a Sa ES PB 2 SE T Quick Config Preset All Traces Set Trace Mode Set Trace Mode Max Avg Min Max Clrwrite Min ciem 101 fure M 102 Predefined Trace Settings Quick Config cene 102 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Goftkeys 102 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 Selects the corresponding trace for configuration The currently selected trace is high lighted Remote command Selected via
197. e control is provided as well as information on main tenance instrument interfaces and troubleshooting In the individual application manuals the specific instrument functions of the applica tion are described in detail For additional information on default settings and parame ters refer to the data sheets Basic information on operating the R amp S FPS is not inclu ded in the application manuals All user manuals are also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FPS product page at http Awww2 rohde schwarz com product FPS html 1 3 Typographical Conventions Service Manual This manual is available in PDF format on the Documentation CD ROM delivered with the instrument It describes how to check compliance with rated specifications instru ment function repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all information required for repairing the R amp S FPS by replacing modules Release Notes The release notes describe the installation of the firmware new and modified func tions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The corre sponding firmware version is indicated on the title page of the release notes The most recent release notes are also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FPS product page at http www2 rohde schwarz com product FPS html gt Downloads gt Firmware Typographical Conventions The foll
198. e eene 281 MMEMory STOResn IQ COMMABnt rtr rrr hh erret t rece Y RE RR EE EXER EE dh 282 MMEMOFY STORESSA TO STAT c NENET 282 MMEMory STORe lt n gt LIST Ges MMEMory STOResn gt RER isievccescccestecacedovscvscevesieaiasevsencyoesdeceasaitexdetsvncvacseachenstiedsepevecreaenusnisedbeneys ERE EES MMEMON Re Ee 234 OUTPut TRIGgersports DIReCION tenor e etr rer n tree tn ever tnn tet 192 OUTPut TRIGger port LEVel OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe OUTPut TRIGgersport PULSe IMMediate 2 rtt terr t terree 193 OUTPut TRIGger port PULSE LENGIR ik rero reete terere tb e rtr betae rre roa 193 READ PME TOS DR E 156 SOURce EXTernal FREQUefRCty cn ccce rtt i reet t d eere E TAA e e X NEAR 163 SOURce EXTermalFREQuency COUPling STATE foresees nsanra aere ined open ees SOURce EXTernal FREQuency OFFSet SOURce EXTermal FREQuency FACTO DENOM NATOT nen SOURce EXTermal FREQuency EFACTor NUMerator nn rper n rer nennen tonne SOURce EXTerrial POWer LEWVel crt rte trt tente een rire e nennen xd enn SOURce EXTernal ROSCillator SOURCe tt rrt herren tree cre inr He nns SOURCE EXN Temal STATe zssczcecceseecet tonaetwens s eosene E E TE ege Eege SOURce POWer LEVel 1IMMediate OFF Set 3 trt rr rtt n tr rero tts SYSTem COMMunicate PEXPress RDEVice GENerator ADDRess SYS
199. e ert rese t tn edad 122 Marker functions IJeactivalilig oic ie eet ei tre vea rc RON RRR ER 117 Rermote Cohlrol EE 255 Marker peak list S66 Peak list iiec e Rt 115 Marker table Evaluation method ssion treten 22 Marker tO Tag asi mrina eege eg 107 Markers Assigned ace uon eer rti xta i Dente in dete 107 Basic Settings ior tre sa cei tnn cients 105 Configuration 105 107 Configuration remote Control 243 DeactiValilig arii corta cote eed ende dacs 107 D elta markers iiit ete tenis 106 Fixed reference remote control 249 255 Function configuration e rennen ratis 112 Linked in AF spectrum display 109 Linked in time domalini uieca ttt attentes 109 Bsp EE 107 MIPIM Er tout teniestiniuentenlst 111 Minimum remote control sees 251 n dB down n dB down remote control ssssssss 260 NOX III tyi eicit rae eto rk e tees nae 112 Next minimum remote control 251 Next peak ie eerte teri on re toa rn EA 111 Next peak remote control sssssssse 251 Ee 112 ac qe m 111 Peak remote control 23251 Peak list remote control wets 2OL Phase noise measurement 231419 Phase noise measurement remote control 263 POSIIOM gees e dede e n cL Gees 106 POSIT
200. e length of the measurement if SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE is set to MANual Parameters Duration Numeric value in seconds Range 0 001 to 16000 0 RST 0 001 Default unit s Configuring the Measurement Example ADJ CONF DUR MODE MAN Selects manual definition of the measurement length ADJ CONF LEV DUR 5ms Length of the measurement is 5 ms Manual operation See Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 98 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE Mode In order to determine the ideal reference level the R amp S FPS performs a measurement on the current input data This command selects the way the R amp S FPS determines the length of the measurement Parameters Mode AUTO The R amp S FPS determines the measurement length automati cally according to the current input data MANual The R amp S FPS uses the measurement length defined by SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation on page 209 RST AUTO Manual operation See Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto on page 98 See Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 98 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer Threshold When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 211 command the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal y
201. e lower limit line vertically Compared to defining an offset this command actually changes the limit line definition points by the value you define Parameters lt Distance gt Defines the distance that the limit line moves The unit depends on CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UNIT on page 269 Manual operation See Shift y on page 123 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer SPACing lt InterpolType gt This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the calculation of a lower limit line from one horizontal point to the next Parameters lt InterpolType gt LINear LOGarithmic RST LIN Manual operation See X Axis on page 122 See Y Axis on page 122 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer STATe State This command turns a lower limit line on and off Before you can use the command you have to select a limit line with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit k NAME on page 269 lt n gt is irrelevant Analyzing Results Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Visibility on page 119 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer THReshold Threshold This command defines a threshold for relative limit lines The R amp S FPS uses the threshold for the limit check if the limit line violates the thresh old lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters Threshold Numeric value The unit depends on CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UNIT on page 26
202. e lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FlXed RPOint X RefPoint This command defines the horizontal position of the fixed delta marker reference point The coordinates of the reference may be anywhere in the diagram Parameters lt RefPoint gt Numeric value that defines the horizontal position of the refer ence For frequency domain measurements it is a frequency in Hz For time domain measurements it is a point in time in s RST Fixed Reference OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO X 128 MHz Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz Manual operation See Defining a Fixed Reference on page 108 Analyzing Results CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FlXed RPOint Y lt RefPointLevel gt This command defines the vertical position of the fixed delta marker reference point The coordinates of the reference may be anywhere in the diagram Parameters lt RefPoint gt Numeric value that defines the vertical position of the reference The unit and value range is variable RST Fixed Reference OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y 10dBm Sets the reference point level for delta markers to 10 dBm Manual operation See Defining a Fixed Reference on page 108 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines a level offset for the fixed delta marker reference point Parameters lt Offset gt Numeric value RST 0 Default unit dB CALC
203. e used to the TCP IP address 130 094 122 195 SYST COMM RDEV GEN INT TCP SYST COMM TCP RDEV GEN ADDR 130 094 122 195 Activate the use of the external reference frequency at 10 MHz on the generator SOUR EXT ROSC EXT Configuring the Measurement Activate external generator control SOUR EXT STAT ON Set the generator output level to 10 dBm SOUR EXT POW 10DBM Set the frequency coupling to automatic SOUR EXT FREQ COUP STAT ON Define a series of frequencies one for each sweep point based on the current frequency at the RF input of the analyzer the generator frequency is half the frequency of the analyzer with an offset of 100 kHz analyzer start 10 Hz analyzer stop 1 MHz analyzer span 999 99 KHz generator frequency start 100 005 KHz generator frequency stop 600 KHz generator span 499 995 KHz SOUR EXT FREQ FACT NUM 1 SOUR EXT FREQ FACT DEN 2 SOUR EXT FREQ OFFS 100KHZ Perform a transmission measurement with direct connection between the generator and the analyzer and wait till the end SENS CORR METH TRAN SENS CORR COLL ACQ THR WAI Retrieve the measured frequencies 10 Hz 600 kHz TRAC DATA X TRACE1 Retrieve the measured power levels 0 between 10 Hz and 100 kHz below generator minimum frequency nominal 5dBm as of 100 kHz TRAC DATA TRACE1 Retrieve the normalized power levels power offsets from calibration results Should be 0 for all sw
204. easurement Basics 4 1 Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in Analog Demodula tion measurements is provided here for a better understanding of the required configu ration settings e Demod lation Process ten etc eta i e toii nee et eti tr ESA 24 e Demodulation Bandwidth eese ener nnns 26 e Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset 27 AE tele EE 29 MEC Uu I LLL m 29 e Time DOMAIN SEENEN 29 e Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output 31 e Analog Demodulation in MSRA Operating Mode AAA 41 Demodulation Process The demodulation process is shown in figure 4 1 All calculations are performed simul taneously with the same UO data set Magnitude amplitude and phase of the com plex UO pairs are determined The frequency result is obtained from the differential phase For details on general UO data processing in the R amp S FPS refer to the reference part of the I Q Analysis remote control description in the R amp S FPS User Manual Demodulation Process Software demodulator Trace RF spectrum mx pct Les Bee AF spectrum x nen trace aaa modulation IL AF trigger calculation frequency KH lowpass carrier AM demodulator ES power LL vero T Trace Inter Trace RF power Arithmetic polation Detector trace weg modulation frequency Q data Trace Inter Trace peak peak AM 1 2 pk pk Detectors rms amp modulation Counter depth modulation
205. ecked for conformance with the limit lines As soon as a trace to be checked is defined the assigned limit line is active One limit line can be activated for several traces simultaneously If any of the Traces to be Checked violate any of the active limit lines a message is indicated in the diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt TRACe lt t gt CHECk on page 273 Comment An optional description of the limit line Included Lines in Overview View Filter Defines which of the stored lines are included in the overview Show compat Only compatible lines ible Whether a line is compatible or not is indicated in the Compatibility setting Show all All stored limit lines with the file extension LIN in the limits sub folder of the main installation folder if not restricted by Show lines for all modes setting Show lines for all modes Included Lines in Overview View Filter If activated default limit lines from all applications are displayed Otherwise only lines that were created in the Spectrum application are displayed Note that limit lines from some applications may include additional properties that are lost when the limit lines are edited in the Spectrum application In this case a warning is displayed when you try to store the limit line X Offset Shifts a limit line that has been specified for relative frequencies or times x axis hori zontally This setting does not have any effect on
206. ect Marker Function softkey e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker Function Config tab The fixed reference marker is described under Defining a Fixed Reference on page 108 6 3 4 1 Traces Marker Marker Functions Peak List Lines Working with Markers in the R amp S FPS Analog Demodulation application Select Marker Function Reference Fixed All Functions Off Halil AM Spectrum Not all marker functions are available for all evaluations The following table indicates which functions are available for which evaluations Evaluation n dB down Phase Noise Reference Fixed AF time s X AF spectrum X X X RF time X X RF spectrum X X X For details on the special marker functions see the R amp S FPS User Manual The remote commands required to define these settings are described in chap ter 11 8 1 5 Configuring Special Marker Functions on page 255 The Fixed Reference Marker settings are described in Defining a Fixed Reference on page 108 e Phase Noise Measurement Marker AAA 113 e Marker Peak List DonfIguratiQl ee eege ENEE ac ced ek eere 115 e MGB Down MAK TEE 116 e Deactivating All Marker Unctionis oec itia rt iie rE 117 Phase Noise Measurement Marker For each of the 16 markers phase noise measurement can be activated Phase noise measurement markers are configured in the Phase Noise Config dialog box using
207. eep points directly after calibration SENS CORR STAT ON TRAC DATA TRACE1 dee See Changing the display of the calibration results Shift the reference line so the 5 dB level is displayed in the center 11 4 3 11 4 4 Configuring the Measurement DISP TRAC Y SCAL RVAL 5DB DISP TRAC Y SCAL RPOS 50PCT Configuring the Output Configuring trigger input output is described in chapter 11 4 7 2 Configuring the Trig ger Output on page 191 DIAGNOSE SERVICEN Lee 173 SYSTemisPEaker VOLUMO EE 173 DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce lt State gt This command turns the 28 V supply of the BNC connector labeled NOISE SOURCE CONTROL on the R amp S FPS on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DIAG SERV NSO ON Manual operation See Noise Source on page 95 SYSTem SPEaker VOLume lt Volume gt This command defines the volume of the built in loudspeaker for demodulated signals The command is available in the time domain in Spectrum mode and in Analog Demodulation mode Parameters lt Volume gt Range 0 to 1 RST 0 5 Example SYST SPE VOL 0 Switches the loudspeaker to mute Frequency Settings SENSe FREQuency CENTE 1 idee perio ee kp eu tute sgghacet sbbesdscecdapeetedesaphacseeesteeeedbbdasca 174 ISENS amp FREQUENCY CENT Gr SIP vo EE 174 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK ira cione triti eant enda oce candens 174 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTOr
208. efines the time offset between the capture buffer start and the start of the extracted application data In MSRA mode the offset must be a positive value as the capture buffer starts at the trigger time 0 Remote command SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet on page 281 Resolution Bandwidth Defines the resolution bandwidth for data acquisition The available range is specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe BANDwidth RESolution on page 184 5 6 2 Sweep Settings The sweep settings define how often data from the input signal is acquired and then demodulated They are configured via the SWEEP key or in the Sweep tab of the Data Acquisition dialog box gt To display this dialog box do one of the following e Select the Data Acquisition button in the Analog Demodulation Overview and switch to the Sweep tab e Select the SWEEP key and then the Sweep Config softkey Data Acquisition Bandwidth Sweep Meas Time 0 198 BB 62 5 Lis Sweep Points 1001 Sweep Count o Se 1 FM Time Domain t Continuous Sweep RUN CONT A nennen nennen nennen nennen nnns 76 single Sweep REN SINGLE aene ptr et ee erg tote ueteres 76 Continue Single SWeGD 2 i ror rrr ei eir ree o E adis 77 RONO E 77 Measurement Time AOT enn tennenn nsi nnns snnt nnn TT NEES oa eerste 77 Sweep Average Count eene in sinet tnnt sistens 77 Continuous Sweep RUN CONT After triggering starts the measurement and repea
209. elow the trigger level before triggering again Remote command TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe on page 186 Trigger Configuration Slope For all trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe on page 190 Trigger Holdoff Defines the minimum time in seconds that must pass between two trigger events Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 187 5 5 2 Trigger Input and Output Settings The trigger input and output settings are configured in the Trigger In Out tab of the Trigger dialog box or in the Outputs configuration dialog box via the INPUT OUTPUT key Re Lee EE 72 L Output mee ERegEEE 72 uir EE 73 E Pulsa Lengte nunsio i ii r N aiai 73 L Send leegen a Fla diva bl Teinioddietad vaagvaneere 73 Trigger 2 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER AUX connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FPS User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FPS No further trigger parameters are available for the con nector Output The R amp S FPS sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the con
210. ence the reference signal source must be connected to the R amp S FPS and the trigger source must be defined as External for the R amp S FPS Trigger output The R amp S FPS can provide output to another device either to pass on the internal trig ger signal or to indicate that the R amp S FPS itself is ready to trigger The trigger signal can be output by the R amp S FPS automatically or manually by the user If it is provided automatically a high signal is output when the R amp S FPS has trig gered due to a sweep start Device Triggered or when the R amp S FPS is ready to receive a trigger signal after a sweep start Trigger Armed Manual triggering If the trigger output signal is initiated manually the length and level high low of the trigger pulse is also user definable Note however that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is provided o Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FPS User Manual 4 8 Analog Demodulation in MSRA Operating Mode The Analog Demodulation application can also be used to analyze data in MSRA oper ating mode R amp S FPS K7 Measurement Basics In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master actually captures data the data acquisition setti
211. enerator uer etit tren 39 RF Power Ele M 70 Trigger level remote esee 188 RF Spectrum Evaluatiori method rrt teet 20 Troubleshooting RF Time Domain Evaluation thietli d riis 19 Rising Slope Power sensor E 62 RUN CONT lm M 76 RUN SINGLE KGy esae E e eo de iau dete dod 76 77 S ll 27 Samples tee Ee 29 Saving Balla Tt 123 ife oE A OAE 46 Scalar reflection measurement External generato utri ot teer ex 32 Scaling i H 88 Amplitude range automatically 91 Automatic s elle ULT 88 Resul GET 90 RE 22 ds 90 MESI 91 Y axis remote control 180 Screen layout isseire Search Configuration softkey Search settings Markers remote tege aaas 251 Secure user mode Storage locatior 2 rentes 45 Select Marker a111 Seto ETDOR TE 9 Aborting remote 221 Activating reMOte NEE 222 Mode remote EE 222 igno 220 Settings Displayed E File Names tee o heel ei la Restoring files Storage location Settings files Deleting EE 46 Loading Gd Predefined ster lies ei eoe tp e ee 286 rea 46 Setup files External generator eesssusss 34 51 52 Shift x Limit liiGs 2 celi aeea 123 Shift y Limit lies iioi ede ut egerat 123 Short circuit reflection measurement
212. er button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate on page 193 5 6 Data Acquisition How data is to be acquired and then demodulated is configured in the Data Acquisi tion dialog box MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master channel actually captures data from the input signal The data acquisition settings for the Analog Demodulation application in MSRA mode define the analysis interval For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FPS MSRA User Manual AE Bama wicthi a E E 74 e SWE6D SOMOS EE 75 R amp S FPS KT Configuration 5 6 1 Bandwidth Settings The bandwidth settings define which parts of the input signal are acquired and then demodulated They are configured via the BW key or in the Bandwidth tab of the Data Acquisition dialog box gt To display this dialog box do one of the following e Select the Data Acquisition button in the Analog Demodulation Overview e Select the BW key and then the Bandwidth Config softkey Bandwidth Sweep Demodulation Bandwidth Demodulation Filter Hat Gauss Resolution Bandwidth MW 1 FM Time Domain 2 pDemodulat n Bangwidilt DEE 74 Demod laton EE 74 Measurement Time AGT e eeeseiece s rper pcne epit Earth tnn Eran Ep EE 75 Capture OMS m P 75 Resolu
213. er 4 7 1 4 Calibration Mechanism on page 34 Remote command SENSe CORRection METHod on page 170 Calibrate Reflection Short Starts a short circuit reflection type measurement to determine a reference trace for calibration If both calibrations open circuit short circuit are carried out the calibration trace is calculated by averaging the two measurements The order of the two calibration mea surements is irrelevant Remote command SENSe CORRection METHod on page 170 Selects the reflection method SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire on page 169 Starts the sweep for short circuit calibration Calibrate Reflection Open Starts an open circuit reflection type measurement to determine a reference trace for calibration If both reflection type calibrations open circuit short circuit are carried out the refer ence trace is calculated by averaging the two measurements The order of the two cali bration measurements is irrelevant Remote command SENSe CORRection METHod on page 170 Selects the reflection method SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire on page 169 Starts the sweep for open circuit calibration Source Calibration Normalize Switches the normalization of measurement results on or off This function is only available if the memory contains a reference trace that is after a calibration has been performed For details on normalization see chapter 4 7 1 5 Normalization on page 35 Rem
214. er trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value Manual operation See Hysteresis on page 71 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt port gt lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the level the external signal must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that the variable INPUT OUTPUT connectors ports 2 3 must be set for use as input using the OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection command Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port 1 trigger port 1 TRIG IN connector on rear panel 2 trigger port 2 TRIG AUX connector on rear panel Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 0 5V to 3 5 V RST 1 4 V Example TRIG LEV 2V Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 71 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IF Power lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be exceeded to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 10 dBm Example TRIG LEV IFP 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 71 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the magnitude the I Q data must exceed to cause a trigger event Note t
215. ernal generator control see chapter 4 7 1 Basics on Exter nal Generator Control on page 31 e Measurement Configuration 2 ee EEGENEN SEENEN SEN 163 e Interface Config ration ieeceesiue eese erreur patte nbn ritu ne ERE inan a apa onec a ER RES ER 166 s Soc Me ULT DE 168 e Programming Example for External Generator Control 171 Measurement Configuration The following commands are required to activate external generator control and to con figure a calibration measurement with an external tracking generator SOURce EXTermalFREQUenGy ucctrti ioter aduenit eee rete daa tee eov 2k dou cun ERI a 163 SOURcCe EXTernal FREQuency COUPling S TATe esee 163 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor DENominator esee 164 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor NUMerator eese 164 SOURce EXTemal FREQuency OFFSelt 2 2 ia eset cetur ea see ERE eua aL EEN 165 el e KEE EE 165 SOURCE Nu UE KN KE 165 SGOUlbce POWertL EVellt IMMedatelOtt Get 166 This command defines a fixed source frequency for the external generator Parameters lt Frequency gt Source frequency of the external generator RST 1100050000 Example SOUR EXT FREQ 10MHz Manual operation See Manual Source Frequency on page 54 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency COUPling STATe State This command couples the frequency of the external generator out
216. es the AF low pass filter default Remote command SENSe FILTer n LPASs STATe on page 204 SENSe FILTer lt n gt LPASs FREQuency ABSolute on page 203 SENSe FILTer lt n gt LPASs FREQuency RELative on page 203 SENSe FILTer lt n gt LPASs FREQuency MANual on page 203 Weighting Selects a weighting AF filter By default no weighting filter is active A weighted Switches on the A weighted filter The weighting filter is active in the following demodulation bandwidth range 100 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 800 kHz CCITT Switches on a CCITT P 53 weighting filter The weighting filter is active in the following demodulation bandwidth range 20 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 3 MHz Demodulation CCIR weigh Switches on the CCIR weighted filter The weighting filter is active in ted the following demodulation bandwidth range 100 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 3 0 MHz CCIR Switches on the CCIR unweighted filter which is the combination of unweighted the 20 Hz highpass and 23 kHz low pass filter The weighting filter is active in the following demodulation bandwidth range 50 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth x 1 6 MHz Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIT on page 201 SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIR UNWeighted STATe on page 201 SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIR WEIGhted STATe on page 200 SENSe FILTer lt n gt AWEighted STATe on page 200 Deemphasis Activate
217. et and product brochures Online Help The Online Help is embedded in the instrument s firmware It offers quick context sen sitive access to the complete information needed for operation and programming Online help is available using the icon on the toolbar of the R amp S FPS Getting Started This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the CD ROM It provides the information needed to set up and start working with the instrument Basic operations and handling are described Safety information is also included The Getting Started manual in various languages is also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FPS product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FPS html User Manuals User manuals are provided for the base unit and each additional firmware application The user manuals are available in PDF format in printable form on the Documenta tion CD ROM delivered with the instrument In the user manuals all instrument func tions are described in detail Furthermore they provide a complete description of the remote control commands with programming examples The user manual for the base unit provides basic information on operating the R amp S FPS in general and the Spectrum application in particular Furthermore the soft ware functions that enhance the basic functionality for various applications are descri bed here An introduction to remot
218. evel at each frequency in the predefined list The R amp S FPS measures the signal and deter mines the level offsets to the expected values R amp S FPS K7 Measurement Basics 4 7 1 5 Saving calibration results A reference dataset for the calibration results is stored internally as a table of value pairs frequency level one for each sweep point The measured offsets can then be used as calibration factors for subsequent measurement results The calibration can be performed using either transmission or reflection measure ments The selected type of measurement used to determine the reference trace is included in the reference dataset Normalization Once the measurement setup has been calibrated and the reference trace is available subsequent measurement results can be corrected according to the calibration factors if necessary This is done by subtracting the reference trace from the measurement results This process is referred to as normalization and can be activated or deactiva ted as required If normalization is activated NOR is displayed in the channel bar next to the indication that an external generator is being used Ext Gen The normal ized trace from the calibration sweep is a constant 0 GB line as calibration trace reference trace 0 As long as the same settings are used for measurement as for calibration the normal ized measurement results should not contain any inherent frequency or power di
219. exclusive to managing limit lines CALCUlatesn Bt en VE 272 GALOulate n LHMIESKeGOPY EE 272 CAL Cuilate lt m gt iLIMICK en E 273 CAL OulatesmsDMIESKSSS TAN KEE 273 CAL Culate lt n gt LIMitek gt TRACE lt t gt i CHE CR iis iier retrasa vado nga sese vea Ya sa dedu 273 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACTive This command queries the names of all active limit lines lt n gt lt k gt are irrelevant Return values lt LimitLines gt String containing the names of all active limit lines in alphabeti cal order Example CALC LIM ACT Queries the names of all active limit lines Usage Query only Manual operation See Visibility on page 119 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt COPY lt Line gt This command copies a limit line Analyzing Results Parameters lt Line gt 1to8 number of the new limit line lt name gt String containing the name of the limit line Example CALC LIM1 COPY 2 Copies limit line 1 to line 2 CALC LIM1 COPY FM2 Copies limit line 1 to a new line named FM2 Manual operation See Copy Line on page 120 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt DELete This command deletes a limit line Usage Event Manual operation See Delete Line on page 120 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt STATe lt State gt This command turns the limit check for a specific limit line on and off To query the limit check result use CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL Note that a new command exi
220. f the stand ard Note Restoring predefined standard files The standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of delivery can be restored using the Restore Stand ards function see Restore Standard Files on page 46 Restore Standard Files Setup Standard Restores the standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of deliv ery Note that this function will overwrite customized standards that have the same name as predefined standards Remote command SENSe ADEMod lt n gt PRESet RESTore on page 149 5 3 Configuration Overview Throughout the measurement configuration an overview of the most important cur rently defined settings is provided in the Overview The Overview is displayed when you select the Overview icon which is available at the bottom of all softkey menus Overview Configuration Overview me e Analog Demod Input Ref Level Level Offset Trigger Out In addition to the main measurement settings the Overview provides quick access to the main settings dialog boxes Thus you can easily configure an entire Analog Demodulation measurement channel from input over processing to output and analysis by stepping through the dialog boxes as indicated in the Overview In particular the Overview provides quick access to the following configuration dialog boxes listed in the recommended order of processing 1 Input Frontend See chapter 5 4
221. ference between the measured carrier power and the noise power at the position of the specified normal marker Example CALC MARK2 FUNC PNO RES Outputs the result of phase noise measurement of the marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Phase Noise Measurement State on page 114 11 8 2 Defining Limit Checks Note that in remote control upper and lower limit lines are configured using separate commands Thus you must decide in advance which you want to configure The x val ues for both upper and lower limit lines are defined as a common control line This con trol line is the reference for the y values for both upper and lower limit lines e Configuring Limit Lines oet cete oi tee ets 264 Managing Limit MGS ore e emat ete uet e ex Ei nud E meee dens 272 e Checking the Results of a Limit Check 274 e Programming Example Using Limit Inas i cedi exec tie 275 11 8 2 1 Configuring Limit Lines CALC latesn gt HUMits k COMME M itte ee te ete eia ee oae c deed 265 GAEGCulate m LIMiteks O ONT DATA TEE 265 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DOMAIN eene nennen nnns nn snnt anis 265 CALC latesn gt BI ere are Re RE 266 CAL Culate lt n LIMit K CON Keel EE 266 GALGulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol SHIPt 0 c 0 cccesscaessneccoestcccessectesancceasatiecencctusacecseae 266 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol SPACing cessisset nnn 266 CALCulatesmsbIMiESk Be
222. for calculating the AM is also calculated with a digital filter that returns stable results after a measurement time of 2 3 x 1 modulation frequency i e at least three cycles of the AF signal must be recorded before a stable AM can be shown AF Triggers The Analog Demodulation application allows triggering to the demodulated signal The display is stable if a minimum of five modulation periods are within the recording time Triggering is always DC coupled Therefore triggering is possible directly to the point where a specific carrier level phase or frequency is exceeded or not attained AF Filters Additional filters applied after demodulation help filter out unwanted signals or correct pre emphasized input signals A CCITT filter allows you to evaluate the signal by simu lating the characteristics of human hearing Time Domain Zoom For evaluations in the time domain the demodulated data for a particular time span can be extracted and displayed in more detail using the Time Domain Zoom function This is useful if the measurement time is very large and thus each sweep point repre sents a large time span The time domain zoom function distributes the available sweep points only among the time span defined by the zoom area length The time span displayed per division of the diagram is decreased Thus the display of the extracted time span becomes more precise R amp S FPS K7 Measurement Basics 1 FM Time Domain 1AP Clrw Ref 0 0
223. g the Measurement Triggering The following remote commands are required to configure a triggered measurement in a remote environment More details are described for manual operation in chapter 5 5 Trigger Configuration on page 68 OPC should be used after requesting data This will hold off any subsequent changes to the selected trigger source until after the sweep is completed and the data is returned Configuring the Triggering COm itOns sc cca rhe en et een annt n cR 186 Configuring the Tigger TEE 191 Configuring the Triggering Conditions TRIGSer SEQuence DTIMe 2 2 rore a Fh ac v2 uu tant iiaa EE 186 TRIGSer SEQuelcs HOLEDONETIME EE 186 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff cessisse enne nennen nnns 187 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYS Teresis 222 c uriscer tiet eerie eanna 187 TRIGger SEQuenceJ LEVel EXTernal port cessere 187 TRIGger SEQuenceJ LEVel IFPower cessisse nennen rnnt 188 TRIGger SEQuence EE Eer EE 188 TRIGger SEQuence LEVelRFBOWSLE octets cores niece do euo e ote eade a 188 TRIGger SEQuenceJ LEVel AM RELative esses ener nnne nnn 189 TRiGoert GtOuencell EVel AM ABGolutel nnne 189 TRIGger SEQuence LEVelE M certet ree eroi rete ua NA Aaaa 189 TRIGE SEQuence E 189 TRiGger SEQuenice SLOPE EE 190 RRE EE Re DE 190 TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe lt DropoutTime gt Defines the
224. gger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 192 Level Output Type Trigger 2 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 192 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth on page 193 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe IMMediate on page 193 5 10 Automatic Settings Some settings can be adjusted by the R amp S FPS automatically according to the current measurement settings To activate the automatic adjustment of a setting select the corresponding function in the AUTO SET menu or in the configuration dialog box for the setting where available MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode settings related to data acquisition cannot be adjusted for An
225. gh Pass on page 85 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example FILT HPAS ON Activates the selected high pass filter Manual operation See High Pass on page 85 SENSe FIlLTer lt n gt LPASs FREQuency ABSolute FilterType This command selects the absolute low pass filter type for the specified evaluation For details on the low pass filter refer to Low Pass on page 86 Parameters lt FilterType gt 3kHz 15kHz 150kHz RST 15kHz Example FILT LPAS FREQ 150kHz Selects the low pass filter for the demodulation bandwidth range from 400 kHz to 16 MHz Manual operation See Low Pass on page 86 SENSe FILTer lt n gt LPASs FREQuency MANual Frequency This command selects the cutoff frequency of the low pass filter for the specified evalu ation For details on the low pass filter refer to Low Pass on page 86 Parameters Frequency numeric value Range 0 to 3 MHz RST 15kHz Example FILT LPAS FREQ MAN 150kHz The AF results are restricted to frequencies lower than 150 kHz Manual operation See Low Pass on page 86 SENSe FlLTer lt n gt LPASs FREQuency RELative FilterType This command selects the relative low pass filter type for the specified evaluation For details on the low pass filter refer to Low Pass on page 86 11 4 8 5 11 4 8 6 Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt FilterType gt 5PCT 10PCT 25PCT RST 25PCT Example FILT LPAS FRE
226. ght 64 gt 0123456789 0 lt Histogram gt IQ lt Channel gt lt ArrayOfChannel gt lt PreviewData gt UO Data Binary File The I Q data is saved in binary format according to the format and data type specified in the XML file See Format element and DataType element To allow reading and writing of streamed UO data all data is interleaved i e complex values are interleaved pairs of and Q values and multi channel signals contain interleaved complex sam ples for channel 0 channel 1 channel 2 etc If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is presumed Example Element order for real data 1 channel I 0 Real sample 0 I 1 Real sample 1 I 2 Real sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel I 0 Q 0 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 0 I 1 QM Real and imaginary part of complex sample 1 I 2 1 21 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex polar data 1 channel Mag 0 Phi 0 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 0 Mag 1 Phi l Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 1 Mag 2 Phi 2 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 2 UO Data Binary File Example Element order for complex cartesian data 3 channels Complex data I channel no time index Q channel no time index 01 0 Otol 0 Channel 0 Complex sample 0 1 0 Q 1 0 Channel
227. gnal MultiView Analog Demod Ref Lev z Att 10dB AQT 10 ms z Freq 500 0 MHz w Ref 0 00 Hz DC CF 500 0 MHz 10 tpts 5 FM Spectrum AF CF 50 0 kHz 1001 pts AF Span 100 0 kHz 4 Result Summary Carrier Power 10 37 dBm Carrier Offset 651 49 Hz Peak Peak Peak 2 RMS Mod Freq SINAD THD FM 50 132 kHz 48 840 kHz 49 486 kHz 34 956 kHz 10 000 kHz 65 064 dB 66 515 dB Fig 9 7 FM spectrum and Result Summary including SINAD and THD values From the FM spectrum the SINAD and THD are also calculated and displayed in the Result Summary 12 Since the AF Auto Scale function is enabled the FM Spectrum diagram is scaled according to the current measurement automatically Each diagram is scaled individually so that the reference values at the top of the two diagrams can differ 100 kHz in the FM Time Domain versus 50 kHz in the FM Spectrum However you can adjust the values manually a Select the FM Spectrum window to set the focus in it b Press the AMPT key and select the Scale Config softkey c Disable the AF Auto Scale function d Define the new reference value at 100 top of the diagram as 100 kHz E E S SSS ae User Manual 1176 8474 02 06 136 R amp S FPS K7 Measurement Example Demodulating an FM Signal Ich MultiView SS Spectrum Analog Demod Ref Level 0 00 dBm e Att 10dB AQT 10 ms Freq 500 0 MHz 1 FM Time Domain w Ref 0 00 Hz DC CF 500 0 MHz 100tpts 5 FM Spectrum AF Span 100 0 kHz
228. gt LINK on page 246 Assigning the Marker to a Trace The Trace setting assigns the selected marker to an active trace The trace deter mines which value the marker shows at the marker position If the marker was previ ously assigned to a different trace the marker remains on the previous frequency or time but indicates the value of the new trace The marker can also be assigned to the currently active trace using the Marker to Trace softkey in the Marker menu If a trace is turned off the assigned markers and marker functions are also deactiva ted Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe on page 244 All Markers Off Deactivates all markers in one step Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF on page 243 General Marker Settings Some general marker settings allow you to influence the marker behavior for all mark ers These settings are located in the Marker Settings tab of the Marker dialog box To display this tab do one of the following Press the MKR key then select the Marker Config softkey e Inthe Analog Demodulation Overview select Analysis and switch to the verti cal Marker tab Then select the horizontal Marker Settings tab Working with Markers in the R amp S FPS Analog Demodulation application e Select the Marker gt Marker menu item then switch to the Marker Settings tab Markers Marker Settings Search Settings Lorker Table
229. gt This command defines the duty cycle for the correction of pulse signals The power sensor uses the duty cycle in combination with the mean power to calculate the power of the pulse Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor Parameters lt Percentage gt Range 0 001 to 99 999 RST 99 999 Default unit Example PMET2 DCYC STAT ON Activates the duty cycle correction PMET2 DCYC VAL 0 5 Sets the correction value to 0 5 Manual operation See Duty Cycle on page 61 SENSe PMETer lt p gt FREQuency lt Frequency gt This command defines the frequency of the power sensor Configuring the Measurement Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Frequency gt The available value range is specified in the data sheet of the power sensor in use RST 50 MHz Example PMET2 FREQ 1GHZ Sets the frequency of the power sensor to 1 GHz Manual operation See Frequency Manual on page 60 SENSe PMETer lt p gt FREQuency LINK lt Coupling gt This command selects the frequency coupling for power sensor measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Coupling gt CENTer Couples the frequency to the center frequency of the analyzer MARKer1 Couples the frequency to the position of marker 1 OFF Switches the frequency coupling off RST CENTer Example PMET2 FREQ LINK CENT Couples the frequency to the center frequency of the analyzer Manual
230. gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example SYST COMM RDEV PMET CONF AUTO OFF Manual operation See Select on page 59 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer COUNt This command queries the number of power sensors currently connected to the R amp S FPS Parameters lt NumberSensors gt Number of connected power sensors Example SYST COMM RDEV PMET COUN Configuring the Measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Select on page 59 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer lt p gt DEFine lt Placeholder gt lt Type gt Interface lt SerialNo gt This command assigns the power sensor with the specified serial number to the selected power sensor index configuration The query returns the power sensor type and serial number of the sensor assigned to the specified index Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Setting parameters lt Placeholder gt Currently not evaluated lt SerialNo gt Serial number of a connected power sensor Query parameters lt Type gt The power sensor type e g NRP Z81 lt Interface gt Currently not evaluated Return values lt Placeholder gt Currently not used lt Type gt Detected power sensor type e g NRP Z81 lt Interface gt Interface the power sensor is connected to always USB lt SerialNo gt Serial number of the power sensor assigned to the specified index
231. gt DCYCle STATe on page 156 SENSe PHETer p DCYCle VALue on page 156 Using the power sensor as an external trigger If activated the power sensor creates a trigger signal when a power higher than the defined External Trigger Level is measured This trigger signal can be used as an external power trigger by the R amp S FPS This setting is only available in conjunction with a compatible power sensor For details on using a power sensor as an external trigger see the R amp S FPS User Manual Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger STATe on page 162 TRIG SOUR EXT see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 190 External Trigger Level Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines the trigger level for the power sensor trigger 5 4 3 5 4 3 1 Input and Frontend Settings For details on supported trigger levels see the data sheet Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger LEVel on page 161 Hysteresis Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs Setting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger HYSTeresis on page 161 Trigger Holdoff Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines the minimum time in seconds that must pass between two trigger event
232. gt EE TE ET 280 CAL Culate nzMSbRA WINDOWS A gt MAL 281 SENSeJMSRAECGAP Re 281 CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALINe SHOW This command defines whether or not the analysis line is displayed in all time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master lt n gt is irrelevant Note even if the analysis line display is off the indication whether or not the currently defined line position lies within the analysis interval of the active application remains in the window title bars Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Manual operation See Show Line on page 125 CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALINe VALue lt Position gt This command defines the position of the analysis line for all time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Position gt Position of the analysis line in seconds The position must lie within the measurement time of the MSRA measurement Default unit s Manual operation See Position on page 125 Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results CALCulate lt n gt MSRA WINDow lt n gt IVAL This command queries the analysis interval for the window specified by the WINDow suffix lt n gt the CALC suffix is irrelevant This command is only available in application measurement channels not the MSRA View or MSRA Master Return values lt IntStart gt Start value of the analysis interval in seconds Default unit s lt IntStop g
233. gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude AUTO ONCE sese GAL Culate lt n gt UNIT POW E CALibration PME Ter lt p gt ZERO AUTO ONCE yisccessecsssisscvncsnecaeaecsctvonsnececseccaneconsesserscascenstazsacesbevacessseeeacteros CONFioure ADEMod RE Gut AM DE Techor detz MODE ccc eee eee eeeee cere eeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeneeeseeeeeneenaes CONFioure ADEMod RE Gut AM DE Iechor detzRtterence ccc cece cee eee eens eeeeeeneeseeeeeeeeseeeeneeeee CONFigure ADEMod RESults AM DETector lt det gt REFerence MEAStoref CONFigure ADEMod RESults AM DETector lt det gt STATe CONFigure ADEMod RESults FM DETector det MODE eeessssseeseeeeneeeneeeneennneeenere nennen CONFigure ADEMod RESults FM DE Tector det HRtFerence nennen CONFigure ADEMod RESults FM DETector lt det gt REFerence MEAStoref CONFigure ADEMod RESults FM DETector det STATe eessssssseseeneeeee nennen nennen CONFigure ADEMod RESults PM DETector det MODE eese nennen enne CONFigure ADEMod RESults PM DETector det REFerence sse CONFigure ADEMod RESults PM DETector lt det gt REFerence MEAStoref CONFoure ADEMod RE Gute PM DE Tect r det gt STATE enne nennen GONFigure ADEMod RESults TN E RU Ewen Eeler DISPlay FORMat ee e WR EE DISPlay WINDowsrI SIZE E DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RVALue essen nne nre nn SAEs RUE ENT E Dee DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t MODE H
234. gt Trace number the marker is assigned to Example CALC DELT2 TRAC 2 Positions delta marker 2 on trace 2 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X lt Position gt This command moves a delta marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker and positions a reference marker to the peak power Parameters lt Position gt Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis The position is relative to the reference marker To select an absolute position you have to change the delta marker mode with CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MODE on page 246 A query returns the absolute position of the delta marker Range The value range and unit depend on the measure ment and scale of the x axis Example CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute x value of delta marker 1 Manual operation See Marker Position X value on page 106 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker Example CALC DELT3 X REL Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or relative to the reference position Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y This command queries the relative position of a delta mar
235. hat any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 130 dBm to 30 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV IQP 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 71 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level the RF input must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered The input signal must be between 500 MHz and 8 GHz Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV RFP 30dBm Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 71 Configuring the Measurement TRIGger SEQuence LEVel AM RELative lt Level gt The command sets the level when AM modulated signals are used as trigger source For triggering to be successful the measurement time must cover at least 5 periods of the audio signal Parameters lt Level gt Range 100 to 100 RST 0 Default unit Example TRIG LEV AM REL 20 Sets the AM trigger threshold to 20 Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 71 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel AM ABSolute lt Level gt The command sets the level when RF power signals are used as trigger source For triggering to be successf
236. he Analog Demodulation applica tion in MSRA mode define the analysis interval For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FPS MSRA User Manual SENSe JADEMod ri MTIMG crar nnt orn n PE n tek a ERE ann adaa REENEN 181 SENSe JADEMod n RLENGth eec tette tentent tt teet te tenta 182 E Eed E E E 182 SENSe ADEMod n SPECtrum BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution usse 183 SENSe JADEModgens S RARE emet Tenetur endende need des ni renew cea sede unn 184 SENS amp I BANDwidth BWIDtHh DEMOGd 5 6 tno eee euer ave oo ed a oz Ix aN Ea 184 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMOG TYPE eee enn eren nnne orn nonu nane o nsa a aaa EE 184 ISENGe IDANDwOdTRE Solution 184 SENSe SWEep COUNL cette tenent tenente tete tet tette t tests o 185 SENSe SWEepPOINIS seggt gea SEENEN rds 185 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt MTIMe lt Time gt This command defines the measurement time for analog demodulation lt n gt is irrelevant Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt Time gt RST 62 5us Example ADEM MTIM 62 5us Sets the measurement time to 62 5 us Manual operation See Measurement Time AQT on page 75 SENSe JADEMod lt n gt RLENgth This command returns the record length set up for the current analog demodulation measurement lt n gt is irrelevant Example ADEM RLEN Returns the current record length
237. he diagram Delta A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to the speci fied reference marker marker 1 by default Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 244 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 247 Reference Marker Defines a marker as the reference marker which is used to determine relative analysis results delta marker values If the reference marker is deactivated the delta marker referring to it is also deactiva ted 6 3 1 2 Working with Markers in the R amp S FPS Analog Demodulation application If a fixed reference point is configured see Defining a Fixed Reference on page 108 the reference point FXD can also be selected instead of another marker Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MREF on page 247 Linking to Another Marker Links the current marker to the marker selected from the list of active markers If the x axis value of the inital marker is changed the linked marker follows on the same x position Linking is off by default Using this function you can set two markers on different traces to measure the differ ence e g between a max hold trace and a min hold trace or between a measurement and a reference trace Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK TO MARKer lt m gt on page 243 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK TO MARKer lt m gt on page 246 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m
238. his command can be executed see INSTrument SELect on page 148 The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Example SYST SEQ OFF Deactivates the scheduler INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a new data measurement and waits for the end of the Sweep INST SEL IQ ANALYZER Selects the IQ Analyzer channel INIT REFR Refreshes the display for the UO Analyzer channel Usage Event Manual operation See Refresh on page 77 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer ABORt This command stops the currently active sequence of measurements The Sequencer itself is not deactivated so you can start a new sequence immediately using INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate on page 222 To deactivate the Sequencer use SYSTem SEQuencer on page 223 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Usage Event Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate This command starts a new sequence of measurements by the Sequencer Its effect is similar to the INITiate lt n gt IMMediate command used for a single measurement Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 223 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements Usage Event INITia
239. his is the unit used for numeric values if no other unit is provided with the parame ter e Manual operation If the result of a remote command can also be achieved in manual operation a link to the description is inserted Long and Short Form The keywords have a long and a short form You can use either the long or the short form but no other abbreviations of the keywords The short form is emphasized in upper case letters Note however that this emphasis only serves the purpose to distinguish the short from the long form in the manual For the instrument the case does not matter Example SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as SENS FREQ CENT Numeric Suffixes Some keywords have a numeric suffix if the command can be applied to multiple instances of an object In that case the suffix selects a particular instance e g a mea surement window Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets n next to the keyword If you don t quote a suffix for keywords that support one a 1 is assumed Example DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe enables the zoom in a particular mea surement window selected by the suffix at WINDow DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON refers to window 4 Optional Keywords Some keywords are optional and are only part of the syntax because of SCPI compli ance You can include them in the header or not Note that if an optional keyword has a numeric suffix and you
240. i tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value Analyzing Results Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 112 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 111 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Positioning Delta Markers The following commands position delta markers on the trace CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz M AimumlEEFT nennen nennen 253 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMAximumNENT esee nares 253 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK cesses 254 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mzM Aimum RICH 254 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkermz MiNimum LEET 254 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMiNimumNENT eene nannte nins 254 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK eee 254 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz MiNimum RICH 254 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker posi tion
241. ial numbers Example SYST COMM PEXP RDEV GEN ADDR CAT Result 100015 101977 Usage Query only SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Serial Number on page 52 SYSTem COMMunicate PEXPress RESCan Repeats a scan for external generators connected to the R amp S FPS This is useful if new generators were connected recently and are not yet displayed in the list of serial numbers Example SYST COMM PEXP RESC Usage Event SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Rescan on page 52 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator INTerface Type Defines the interface used for the connection to the external generator This command is only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 165 Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt Type gt PEXP TCPip RST PEXP Example SYST COMM RDEV GEN INT TCP Manual operation See Interface on page 51 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator TYPE Type This command selects the type of external generator For a list of the available generator types see the External Generator Control Basics section in the R amp S FPS User Manual Parameters lt Name gt lt Generator name as string value gt RST SMUO02 Example SYST COMM RDEV GEN TYPE SMWO6 Selects SMWO6 as an external generator Manual operation See Generator Type on page 51 SYSTem COMMunicate TCPip RDEVice GENerator
242. ichth AAA 84 RE FUSO EE 84 Center frequency Defines the normal center frequency of the signal The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span gt 0 Span min 2 lt foenter S fmax SPaN minl 2 fmax and Spanmin depend on the instrument and are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 174 Span Defines the frequency span The center frequency is kept constant The following range is allowed span 0 0 Hz span gt 0 SPAM min S f span S f max and fmax DBW 2 fmax and Spanmin are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe ADEMod n SPECtrum SPAN MAXimum on page 199 SENSe ADEMod n SPEC SPAN ZOOM on page 199 Demodulation Bandwidth Defines the demodulation bandwidth of the measurement The demodulation band width determines the sample rate with which the input signal is captured and analyzed For recommendations on finding the correct demodulation bandwidth see chapter 4 2 Demodulation Bandwidth on page 26 For details on the relation between demodulation bandwidth and sample rate refer to chapter 4 3 Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset on page 27 Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 184 RF Full Span Sets the span around the center frequency of the RF data to be evaluated to the demodulation bandwidth Remote command SENSe ADEMod lt n gt SPECtrum SPAN M
243. ignal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S FPS so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Note however that the internal reference level used to adjust the hardware settings to the expected signal optimally ignores any Reference Level Offset Thus it is impor tant to keep in mind the actual power level the R amp S FPS must handle and not to rely on the displayed reference level internal reference level displayed reference level offset Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 177 Unit Reference Level The R amp S FPS measures the signal voltage at the RF input In the default state the level is displayed at a power of 1 mW dBm Via the known input impedance 50 O or 75 Q see Impedance on page 49 conversion to other units is possible The fol lowing units are available and directly convertible e dBm dBmV dByV dBpA dBpW Volt Ampere Watt Remote command INPut IMPedance on page 151 CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer on page 176 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Reference Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is opti mized while signal compression clipping and ove
244. igure ADEMod RESults PM DETector det REFerence on page 206 Meas gt Reference Sets the Reference Value to be used for relative demodulation results to the currently measured value for all relative detectors Note A reference value 0 would provide infinite results and is thus automatically cor rected to 0 7 If necessary the detectors are activated Remote command CONFigure ADEMod RESults AM DETector det REFerence MEAStoref on page 207 CONFigure ADEMod RESults FM DETector det REFerence MEAStoref on page 207 CONFigure ADEMod RESults PM DETector det REFerence MEAStoref on page 207 5 9 Output Settings The R amp S FPS can provide output to special connectors for other devices For details on connectors refer to the R amp S FPS Getting Started manual Front Rear Panel View chapters How to provide trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FPS User Manual Digital UO output is not available for Analog Demodulation measurements Output settings can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key or in the Outputs dia log box Output Settings Output Digital IQ IF Video Output IF Out Frequency Trigger 2 INGISE elo pc RE 95 Misc aber odacuaad aestdawacehcussvasieecsneuy detec ucayvaceannis vasee canada detebeaaags deaneavyectee pated eater aiseanaee 95 L Output EE 95 5o 96 L Pulse 18 EE 96 EO NL oo NET mm TE 96 Noise Source Switches the
245. in chapter 5 10 Automatic Settings on page 96 MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode settings related to data acquisition cannot be adjusted for Analog Demodulation applications SENSE MADIM E EE 209 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation esses enne nnne nennen rrr nnns 209 SENSe jADJust CONFigure DURationMODE 2 ccccctve iuter nean enn ue ann unma 210 IGENZGe Aust CONEioure Hv teresle LOMer nee 210 IGENZGe Aust CONEioure H Gteresles Uber 211 SENSe ADJust CONFigure TRIG ssssssssesssssssssssesenen nennen nennen ern re renta rrr rne 211 ISENSe TADJUSEPREGUGIQG cs certat tud duco coeant eot td teer tnt ge ttc tag rex eda a uaa 211 ISENSeJAD JuSt BVeli zr iret eee a texere Peces exec e ERN EF Uni en 211 IGENZGelADlust SCAL ev AUTTOtCONTnuousl ee seeeeeaaaeaeaaaaeeteneneees 212 SENSe ADJust ALL This command initiates a measurement to determine and set the ideal settings for the current task automatically only once for the current measurement This includes e Center frequency e Reference level e Scaling Example ADJ ALL Usage Event Manual operation See Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto All on page 97 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation Duration In order to determine the ideal reference level the R amp S FPS performs a measurement on the current input data This command defines th
246. indow is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow Direction the new window is added relative to the existing win dow text value Type of result display evaluation method you want to add See the table below for available parameter values When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result LAY ADD 1 BEL XTIM AM RELative TDOMain Adds an AM Time Domain display below window 1 Query only See AM Time Domain on page 13 See FM Time Domain on page 14 See PM Time Domain on page 15 See AM Spectrum on page 16 See FM Spectrum on page 17 See PM Spectrum on page 18 See RF Time Domain on page 19 See RF Spectrum on page 20 See Result Summary on page 21 See Marker Table on page 22 See Marker Peak List on page 23 Table 11 2 lt WindowType gt parameter values for AnalogDemod application Parameter value Window type MTABle Marker table PEAKIist Marker peak list RSUMmary Result summary XTIM AM RF Time Domain RF power XTIM AM RELative AM Time Domain Configuring the Result Display Parameter value Window type XTIM AM RELative AFSPec AM Spectrum trum XTIM FM FM Time Domain XTIM FM AFSPectrum FM Spectrum XTIM PM PM Time Domain XTIM PM AFSPectrum PM Spectrum XTIM
247. inuous on page 220 Return values lt Frequency gt lt frequency 1 gt absolute frequency of the n dB marker to the left of the reference marker in Hz lt frequency 2 gt absolute frequency of the n dB marker to the right of the refer ence marker in Hz Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC NDBD ON Switches on the n dB down function INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK FUNC NDBD FREQ This command would return for example 100000000 200000000 meaning that the first marker position is at 100 MHz the second marker position is at 200 MHz Usage Query only Manual operation See n dB down Delta Value on page 117 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown QFACtor This command queries the Q factor of n dB down measurements Analyzing Results lt n gt lt m gt are irrelevant Return values lt QFactor gt Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown RESult This command queries the distance of the n dB down markers from each other lt n gt lt m gt are irrelevant To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 220 Return values lt Distance gt The result depends on the span In case of frequency domain meas
248. ion Results The following commands are required to obtain relative demodulation results CONFigure ADEMod RESults AM DETector det REFerence sese 206 CONFloure ADEModRESGults EM D Tector detzREterence 206 CONFigure ADEMod RESults PM DETector det REFerence sss 206 CONFigure ADEMod RESults AM DETector det STATe essen 206 CONFloure ADEModRESGults EM D Techorzdetz GTATe nn 207 CONFigure ADEMod RESults PM DETector det STATe esses eene 207 CONFigure ADEMOd RESults AM DETector det REFerence MEAStoref sss 207 CONFigure ADEMod RESults FM DETector lt det gt REFerence MEAStoref esseen 207 CONEioure ADEMod RE Gute PM DE Tector det RFerenceMEAGtoret eeaeee 207 CONFloure ADEModRESults AM Dt Techor detz MODE 208 CONFloure ADEModRESGults EM DE Techorzdetz MODE sse 208 CONFigure ADEMod RESults PM DETector det MODE eese 208 CONFigure ADEMod RESults D NET 2 2122 22222 iit iret eoa eoo iet eua een ranae anii 208 CONFigure ADEMod RESults FM DETector lt det gt REFerence lt RefValue gt CONFigure ADEMod RESults PM DETector lt det gt REFerence lt RefValue gt Defines the reference value to be used for relative demodulation results and recalcu lates the results If necessary the detector is activated A reference value 0 would provide infinite results and is thus automatic
249. is command couples or decouples the attenuation to the reference level Thus when the reference level is changed the R amp S FPS determines the signal level for optimal internal data processing and sets the required attenuation accordingly Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Configuring the Measurement Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation to the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 64 INPut EATT lt Attenuation gt This command defines an electronic attenuation manually Automatic mode must be switched off INP EATT AUTO OFF see INPut EATT AUTO on page 178 If the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level This command requires the electronic attenuation hardware option Parameters lt Attenuation gt attenuation in dB Range see data sheet Increment 1 dB RST 0 dB OFF Example INP EATT AUTO OFF INP EATT 10 dB Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 65 INPut EATT AUTO State This command turns automatic selection of the electronic attenuation on and off If on electronic attenuation reduces the mechanical attenuation whenever possible This command requires the electronic attenuation hardware option Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP EATT AUTO OFF Manual operation
250. isplayed hidden e no AL the line lies outside the interval MSRA View Ref Level 0 Y Att B 62 5ys DBW 5MHz Freq 1 0 GHz 1AP Cirw_Ref 0 00 rad AC 2 FM TimeDomain AE Clrw_Ref 0 00 Hz DC_ 62 5 Analysis I S CF 1 0 GH 1001 pts 6 25 ust F 1 0 GHz 1001 pts 5 AM Time Domain CF 1 0 GHz UU cache I Result Summary Analysis Interva ep Carrier Power 30 79 dBm carrier Offset 11 03 kHz Mod Depth 1 57 Peak Peak tPeak 72 RMS Mod Freq AM 1 5031 1 6277 9 o 0 51978 FM 87 341 kHz 96 167 kHz 91 754 kHz 49 469 kHz PM 4 7121 rad 3 0697 rad 3 8909 rad 1 5513 rad For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FPS MSRA User Manual User Manual 1176 8474 02 06 42 Default Settings for Analog Demodulation 9 Configuration Analog demodulation measurements require a special application on the R amp S FPS which you activate using the MODE key When you activate an Analog Demodulation application the first time a set of parame ters is passed on from the currently active application see chapter 5 1 Default Set tings for Analog Demodulation on page 43 After initial setup the parameters for the measurement channel are stored upon exiting and restored upon re entering the channel Thus you can switch between applications quickly and easily When you activate the Analog Demodulation application a Analog Demodulation mea surement for the input signal is started automatically with the default configurati
251. isplaying Marker Numbers By default the marker numbers are indicated in the diagram so you can find the peaks from the list However for large numbers of peaks the marker numbers may decrease readability in this case deactivate the marker number display Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks ANNotation LABel STATe on page 257 Exporting the Peak List The peak list can be exported to an ASCII file DAT for analysis in an external appli cation Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt PEAK on page 260 FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 234 n dB Down Marker A special marker can be defined to determine a characteristic bandwidth or time span in a measured signal n dB down markers are configured in the N dB Down Config dialog box using the n dB down function To display the N dB Down Config dialog box do one of the following Press the MKR FUNC key then select the Select Marker Function softkey Then select the n dB down button Select the N dB Down Config softkey e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker Function Config tab Then select the n dB down button Select N dB Down Config Limit Line Settings and Functions Marker n dB down N dB Down Value CE OWI Marker EE 117 i adas dowm bella Value i ier eel eee pecu debet o eb AEN 117 n dB down Marker State Activates or deactivates the special n dB down marker function Remote command
252. isplays Modulation signal versus time Spectrum of the modulation signal FFT RF signal power versus time Spectrum of the RF signal Determining maximum minimum and average or current values in parallel over a selected number of measurements e Maximum accuracy and temperature stability due to sampling digitization already at the IF and digital down conversion to the baseband UO e Error free AM to FM conversion and vice versa without deviation errors frequency response or frequency drift at DC coupling This user manual contains a description of the functionality that the application pro vides including remote control operation All functions not discussed in this manual are the same as in the base unit and are described in the R amp S FPS User Manual The latest version is available for download at the product homepage http www2 rohde schwarz com product F PS html Installation You can find detailed installation instructions in the R amp S FPS Getting Started manual or in the Release Notes 2 1 Starting the Analog Demodulation Application Analog Demodulation is a separate application on the R amp S FPS R amp S FPS K7 Welcome to the Analog Demodulation Application Se SESS eS Sy Although the R amp S FPS does not have a built in display it is possible to operate it inter actively in manual mode using a graphical user interface with an external monitor and a mouse connected o Manual operati
253. istant steps between the start and stop frequency This is useful for example to determine the effects of a particular device component and then remove these effects from a subsequent measurement which includes this component For an example see the External Generator Control Measurement Examples section in the R amp S FPS User Manual 4 7 1 6 Note that the normalized measurement data is stored not the original reference trace Thus if you store the normalized trace directly after calibration without changing any settings the transducer factor will be 0 dB for the entire span by definition of the nor malized trace Reference Trace Reference Line and Reference Level Reference trace The calibration results are stored internally on the R amp S FPS as a reference trace For each measured sweep point the offset to the expected values is determined If normali zation is activated the offsets in the reference trace are removed from the current measurement results to compensate for the inherent distortions R amp S FPS K7 Measurement Basics Reference line The reference line is defined by the Reference Value and Reference Position in the External Generator gt Source Calibration settings It is similar to the Reference Level defined in the Amplitude settings However as opposed to the reference level this reference line only affects the y axis scaling in the diagram it has no effect on the expected input power le
254. it to rad or deg for displaying PM signals Remote command UNIT lt n gt ANGLe on page 205 THD Unit DB Sets the unit to percent or DB for the calculation of the THD in the Result Summary Remote command UNIT n THD on page 205 Relative Unit Defines the unit for relative demodulation results see chapter 5 8 6 Result Table Set tings on page 92 Remote command CONFigure ADEMod RESults UNIT on page 208 Result Table Settings The demodulation results are displayed in the Result Summary table see also Result Summary on page 21 The detectors used to determine the results can be configured in the Result Table tab of the Demodulation Settings dialog box Demodulation In addition to common absolute demodulation the R amp S FPS Analog Demodulation application also provides demodulation results relative to user defined or measured reference values in the Result Summary MVS CUM EES 93 leie 93 EE 93 Reference Value esten nenseretittrsisasas sessi setti sss issi sess sess sss n sena 93 Meas gt Reterence sss sn sisi ies isss sida sas sess sa sss assa as 94 Detector Detector type for demodulation results Peak Positive peak Peak Negative peak Peak Autopeak RMS Root mean square Remote command The detector is specified by the DETector det suffix in CONFigure RELative AM FM PM DETector det commands Mode Defines the mode with which the demodulation result is deter
255. ities you can also add the unit If the unit is missing the com mand uses the basic unit Example with unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ without unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1 9 would also set a frequency of 1 GHz 11 1 6 2 Introduction Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down If the number you have entered is not supported e g in case of discrete steps the command returns an error Instead of a number you can also set numeric values with a text parameter in special cases e MIN MAX Defines the minimum or maximum numeric value that is supported e DEF Defines the default value e UP DOWN Increases or decreases the numeric value by one step The step size depends on the setting In some cases you can customize the step size with a corresponding command Querying numeric values When you query numeric values the system returns a number In case of physical quantities it applies the basic unit e g Hz in case of frequencies The number of dig its after the decimal point depends on the type of numeric value Example Setting SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ Query SENSe FREQuency CENTer would return 1E9 In some cases numeric values may be returned as text e INF NINF Infinity or negative infinity Represents the numeric values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 e NAN Not a number Represents the numeric value 9 91E37 NAN is returned in case
256. ive application center frequency and frequency offset Configuration According to Digital Standards e reference level and reference level offset e attenuation e preamplification Signal source and digital UO input settings input coupling e external mixer After initial setup the parameters for the measurement channel are stored upon exiting and restored upon re entering the channel Thus you can switch between applications quickly and easily Apart from these settings the following default settings are activated directly after the Analog Demodulation application is activated or after a Preset Channel Table 5 1 Default settings for Analog Demodulation channels Parameter Value Sweep mode CONTINUOUS Trigger settings FREE RUN Trigger offset 0 Demodulation BW 5 MHz Measurement time 62 5 us Demodulation filter Flat AF filters none Sample rate 8 MHz Sweep points 1001 Squelch state off Squelch level 20 0 dBm Usable UO Bandwidth 12 228 MHz Traces 1 Clr Wrte Auto Peak detector 2 6 blank Limit check off Evaluations Window 1 FM Time Domain Window 2 Result Summary 5 2 Configuration According to Digital Standards Various predefined settings files for common digital standards are provided for use with the Analog Demodulation application In addition you can create your own settings files for user specific measurements For details on which setting
257. ker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 220 11 8 1 2 Analyzing Results The unit depends on the application of the command Table 11 4 Analog demodulation measurements Parameter measuring function or result display Output unit AM result display lin R amp S FPS K7 dB log FM result display Hz lin R amp S FPS K7 dB log PM result display rad deg lin R amp S FPS K7 dB log RF result display dB Range Log or Range Linear R amp S FPS K7 Range Linear Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker or the fixed reference Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end CALC DELT2 ON Switches on delta marker 2 CALC DELT2 Y Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2 Usage Query only General Marker Settings The following commands control general marker functionality See also Fixed Reference Marker Settings on page 255 CALC E EE E KE 249 CALC Ulate lt n MAR EB TEEN 250 Eis MIVA Mr 250 CALCulate n MARKer m X SSIZe lt StepSize gt This command selects
258. l Markers The following commands define the position of markers in the diagram CAL Culate lt ne MARKercm AOE EE 243 CAL Culate nz M bker mmz LUNKTOMAbkercmz nnns nns en iiis 243 CAL e DE E E REN CN 244 Te DE Ee 244 GALGulat lt n MARK GPs ineeX iscecscccesestecuiecccnssccadsdezssuutencessnuievaccs seuss cdeeacedssaatesuwacnebsteaes 244 CAL Culate nz MAkercnmzsN esee aaa asse iis asse sitis sa sensns sns 245 CAL Culatesms DELTamarkersmooNOFF EE 246 CAL Culate lt n DEL Tamiarkersm gt BEE 246 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK TOMAbkercmz eene nean 246 CAL Culate lt n gt DEL Tamarkersit gt MODE neheni anan i ai aa a aaa 246 CALC latesns DEL Tamarker lt M ME 247 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m STATe sessi nennen tnnt 247 CALCulate nz DELTamarkercmz TR ACe asset insi sse s nsa a an 247 GALCGulatesmsDELTamarkersmsdX EEN 248 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz SREL ative sesenta nnns 248 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzN sess inana naani isis sensns daas 248 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF This command turns all markers off Example CALC MARK AOFF Switches off all markers Usage Event Manual operation See All Markers Off on page 107 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK TO MARKer lt m gt lt State gt This command links normal marker lt m1 gt to any active normal marker lt m2 gt If you change the horizontal position of marker lt m2
259. l generator erre rers 54 Frequency offset External generator ette 38 54 Frequency range Calibration sweep external generator 38 55 Frequency converting measurements External generator snosi rne ENEE eh 38 Frontend Senge cech meret rere tratan en 48 FRQ External Generator roni iniii eda 39 G Generator Frequencies external generator 38 54 Frequency coupling external generator 54 Frequency offset external generator Output power external generator ee Generator type External generatotr cocer vex oe ne ted 51 Generators Frequency range external generator 52 Power range external generator Setup files external generator Supported external generator ssssss H Hardware settings Displayed E 10 High pass filter iur 85 Hold Trace setting WEE 101 Hysteresis Lower A to level tee t EI M Trigger Power sensor Upper Auto level iirin its l UO data Export file binary data description Export file parameter description EPONJ WEE Exporting remote Exporting Importing Importing Importing remote Importing Exporting UO Power TUNG Q GT 70 Trigger level remote eese 188 IF OVLD External generator nee 35 39 IF Power hale CT Trigger level
260. lications roten 7T MSRA applications remote 4 221 encre cts 7T Remote commands Basics Oh Syritax ethernet t teni pne 140 Boolean values 143 Capitalization 141 Character data 144 Data blocks 144 Numeric values 142 Obsolete 283 Optional keywords 141 Parameters 142 Strings 144 SIUE 141 Res BW S66 RBW set etu tinte Anaad 75 Rescanning External generators Residual EMi desti ente edu A Resolution bandwidth S86 RBW wets ue dpt ety usd dicent 75 Restoring Channel settings erre 48 Standard files n RRESUIE Display rrr rtr err deeds Result displays Marker table 2 re erret 22 c dp 23 Result frequency External generator tein rene 55 Result Summary Demodulation spectrum vue eere Evaluatiori method nce nt ena Retrieving values remote m nct S Prae Data format remote Exporting WE Retrieving remote control v i Stability EE 29 Updating the display entren 77 Updating the display remote ssssse 221 Reverse sweep Ext mal generator sisisi eet ede 38 54 RF Offline ci M 70 RF attenuation te E E 64 VENIT 64 suspe Eje a 84 RF input E ue 150 152 RF OVLD External g
261. limit lines that are defined by absolute values for the x axis Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol OFFSet on page 266 Limit Line Settings and Functions Y Offset Shifts a limit line that has relative values for the y axis levels or linear units such as volt vertically This setting does not have any effect on limit lines that are defined by absolute values for the y axis Remote command CALCulate n LIMit k LOWer OFFSet on page 268 CALCulate n LIMit k UPPer OFFSet on page 270 Create New Line Creates a new limit line Edit Line Edit an existing limit line configuration Copy Line Copy the selected limit line configuration to create a new line Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt COPY on page 272 Delete Line Delete the selected limit line configuration Remote command CALCulate n LIMit k DELete on page 273 Disable All Lines Disable all limit lines in one step Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt STATe on page 273 6 4 2 Limit Line Details Limit lines details are configured in the Edit Line dialog box which is displayed when you select the New Edit or Copy To buttons in the Line Config dialog box Limit Line Settings and Functions Edit Limit L ron x Name UPPER LIMIT LINE Threshold 200 0 dBm J L J o 4 Comment Margin X Axis Y Axis Position 0 00 Hz 30 00000000 MHz
262. lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks STATe lt State gt This command turns a peak search on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE STAT ON Activates marker peak search Manual operation See Peak List State on page 115 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEeaks X This command queries the position of the peaks on the x axis The order depends on the sort order that has been set with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks SORT lt n gt lt m gt are irrelevant Return values lt PeakPosition gt Position of the peaks on the x axis The unit depends on the measurement Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEeaks Y This command queries the position of the peaks on the y axis The order depends on the sort order that has been set with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks SORT lt n gt lt m gt are irrelevant Return values lt PeakPosition gt Position of the peaks on the y axis The unit depends on the measurement Usage Query only MMEMory STORe lt n gt LIST lt FileName gt This command exports the SEM and spurious emission list evaluation to a file The file format is dat Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicate
263. lute CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines an offset for a complete limit line Compared to shifting the limit line an offset does not actually change the limit line defi nition points lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Offset gt Numeric value The unit depends on the scale of the x axis RST 0 Manual operation See X Offset on page 119 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol SHIFt Distance This command moves a complete limit line horizontally Compared to defining an offset this command actually changes the limit line definition points by the value you define lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters Distance Numeric value The unit depends on the scale of the x axis Manual operation See Shift x on page 123 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol SPACing lt InterpolMode gt This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the calculation of limit lines from one horizontal point to the next Analyzing Results Parameters lt InterpolMode gt LINear LOGarithmic RST LIN Example CALC LIM CONT SPAC LIN CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer DATA lt LimitLinePoints gt This command defines the vertical definition points of a lower limit line lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt LimitLinePoints gt Variable number of level values Note that the number of vertical values has to be the same as the number of horiz
264. ly starts a new one Example ABOR WAI INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and starts a new one once abortion has been completed Usage Event SCPI confirmed INITiate lt n gt CONMeas This command restarts a single measurement that has been stopped using ABORt or finished in single sweep mode The measurement is restarted at the beginning not where the previous measurement was stopped Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps As opposed to INI Tiate lt n gt IMMediate this command does not reset traces in maxhold minhold or average mode Therefore it can be used to continue measure ments using maxhold or averaging functions Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Usage Event Manual operation See Continue Single Sweep on page 77 INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous lt State gt This command controls the sweep mode for an individual measurement channel Note that in single sweep mode you can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous sweep mode synchronization to the end of the measurement is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous sweep mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single sweep end synchronization For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FPS User Manual If the sweep mode is changed for a measurement channel while the Sequencer is active see INITiate lt n gt S
265. measurements on a fixed frequency e g zero span or UO measurements the third IF represents the center frequency This trigger source is only available for RF input The available trigger levels depend on the RF attenuation and preamplification A refer ence level offset if defined is also considered For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet Remote command TRIG SOUR IFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 190 FM AM PM RF Offline Trigger Source Triggers when the demodulated input signal exceeds the trigger level Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 190 RF Power Trigger Source Defines triggering of the measurement via signals which are outside the displayed measurement range For this purpose the instrument uses a level detector at the first intermediate fre quency The input signal must be in the frequency range between 500 MHz and 7 GHz The resulting trigger level at the RF input depends on the RF attenuation and preampli fication For details on available trigger levels see the instrument s data sheet Trigger Configuration Note If the input signal contains frequencies outside of this range e g for fullspan measurements the sweep may be aborted and a message indicating the allowed input frequencies is displayed in the status bar A Trigger Offset Trigger Polarity and Trigger Holdoff to improve the trigger stabil ity can be defi
266. ment functions for the current measurement settings This includes e Auto Frequency Auto Level e AF Auto Scale on page 90 This function is only available for the MSRA Master not for the applications Remote command SENSe ADJust ALL on page 209 Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Freq The R amp S FPS adjusts the center frequency automatically The optimum center frequency is the frequency with the highest S N ratio in the fre quency span As this function uses the signal counter it is intended for use with sinus oidal signals At the same time the optimal reference level is also set see Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level on page 64 Remote command SENSe ADJust FREQuency on page 211 Automatic Settings Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is opti mized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized To determine the optimal reference level a level measurement is performed on the R amp S FPS You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 98 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 211 Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto Re
267. meters define the range of the demodulated data to be displayed They are configured in the Scaling tab of the Demodulation Settings dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Inthe Analog Demodulation Overview select the Demod Settings button then select the Scaling tab e Select the MEAS CONFIG key and then the Scale Config softkey Depending on the evaluation AF or RF display the settings vary e Ee EEN 88 SN ee a REENEN 90 AF Evaluation These settings are only available for AF evaluations Demod Spectrum AfFilter Scaling Unit AF Range Db per Division 10 0 dB Ref Position 100 0 Ref Value 100 0 AF Coupling Beviaton Logarithmic AF Auto Scale E o on SJel ejie mioes 2 AM Spectrum E Dev per Division Db per Division 88 Reference Value POSIUOT irridet tree eate tr er n ta edi re C a a Eds e ree dede 89 elteren 89 rigole 89 RL E 90 Ee 90 Dev per Division Db per Division Defines the modulation depth or the phase deviation or frequency deviation per divi sion logarithmic 0 1 to 20 dB AM display 0 0001 to 1000 FM display 1 Hz div to 100 MHz div PM display 0 0001 rad div to 1000 rad div Demodulation Note The value defined per division refers to the default display of 10 divisions on the y axis If fewer divisions are displayed e g because the window is reduced in height the range per division is inc
268. mined The modes are similar to those for the entire trace see Trace Mode on page 100 Clear Write Overwrite mode the detector value is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S FPS saves each result only if the new value is greater than the previous one Average The average result is determined over all sweeps Remote command CONFigure ADEMod RESults AM DETector det MODE on page 208 CONFigure ADEMod RESults FM DETector det MODE on page 208 CONFigure ADEMod RESults PM DETector lt det gt MODE on page 208 State Activates relative demodulation for the selected detector If activated the demodulated result is set in relation to the Reference Value Remote command CONFigure ADEMod RESults AM DETector lt det gt STATe on page 206 CONFigure ADEMod RESults FM DETector lt det gt STATe on page 207 CONFigure ADEMod RESults PM DETector lt det gt STATe on page 207 Reference Value Defines the reference value to be used for relative demodulation results and recalcu lates the results If necessary the detector is activated Output Settings Note A reference value 0 would provide infinite results and is thus automatically cor rected to 0 7 Remote command CONFigure ADEMod RESults AM DETector det REFerence on page 206 CONFigure ADEMod RESults FM DETector det REFerence on page 206 CONF
269. mmand DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 180 Scaling Defines the scaling method for the y axis Logarithmic Logarithmic scaling only available for logarithmic units dB and A V Watt Linear Unit Linear scaling in the unit of the measured signal Linear Per Linear scaling in percentages from 0 to 100 cent Absolute The labeling of the level lines refers to the absolute value of the refer ence level not available for Linear Percent Relative The scaling is in dB relative to the reference level only available for logarithmic units dB The upper line of the grid reference level is always at 0 dB Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 180 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE on page 180 Units The units define how the demodulated data is displayed 5 8 6 Demodulation They are configured in the Units tab of the Demodulation Settings dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Inthe Analog Demodulation Overview select the Demod Settings button then select the Units tab e Select the MEAS CONFIG key and then the Scale Config softkey Then select the Units tab Demod Spectrum AfFilter Scaling Unit Unit Phase Unit um rad THDUnit oo Sa 2 AM Spectrum Phase E e DE 92 oP DB E 92 Relativo INE E 92 Phase Unit Rad Deg Sets the phase un
270. mmand examples Note that some remote command examples mentioned in this general introduction may not be supported by this particular application 11 1 1 Conventions used in Descriptions Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions e Command usage If not specified otherwise commands can be used both for setting and for querying parameters If a command can be used for setting or querying only or if it initiates an event the usage is stated explicitely Parameter usage If not specified otherwise a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the result of a query Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values e Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con firmed All commands used by the R amp S FPS follow the SCPI syntax rules e Asynchronous commands A command which does not automatically finish executing before the next com mand starts executing overlapping command is indicated as an Asynchronous command e Reset values RST User Manual 1176 8474 02 06 140 11 1 2 11 1 3 11 1 4 Introduction Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument RST command are indicated as RST values if available Default unit T
271. mote command SENSe ADEMod n AF COUPling on page 194 Selected Trace Defines the trace used to determine the results in the Result Summary Time Domain Zoom Using the time domain zoom the demodulated data for a particular time span is extrac ted and displayed in more detail This is useful if the measurement time is very large and thus each sweep point represents a large time span The time domain zoom func tion distributes the available sweep points only among the time span defined by the zoom area length The time span displayed per division of the diagram is decreased Thus the display of the extracted time span becomes more precise Note that the time domain zoom area affects not only the diagram display but the entire evaluation for the current window This function is only available for evaluations in the time domain Tip In addition to the Time Domain Zoom a graphical zoom is available for all dia gram evaluations However the graphical zoom is useful only if more measured values than trace points are available The time span represented by each measurement point remains the same For details see chapter 6 5 Zoom Functions on page 123 State Time Domain Zoom Activates or deactivates the time domain zoom mode ON Activates the time domain zoom Demodulation OFF Deactivates the time domain zoom and restores the original display If more measured values than measurement points are available sev
272. n page 248 Analyzing Results Parameters lt Mode gt ABSolute Delta marker position in absolute terms RELative Delta marker position in relation to a reference marker RST RELative Example CALC DELT MODE ABS Absolute delta marker position CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MREF lt Reference gt This command selects a reference marker for a delta marker other than marker 1 The reference may be another marker or the fixed reference Parameters lt Reference gt 1 to 16 Selects markers 1 to 16 as the reference FIXed Selects the fixed reference as the reference Example CALC DELT3 MREF 2 Specifies that the values of delta marker 3 are relative to marker 2 Manual operation See Reference Marker on page 106 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe State This command turns delta markers on and off If necessary the command activates the delta marker first No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT2 ON Turns on delta marker 2 Manual operation See Marker State on page 106 See Marker Type on page 106 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe lt Trace gt This command selects the trace a delta marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Analyzing Results Parameters lt Trace
273. n type and rearrange the screen layout for a measurement channel as you do using the SmartGrid in manual operation Since the available evaluation types depend on the selected application some parameters for the following commands also depend on the selected measure ment channel Note that the suffix n always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel see INSTrument SELect on page 148 Be Dee EIB det 226 LAYOuURCATAlOg WIN DOW EE 227 Befreier 227 Bd E Ee EE 228 LAyout RED acel WINDOW cece ee caeae paai ete cececeeeeeeeeeseseeeesasaeaeeaeaaeaaeneneees 228 LAVOUDS EE 228 LAY out WINDOW SAP ADD EE 230 LAYoutWINDow n IDEMItify EEEREREEEENEEREEEEEEEEEEEENEEERNREEEEEEESREREREEER SEENEN sua 230 LAY OUR let 230 LAYOuTAWINDOWSn gt E 231 Configuring the Result Display LAYout ADD WINDow lt WindowName gt lt Direction gt lt WindowType gt This command adds a window to the display in the active measurement channel This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result To replace an existing window use the LAYout REPLace WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt lt Direction gt lt WindowType gt Return values lt NewWindowName gt Example Usage Manual operation String containing the name of the existing window the new win dow is inserted next to By default the name of a w
274. ncerJMMedate nennen nnns nns nn nsns nnns 222 INiTiate lt n gt SEQuence MODE nsn ss nnn snas essai sisse rris assi sanis is 222 INI Fate SEQuencer TR EE 223 SVS Tem o EO Ue me EE 223 ABORt This command aborts the measurement in the current measurement channel and resets the trigger system To prevent overlapping execution of the subsequent command before the measure ment has been aborted successfully use the OPC or wAT command after ABOR and before the next command For details see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FPS User Manual To abort a sequence of measurements by the Sequencer use the INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer ABORt command Note on blocked remote control programs If a sequential command cannot be completed for example because a triggered sweep never receives a trigger the remote control program will never finish and the remote channel to the R amp S FPS is blocked for further commands In this case you must inter rupt processing on the remote channel first in order to abort the measurement To do so send a Device Clear command from the control instrument to the R amp S FPS on a parallel channel to clear all currently active remote channels Depending on the used interface and protocol send the following commands e Visa viClear Now you can send the ABORt command on the remote channel performing the mea surement Example ABOR INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and immediate
275. nector Note For offline AF or RF triggers no output signal is provided Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 192 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection on page 192 Output Type Trigger 2 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FPS triggers gered Data Acquisition Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FPS is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 192 Level Output Type Trigger 2 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 192 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth on page 193 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigg
276. ned for the RF trigger but no Hysteresis Remote command TRIG SOUR RFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 190 Trigger Level Defines the trigger level for the specified trigger source For details on supported trigger levels see the data sheet Remote command TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower on page 188 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower on page 188 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port on page 187 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower on page 188 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel AM RELative on page 189 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel AM ABSolute on page 189 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel FM on page 189 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel PMon page 189 Trigger Offset Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the sweep offset gt 0 Start of the sweep is delayed offset lt 0 Sweep starts earlier pre trigger Remote command TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 186 Hysteresis Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs Settting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level This setting is only available for IF Power trigger sources The range of the value is between 3 dB and 50 dB with a step width of 1 dB Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis on page 187 Drop Out Time Defines the time the input signal must stay b
277. nen nns 260 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown FREQuenoy eese 261 CAL Culate nz M Abker mmzEUNGCHonNDBfDowpn OEACtor eene 261 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzEUNGCHonNDBDown REGu 262 CAL Culate nz M bkermmz FUNGCHonNDBDown STATe enne nnns 262 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown TIME cccccsesecescceceesceeaseeeseeeees 263 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown lt Distance gt This command defines the distance of the n dB down markers to the reference marker lt n gt lt m gt are irrelevant Analyzing Results Parameters lt Distance gt Distance of the temporary markers to the reference marker in dB For a positive offset the markers T1 and T2 are placed below the active reference point For a negative offset for example for notch filter measure ments the markers T1 and T2 are placed above the active ref erence point RST 6dB Example CALC MARK FUNC NDBD 3dB Sets the distance to the reference marker to 3 dB CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown FREQuency This command queries the position of the n dB down markers on the x axis when mea suring in the frequency domain lt n gt lt m gt are irrelevant To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONT
278. ngs for an Analog Demodulation application channel in MSRA mode configure the analysis interval not an actual data capture from the input signal In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the analysis interval for Analog Demodulation The currently used analysis interval in seconds related to measurement start is indi cated in the window header for each result display Analysis line A frequent question when analyzing multi standard signals is how each data channel is correlated in time to others Thus an analysis line has been introduced The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA applications It can be positioned in any MSRA application or the MSRA Master and is then adjusted in all other applications Thus you can easily analyze the results at a specific time in the measurement in all applications and determine correlations If the marked point in time is contained in the analysis interval of the application the line is indicated in all time based result displays such as time symbol slot or bit dia grams By default the analysis line is displayed however it can be hidden from view manually In all result displays the AL label in the window title bar indicates whether or not the analysis line lies within the analysis interval or not e orange AL the line lies within the interval white AL the line lies within the interval but is not d
279. nic Attenuation If the optional Electronic Attenuation hardware is installed on the R amp S FPS you can also activate an electronic attenuator In Auto mode the settings are defined automatically in Manual mode you can define the mechanical and electronic attenuation separately Note Electronic attenuation is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 7 GHz In Auto mode RF attenuation is provided by the electronic attenuator as much as possible to reduce the amount of mechanical switching required Mechanical attenua tion may provide a better signal to noise ratio however When you switch off electronic attenuation the RF attenuation is automatically set to the same mode auto manual as the electronic attenuation was set to Thus the RF attenuation may be set to automatic mode and the full attenuation is provided by the mechanical attenuator if possible Both the electronic and the mechanical attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed in the status bar Remote command INPut EATT STATe on page 178 INPut EATT AUTO on page 178 INPut EATT on page 178 Input Settings Some input settings affect the measured amplitude of the signal as well For details see chapter 5 4 1
280. ns to import and export raw UO measurement data How to Perform Measurements in the Analog Demodulation Application The basic procedure to perform each measurement and step by step instructions for more complex tasks or alternative methods Measurement Examples Detailed measurement examples to guide you through typical measurement sce narios and allow you to try out the application immediately Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Hints and tips on how to handle errors and optimize the measurement configura tion Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements Remote commands required to configure and perform Analog Demodulation mea surements in a remote environment sorted by tasks Commands required to set up the environment or to perform common tasks on the instrument are provided in the main R amp S FPS User Manual Programming examples demonstrate the use of many commands and can usually be executed directly for test purposes List of remote commands Alpahabetical list of all remote commands described in the manual Index User Manual 1176 8474 02 06 5 Documentation Overview 1 2 Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S FPS consists of the following parts e Printed Getting Started manual e Online Help system on the instrument e Documentation CD ROM with Getting Started User Manuals for base unit and firmware applications Service Manual Release Notes Data she
281. nue single sweep feci M M 77 Continuous sweep eu EE 76 Conventions Kier leen E Ile 140 Copying Measurement channel remote 145 Coupling Automatic external generator sss 38 54 Frequencies external generator ssssss 37 Input remote 190 Manual external generator sessssessesesinesrressresses 54 D Data acquisition MSRA et ed 73 181 Remote control coasts sated ede niiina 181 E E 73 Data format p Xie ee 240 Binary FROM ONG EE 233 235 DB per division SCAG E 88 DBW see Demodulation bandwidth suuss 10 Decimal separator Trace OX POM eo roc o rette carers ee ete desta 104 Deemphasis filter AF filters css tas ni certa rn ced dinh SES 87 Remote control siinses senaia 201 202 Default values PFOSOl i acies gue oe canto Seege D EFE vd 43 Deleting Limitline values sik ioi citt neca trainee 123 Settings files Ela le Delta Markets iini eric vean ene cca tei gaius BI Demodulation AF spectrum 82 Configutatloni cece ftir aoa aise 78 Display EE 78 Filter types 27 74 PROCCSS EE 24 Relative remote control 208 Relative remote Asosini sinaia 207 RF Spectrum ite cnet ul tis 83 Scaling 85 88 i r E M 78 SECHER ius certe 82 Spectrum Res
282. o configure an Analog Demodulation measurement Specific commands e Managing Standard EE EE 149 e Configuring Mul e EE 150 e Configuring the Output eee dla eter eet ete tr eg dee 173 e regueney Sens EEN 173 e Configuring the Vertical Axis Amplitude Gcalmg 175 e Configuring Data ACquiSition ccccccccccecssssssseesesssseceessecseeeeeeseceeeeessesseneeeesees 181 S TG ln DEE 186 Configuring the Measurement e Configuring Demodulaton wit cci coe ee hee a ee La 193 e Adjusting Settings e 209 e Configuring Standard Traces AAA 212 11 4 1 Managing Standard Settings You can configure the Analog Demodulation application using predefined standard set tings This allows for quick and easy configuration for commonly performed measure ments For details see chapter 5 2 Configuration According to Digital Standards on page 44 For an overview of predefined standards and settings see chapter A Predefined Standards and Settings on page 286 SENSe ADEMod n PRESet S TANdard ccena 149 SENSe ADEMod rn PRESeEURESTOFe ee retener cna SEENEN 149 SENSe ADEMod n PRESSESTORS eciacciipn tinte poene b nene eR k ares ob pR TR EEN 150 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt PRESet STANdard Standard This command loads a measurement configuration Standard definitions are stored in an xml file The default directory for Analog Demodu lation standards is C Nr sNinstrNuser predefined M
283. ode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FPS User Manual Parameters lt Trace gt Number of the trace to be stored This parameter is ignored if the option Export all Traces and all Table Results is activated in the Export configuration settings see FORMat DEXPort TRACes on page 235 lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR1 TRAC 3 C TEST ASC Stores trace 3 from window 1 in the file TEST ASC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Export Trace to ASCII File on page 104 FORMat DEXPort DSEParator lt Separator gt This command selects the decimal separator for data exported in ASCII format Parameters lt Separator gt Example Manual operation Retrieving Results COMMa Uses a comma as decimal separator e g 4 05 POINt Uses a point as decimal separator e g 4 05 RST RST has no effect on the decimal separator Default is POINt FORM DEXP DSEP POIN Sets the decimal point as separator See Decimal Separator on page 104 See Exporting the Peak List on page 116 FORMat DEXPort HEADer lt State gt If enabled additional instrument and measurement settings are included in the header of the export file for result data If disabled only the pure result data from the selected traces and tables is exported See chapter 11 7 5 Reference ASCII File Export Format on page 240 for details Parameters
284. om windows all subsequent zoom windows move up one position Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 123 See Restore Original Display on page 124 See R Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 124 11 8 4 Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master actually captures data the MSRA applications define an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the analysis interval The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA applica tions ES User Manual 1176 8474 02 06 279 Analyzing Results For the Analog Demodulation application the commands to define the analysis interval are the same as those used to define the actual data acquisition see chapter 11 4 6 Configuring Data Acquisition on page 181 Be sure to select the correct measure ment channel before executing these commands In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the analysis interval for the Analog Demodulation measurement Useful commands related to MSRA mode described elsewhere INITiate lt n gt REFResh on page 221 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer REFResh ALL on page 223 Remote commands exclusive to MSRA applications The following commands are only available for MSRA application channels CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALIN HOW 280 CALC latesn
285. ommand activates deactivates the selected deemphasis for the specified evalua tion For details about deemphasis refer to Deemphasis on page 87 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example FILT DEMP ON Activates the selected deemphasis Manual operation See Deemphasis on page 87 SENSe FILTer lt n gt HPASs FREQuency ABSolute FilterType This command selects the high pass filter type for the specified evaluation For details on the high pass filters refer to High Pass on page 85 Parameters lt FilterType gt 20 Hz 50 Hz 300 Hz RST 300Hz Default unit Hz Example FILT HPAS FREQ 300Hz Selects the high pass filter for the demodulation bandwidth range from 800 Hz to 8 MHz Manual operation See High Pass on page 85 SENSe FILTer lt n gt HPASs FREQuency MANual Frequency This command selects the cutoff frequency of the high pass filter for the specified eval uation For details on the high pass filters refer to High Pass on page 85 Parameters Frequency numeric value Range 0 to 3 MHz RST 15kHz Example FILT HPAS FREQ MAN 3MHz The AF results are restricted to frequencies lower than 3 MHz Manual operation See High Pass on page 85 Configuring the Measurement SENSe FlLTer lt n gt HPASs STATe State This command activates deactivates the selected high pass filter for the specified eval uation For details on the high pass filter refer to Hi
286. on It can be configured in the Analog Demodulation Overview dialog box which is dis played when you select the Overview softkey from any menu The main configuration settings and dialog boxes are also available via the Analog Demod menu which is displayed when you press the MEAS CONFIG key The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chapter 11 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements on page 139 Predefined settings For commonly performed measurements standard setup files are provided for quick and easy configuration Simply load an existing standard settings file and if necessary adapt the measurement settings to your specific requirements For an overview of predefined standards and settings see chapter A Predefined Standards and Settings on page 286 e Default Settings for Analog Demodulation eene 43 e Configuration According to Digital Standards 44 E te UE lge be EE 46 putand Fromend Sette oomen Dee en a er d de c dederis 48 e Trigger le UTC EE 68 e Data ACSI DEE 73 e Demodtilation EE 78 LEER nerui 78 OWP Selllhigs EE 94 e Automati Settings assisen r aec sepu ae e pee cu vate SUY e PER Ea Pp EATER Le YER 96 5 1 Default Settings for Analog Demodulation When you activate the Analog Demodulation application the first time a set of parame ters is passed on from the currently act
287. on page 56 Configuring the Measurement SENSe CORRection METHod This command selects the type of measurement to be performed with the external gen erator This command is only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 165 Parameters REFLection Selects reflection measurements TRANsmission Selects transmission measurements RST TRANsmission Example CORR METH TRAN Sets the type of measurement to transmission Manual operation See Calibrate Transmission on page 56 See Calibrate Reflection Short on page 56 See Calibrate Reflection Open on page 56 SENSe CORRection RECall This command restores the measurement configuration used for calibration This command is only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 165 Example CORR REC Usage Event Manual operation See Recall on page 56 SENSe CORRection STATe State This command turns correction of measurement results normalization on and off The command is available after you have created a reference trace for the selected measurement type with SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire on page 169 This command is only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 165 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CORR ON Activates normalization Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation
288. on via an external monitor and mouse It is recommended that you use the manual mode initially to get familiar with the instru ment and its functions before using it in pure remote mode Thus this document describes in detail how to operate the instrument manually using an external monitor and mouse The remote commands are described in the second part of the document For details on manual operation see the R amp S FPS Getting Started manual To activate the Analog Demodulation application 1 Select the MODE key A dialog box opens that contains all operating modes and applications currently available on your R amp S FPS 2 Select the Analog Demodulation item 28882 NAI Analog Demod The R amp S FPS opens a new measurement channel for the Analog Demodulation application The measurement is started immediately with the default settings It can be configured in the Analog Demodulation Overview dialog box which is displayed when you select the Overview softkey from any menu see chapter 5 3 Configuration Overview on page 46 Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function When you activate an application a new measurement channel is created which deter mines the measurement settings for that application The same application can be acti vated with different measurement settings by creating several channels for the same application The number of channels that can be configured at the same time depends on th
289. onfiguring the Result Display LAYout WINDow lt n gt ADD lt Direction gt lt WindowType gt This command adds a measurement window to the display Note that with this com mand the suffix n determines the existing window next to which the new window is added as opposed to LAYout ADD WINDow for which the existing window is defined by a parameter To replace an existing window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt REPLace command This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result Parameters Direction LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to add See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 226 for a list of availa ble window types Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY WIND1 ADD LEFT MTAB Result 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify This command queries the name of a particular display window indicated by the lt n gt suffix in the active measurement channel Note to query the index of a particular window use the LAYout IDENtifyl WINDow command Return values lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window In the default state the name of the window is its index Usage Quer
290. ontal values set with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DATA If not the R amp S FPS either adds missing values or ignores surplus values The unit depends on CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UNIT on page 269 RST Limit line state is OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Data points on page 122 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer MARGin Margin This command defines an area around a lower limit line where limit check violations are still tolerated lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Margin gt numeric value RST 0 Default unit dB Manual operation See Margin on page 122 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer MODE Mode This command selects the vertical limit line scaling Parameters Mode ABSolute Limit line is defined by absolute physical values The unit is variable RELative Limit line is defined by relative values related to the reference level dB RST ABSolute Analyzing Results Manual operation See X Axis on page 122 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer OFFSet Offset This command defines an offset for a complete lower limit line Compared to shifting the limit line an offset does not actually change the limit line defi nition points Parameters lt Offset gt Numeric value RST 0 Default unit dB Manual operation See Y Offset on page 120 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer SHIFt Distance This command moves a complet
291. ontrol in a net work as described in the R amp S FPS User Manual A programming example at the end of the remote commands description demonstrates the most important commands in a typical application scenario see chapter 11 11 Programming Example on page 284 Status registers The R amp S FPS K7 option uses the status registers of the base unit except for the STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit register For a description see the R amp S FPS User Manual General R amp S FPS Remote Commands The application independent remote commands for general tasks on the R amp S FPS are also available for Analog Demodulation measurements and are described in the R amp S FPS User Manual In particular this comprises the following functionality e Managing Settings and Results e Setting Up the Instrument Using the Status Register Channel specific commands Apart from a few general commands on the R amp S FPS most commands refer to the currently active channel Thus always remember to activate an Analog Demodulation channel before starting a remote program for an Analog Demodulation measurement La aeo T eo a M 140 e Common Er 144 e Activating Analog Demodulation Measurement A 145 e Configuring the MGaSuUreMment 0 c cccccceeeeeccesceneesedesteeesecceteneeecececneeenedeeneeenen 148 e Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps eeseeessenese een ttes 218 e Configuring the Result Display rete cct
292. op AF Span AF Full Span IfeT Tei e Efe lui 2 AM Spectrum t AF Center Defines the center frequency of the demodulated data to evaluate Remote command SENSe ADEMod n AF CENTer on page 197 5 8 2 2 Demodulation AF Start Defines the start frequency of the demodulated data to evaluate Remote command SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF STARt on page 198 AF Stop Defines the stop frequency of the demodulated data to evaluate The maximum AF stop frequency corresponds to half the demodulation bandwidth Remote command SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF STOP on page 198 AF Span Defines the span around the center frequency of the demodulated data to evaluate The maximum span is DBW 2 Remote command SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF SPAN on page 197 AF Full Span Sets the span around the center frequency of the demodulated data to the maximum of DBW 2 Remote command SENSe ADEMod n AF SPAN FULL on page 198 RF Evaluation These settings are only available for RF evaluation both in time and frequency domain Note that for RF data the center frequency and demodulation bandwidth corre spond to the settings defined in the Input and Data Acquisition configuration Demod Spectrum Scaling Unit Center 13 25 GHz Span Demodulation Bandwidth 5 0 MHz RF Full Span ZDBW ITer Telifs Eiegi 6 RF Time Domain E Demodulation Contar TE 84 DEE 84 Demodulation Bandw
293. ote command SENSe CORRection STATe on page 170 Recall Restores the settings that were used during source calibration This can be useful if instrument settings were changed after calibration e g center frequency frequency deviation reference level etc Remote command SENSe CORRection RECall on page 170 Input and Frontend Settings Save As Trd Factor Uses the normalized measurement data to generate a transducer factor The trace data is converted to a transducer with unit dB and stored in a file with the specified name and the suffix tra under c r_s instr trd The frequency points are allocated in equidistant steps between start and stop frequency The generated trans ducer factor can be further adapted using the Transducer softkey in the SETUP menu For more information on transducers see the General Instrument Setup gt Transduc ers section in the R amp S FPS User Manual This function is only available if Source Calibration Normalize is switched on Note Note that the normalized measurement data is used not the reference trace Thus if you store the normalized trace directly after calibration without changing any settings the transducer factor will be 0 dB for the entire span by definition of the nor malized trace Remote command SENSe CORRection TRANsducer GENerator on page 171 Reference Position Defines the position of the Result Frequency Stop in percent of the total y axis range
294. ou can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last measurement before the reference level is adapted auto matically Parameters Threshold Range O dB to 200 dB RST 1dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST LOW 2 For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level falls below 18 dBm Manual operation See Lower Level Hysteresis on page 98 Configuring the Measurement SENSe JADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer Threshold Parameters lt Threshold gt Range 0 dB to 200 dB RST 1dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST UPP 2 Example For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level rises above 22 dBm Manual operation See Upper Level Hysteresis on page 98 SENSe JADJust CONFigure TRIG State Defines the behaviour of the measurement when adjusting a setting automatically using SENS ADJ LEV ON for example See Adjusting settings automatically during triggered measurements on page 97 Parameters lt State gt ON 1 The measurement for automatic adjustment waits for the trigger OFF 0 The measurement for automatic adjustment is performed imme diately without waiting for a trigger RST 1 SENSe ADJust FREQuency This command sets the center frequency to the frequency
295. owing text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen such as ments dialog boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quotation marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin program code guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota tion marks Starting the Analog Demodulation Application 2 Welcome to the Analog Demodulation Application The R amp S FPS K7 AM FM PM measurement demodulator option converts the R amp S FPS into an analog modulation analyzer for amplitude frequency or phase modulated signals It measures not only characteristics of the useful modulation but also factors such as residual FM or synchronous modulation The digital signal processing in the R amp S FPS used in the Spectrum application for dig ital IF filters is also ideally suited for demodulating AM FM or PM signals The firm ware option R amp S FPS K7 provides the necessary measurement functions The R amp S FPS Analog Demodulation application features AM FM and PM demodulation with various result d
296. pen IqTar xml file in web browser xslt UO Parameter XML File Specification B 1 l Q Parameter XML File Specification The content of the UO parameter XML file must comply with the XML schema RsIqTar xsd available at http www rohde schwarz com file RslqTar xsd In particular the order of the XML elements must be respected i e iq tar uses an ordered XML schema For your own implementation of the iq tar file format make sure to validate your XML file against the given schema The following example shows an UO parameter XML file The XML elements and attrib utes are explained in the following sections Sample UO parameter XML file xyz xml lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt xml stylesheet type text xsl href open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt RS IQ TAR FileFormat fileFormatVersion 1 xsi noNamespaceSchemaLocation RsIqTar xsd xmlns xsi http www w3 0rg 2001 XMLSchema instance lt Name gt FSV K10 lt Name gt lt Comment gt Here is a comment lt Comment gt lt DateTime gt 2011 01 24T14 02 49 lt DateTime gt lt Samples gt 68751 lt Samples gt lt Clock unit Hz gt 6 5e 006 lt Clock gt lt Format gt complex lt Format gt lt DataType gt float32 lt DataType gt lt ScalingFactor unit V gt 1 lt ScalingFactor gt lt NumberOfChannels gt 1 lt NumberOfChannels gt lt DataFilename gt xyz complex float32 lt DataFilename gt lt UserData gt lt UserDefinedElement gt Example
297. pper limit line where limit check violations are still tolerated lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Margin gt numeric value RST 0 Default unit dB Manual operation See Margin on page 122 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer MODE Mode This command selects the vertical limit line scaling Parameters Mode ABSolute Limit line is defined by absolute physical values The unit is variable RELative Limit line is defined by relative values related to the reference level dB RST ABSolute Manual operation See X Axis on page 122 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer OFFSet Offset This command defines an offset for a complete upper limit line Compared to shifting the limit line an offset does not actually change the limit line defi nition points Analyzing Results lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Offset gt Numeric value RST 0 Default unit dB Manual operation See Y Offset on page 120 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer SHIFt lt Distance gt This command moves a complete upper limit line vertically Compared to defining an offset this command actually changes the limit line definition points by the value you define lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Distance gt Defines the distance that the limit line moves The unit depends on CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UNIT on page 269 Usage Event Manual operation See Shift y on page 1
298. put to the R amp S FPS Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 Default setting a series of frequencies is defined one for each sweep point based on the current frequency at the RF input of the R amp S FPS the RF frequency range covers the currently defined span of the R amp S FPS unless limited by the range of the signal generator OFF 0 The generator uses a single fixed frequency defined by SOURce EXTernal FREQuency RST 1 Example SOUR EXT FREQ COUP ON Manual operation See Source Frequency Coupling on page 54 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor DENominator Value This command defines the denominator of the factor with which the analyzer frequency is multiplied in order to obtain the transmit frequency of the selected generator Select the multiplication factor such that the frequency range of the generator is not exceeded if the following formula is applied to the start and stop frequency of the ana lyzer Numerator Offset Denominator Source Freq RF Parameters Value numeric value RST 1 Example SOUR EXT FREQ NUM 4 SOUR EXT FREQ DEN 3 Sets a multiplication factor of 4 3 i e the transmit frequency of the generator is 4 3 times the analyzer frequency Manual operation See Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denominator Offset on page 54 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor NUMerato
299. r Value This command defines the numerator of the factor with which the analyzer frequency is multiplied in order to obtain the transmit frequency of the selected generator Select the multiplication factor such that the frequency range of the generator is not exceeded if the following formula is applied to the start and stop frequency of the ana lyzer Numerator Source Freq RF Offset Denominator Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt Value gt lt numeric value gt RST 1 Example SOUR EXT FREQ NUM 4 SOUR EXT FREQ DEN 3 Sets a multiplication factor of 4 3 i e the transmit frequency of the generator is 4 3 times the analyzer frequency Manual operation See Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denominator Offset on page 54 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines the frequency offset of the generator with reference to the ana lyzer frequency Select the offset such that the frequency range of the generator is not exceeded if the following formula is applied to the start and stop frequency of the analyzer Source Freq gp EE offset Denominator Parameters lt Offset gt numeric value gt specified in Hz kHz MHz or GHz rounded to the nearest Hz RST 0 Hz Example SOUR EXT FREQ OFFS 10HZ Sets an offset of the generator output frequency compared to the analyzer frequency of 10 Hz Manual opera
300. r centage of the demodulation bandwidth Values between 1 and 100 in steps of 1 96 are allowed The default setting is 10 9o Center Sets the step size to the value of the center frequency and removes the coupling of the step size to the demodulation bandwidth The used value is indicated in the Value field 5 5 Trigger Configuration Manual Defines a fixed step size for the center frequency Enter the step size in the Value field Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 174 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor on page 175 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 174 Trigger Configuration Triggering means to capture the interesting part of the signal Choosing the right trigger type and configuring all trigger settings correctly allows you to detect various incidents in your demodulated signals Optionally the trigger signal used by the R amp S FPS can be output to a connected device and an external trigger signal from a connected device can be used by the R amp S FPS Trigger settings are identical to the base unit except for the available trigger sources Gating is not available for Analog Demodulation measurements For background information on trigger settings trigger output and working with external triggers see the R amp S FPS User Manual The trigger settings are configured in the Trigger dialog box Trigger Source Trigger In Out Trigger Source I
301. r Comment Here is a comment Date amp Time 2011 03 03 14 33 05 Sample rate 6 5 MHz Number of samples 65000 Duration of signal 10 ms Data format complex float32 Data filename Scaling factor 1v Comment Channel 1 of 1 Power vs time y axis 10 dB div x axis 1 ms div Spectrum y axis 20 dB div x axis 500 kHz div E mail info rohde schwar Fileformat version 1 z com Internet http Aug rohde schwarz com 8 How to Perform Measurements in the Ana log Demodulation Application The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to perform an Analog Demod ulation measurement with the R amp S FPS K7 option f 2 Press the MODE key and select the Analog Demod application Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for an Analog Demodula tion measurement Select the Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the input signal s center frequency Select the Data Acquisition button and define the bandwidth parameters for the input signal Note in MSRA mode define the analysis interval using the same settings e Demodulation Bandwidth the span of the input signal to be demodulated e Measurement Time how long the input signal is to be measured e Resolution Bandwidth how precise the signal is to be demodulated e Capture Offset multistandar
302. rator tab Input and Frontend Settings j Input Source External Generator RSS Interface Settings Source Capabilities Configuration Generator Type SGS100A6 Frequency Min Interface 4 E Interface Frequency Max Configuration Serial Number Level Min Source Calibration Reference Level Max Edit Generator Setup File For more information on configuring interfaces see the Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols section in the R amp S FPS User Manual Generator KE 51 Jurte EN RS ee EN Serial Niess EENEG 52 BRET NCS E 52 Edit Generator Setup ET 52 PROS E 52 Frequency Min Frequency Max 52 Level Mim E WEE 52 Generator Type Selects the generator type and thus defines the generator setup file to use For an overview of supported generators see chapter 4 7 1 2 Overview of Supported Generators on page 33 For information on generator setup files see chapter 4 7 1 3 Generator Setup Files on page 34 Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator TYPE on page 168 Interface Type of interface connection used The following interfaces are currently supported e TCP IP not by all generators e PCle For details on which signal generators support which interfaces see the documenta tion of the corresponding signal generator Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator INTerface on page 167 TCP IP Address For LAN connections only TCP IP address of the signal generator Remote
303. reased in order to display the same result range in the smaller window In this case the per division value does not correspond to the actual display Reference Value Position Determines the position of the reference value for the modulation depth or the phase deviation or frequency deviation on the y axis of the diagram The position is entered as a percentage of the diagram height with 100 correspond ing to the upper diagram border The default setting is 50 diagram center for the AF time evaluations and 100 upper diagram border for the AF spectrum evalua tions Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition on page 180 Reference Value Determines the modulation depth or the phase deviation or the frequency deviation at the reference line of the y axis The reference value can be set specifically for each evaluation e AF time display The trace display takes individual frequency phase offsets into account in contrast the AF Coupling setting permits automatic correction by the average frequency phase offset of the signal and can therefore not be activated simultaneously e AF spectrum display In the default setting the reference value defines the modulation depth or the FM PM deviation at the upper diagram border Possible values e AM 0 and 10000 e FM 0 and 10 MHz e PM 0 and 10000 rad Note The reference value for the AF range in the window title bar is displayed with
304. remote Impedance igo 151 E ue EE 49 66 Importing VQ Mata RE 126 127 128 289 UO data remote eee ttt 281 UE 127 Input Settings Signal parameters s dnieniem Source Configuration softkey Source Radio frequency RF INPUT SOURCES asics rette o pecie ti en ete d C ERE Inserting Eimit line values titre entes 123 Installation tre eee ret Etico moa erae 8 K Keys MKR ecco MKR gt MKR FUNCT Le EE RUN Ber el ME RUN SINGLE E L Limit check Remote COhttol ii terre catene iocus 264 Limit lines 12 etie xil d Activating Deactivating 119 Comment 5 eno an 121 Compatibility rtr terns 119 jeep 120 Crealrigi E 120 Data points Deactivating Deleting D eleting valies en rete eren 123 Details cue eio EE 120 EGilBig E 120 Inserting values soe DEENEN ed eren rrr tres 123 MANAGING iei nter rie roter nt 117 Margin e M 122 MEDI ICT 121 Remote Control 1a iet reed 264 SAVING M H Selecting iino Threshold Traces KAN Visibilily EE 119 KE 122 Ee CEET 119 EE 122 Lee 120 Lines COMMQUEATION WEE Limit see Limit lines Linking M tK6 S 52 nnns dte EDD aS Loading Settings UE 46 Low pass filter el Lower Level Hysteresis LVL External generator nte etre 39 M Margins Limit lirigs cna n
305. ring the Measurement Parameters lt Bandwidth gt refer to data sheet RST RBW AUTO is set to ON DBW 3MHz Example BAND 1 MHz Sets the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Resolution Bandwidth on page 75 SENSe SWEep COUNt lt SweepCount gt This command defines the number of sweep s that the application uses to average traces In case of continuous sweep mode the application calculates the moving average over the average count In case of single sweep mode the application stops the measurement and calculates the average after the average count has been reached Parameters lt SweepCount gt When you set a sweep count of 0 or 1 the R amp S FPS performs one single sweep in single sweep mode In continuous sweep mode if the sweep count is set to 0 a moving average over 10 sweep s is performed Range 0 to 200000 RST 0 Example SWE COUN 64 Sets the number of sweep s to 64 INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Sweep Average Count on page 77 SENSe SWEep POINts lt SweepPoints gt This command defines the number of sweep points to analyze after a sweep Parameters lt SweepPoints gt Range 101 to 32001 RST 1001 Example SWE POIN 251 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Sweep Points on page 77 11 4 7 d 11 4 7 1 Configurin
306. rload conditions are minimized To determine the optimal reference level a level measurement is performed on the R amp S FPS You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 98 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 211 Mechanical Attenuation Defines the mechanical attenuation for RF input Attenuation Mode Value Mechanical Attenuation The RF attenuation can be set automatically as a function of the selected reference level Auto mode This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting Input and Frontend Settings By default and when Using Electronic Attenuation is not available mechanical attenua tion is applied In Manual mode you can set the RF attenuation in 1 dB steps down to 0 dB Other entries are rounded to the next integer value The range is specified in the data sheet If the defined reference level cannot be set for the defined RF attenuation the refer ence level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed NOTICE Risk of hardware damage due to high power levels When decreasing the attenuation manually ensure that the power level does not exceed the maximum level allowed at the RF input as an overload may lead to hardware damage Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 177 INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 177 Using Electro
307. ror see chapter 4 7 1 8 Displayed Information and Errors on page 39 4 7 1 2 Overview of Supported Generators Generator type Generator type SGS100A12 SMF100A SGS100A6 SMF22 SGT100A3 SMF22B2 SGT100A6 SMF43 SMAO1A SMF43B2 SMA100A3 SMJ03 SMA100A6 SMJ06 SMB100A1 SMUO2 7 SMB100A12 SMUO2B31 SMB100A2 SMUOS3 SMB100A20 SMUO3B31 2 SMB100A3 SMUO4 7 1 Requires firmware version V2 10 x or higher on the signal generator 2 Requires firmware version V1 10 x or higher on the signal generator 3 only for R amp S FPS version 1 21 and higher 4 7 1 3 4 7 1 4 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output Generator type Generator type SMB100A40 SMU04B31 SMB100A6 SMUO6 7 SMBV100A3 SMU06B31 2 SMBV100A6 SMWO03 SMC100A1 SMWO06 SMC100A3 1 Requires firmware version V2 10 x or higher on the signal generator 2 Requires firmware version V1 10 x or higher on the signal generator 3 only for R amp S FPS version 1 21 and higher Generator Setup Files For each signal generator type to be controlled by the R amp S FPS a generator setup file must be configured and stored on the R amp S FPS The setup file defines the frequency and power ranges supported by the generator as well as information required for com munication For the signal generators listed in chapter 4 7 1 2 Overview of Supported Generators on page 33 default setup files
308. rr e UR ER ERO xe Rex ea EEN 211 SENSE JADJUStCONBIJUre IRIG sireni e E E EES E E AEE que dee euer 211 SENSe ADJust FREQuency e SENGEM a Eeer SENSe ADJust SCALe Y AUTTOtCGONTTnuousl esee 212 SENSe AVERagesn COU NL 2 cre bre dE EIER d rrr EE cease re euer deben clita ode ure E Cu E E PAAR SENSeAVER Age sna ESTATES SENSe BANDwidth RESOlutiofi ccrte retire rt erp ect tr tnt ve nt p a SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMOod TYPE nennen NAD En nnne nnns 184 SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuUire 1 ntn tr tat tn cer iter ener tet rnt rnt 169 SENSe ICORRSctiOn METEO ptt ric ie a e e eter on ord ane cv eb E aude E ERE Ee En eda 170 SENSE 819 en UE 170 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer GEN6erator neo tert retta rr rb n re Ree 171 SENSe ICORRSction AE 170 SENSe FILTer lt n gt AOFF SENSe FIELersn gt AWEighted S TATe 2 Nee erac bet ct e ee oe ER 200 SENSe FILTer n CCIR UNWeighted S TATe sese enne nnne 201 SENSe FILTer n CCIR WEIGhted STATe esee nnne nennen enne 200 SENSE a E da o CCI pe C 201 SENSe FIETer ns DEMPhasis TCONStant 6r nnt rt tnt EENS EEN e roh hh re inea 201 IENGe Ei Iernz DEMbhasisl STATel AAA 202 SENSe FILTer n HPASs FREQuency MANUal eese eene rda 202 SENSe FILTer n HPASs FREQuency ABSolute
309. rrent instrument session As soon as the power is switched off on the R amp S FPS the data is cleared To store settings permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FPS User Manual File Name Setup Standard Contains the name of the data file without the path or extension For details on the file name and location see the Data Management topic in the R amp S FPS User Manual Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to volatile memory To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FPS User Manual Configuration Overview Load Standard Setup Standard Loads the selected measurement settings file Remote command SENSe ADEMod lt n gt PRESet STANdard on page 149 Save Standard Setup Standard Saves the current measurement settings for a specific standard as a file with the defined name Remote command SENSe ADEMod lt n gt PRESet STORe on page 150 Delete Standard Setup Standard Deletes the selected standard Standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz can also be deleted A confirmation query is displayed to avoid unintentional deletion o
310. rte e Y Ee Geer 247 CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker cmz TRACE seen Aaaa AEn Eia ESA 247 CALCulate n DELTamarker m X m CAL Culatesr DEETamarkersme XRELatiVe erp re cire ere EES 248 GALCulatesn2 DEE TamatrkKersts GE 248 GALGulate n DELTamarkersem STATe ieto rre terrre rtt rtr tene ments 247 CAL Culatesn gt EE 283 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACTive CALCulatesn LIMit k CbEar IMMeadiate 2 oontra aee EE 274 CAL Culate sn bIMitsk COMMAGnt iiie i cott Fori akan Een prb cem daca inal CAL Culate nzLlMitzks CGONTrol DOMain eene enne nnn RAES ETNEN CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol MODE CAL Culatesn gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol OFF Stirs it etuer recepere aren tbt u eo tere b deeg re ee Ee el We RE EE CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol SPACing CAL Culatesn LIMitsk CONTEOI DATA s icc cce ioca cope erties ads ia metres CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt COPY CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt DELete CAL Culatesn bIMitsko GE 274 CAL Culate nzLlMitzkzLOMerMAhcGm eese enne nennen nn ainin EREA n tren ean CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer MODE m CAL Culatesr bIMitsks E OWet OF EE ee Ee Bee EE CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer SPACing CAL GCulatesn bIMitsks EOWet S TATG unti t re t Eee eene reta eee Serge tre deoa p etes un bud CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer THReshold 2 CALGCu latesn gt Ee Ba CERN EE GAL GCulatesn bIMitS ko NAM
311. rting REH 127 VQ data 126 127 128 288 292 l Q data remote eie cee 281 Measurement settings 103 Peak list sss we 116 le 127 d Le ERN 103 104 127 External generator Activating Deactivating A 53 EE EN Calibration functions gg genet 55 Calibration measurement settings 52 Channel bar information 39 Connections 02 Coupling frequencies aO ETfOUS eege dais 4 99 Generators supported 229 Intetface aene 51 Interface settings 24050 Normalizing 96 Overloading ne 40 Recalling calibration settings 56 Reference level 36 Reference line 96 Reference line position eesesssssssssss 57 Reference line value 42557 Reference position 2x57 Reference trace 96 Reference value 257 Reflection measurement A2 Reflection open measurement Reflection short measurement 96 Remote control 163 i e 50 Transducer factor 36 57 Transmission measurement sssssiiinessesienne 32 56 External reference External generator eni eet tete irent 33 External generator control 4 52 External trigger 4 08 Level power sensor 1461 Level remote 187 Power Sens
312. s ocio raain ieis Maximum number of peaks Peak EXCUrS ON 2 2 iia cic nsa cata se estan gii Remote control 1 cria cani cao acted dE Ge due TE 116 State Peak search Eeer E dee ee ENEE 111 MOd6 tiene sea 110 Reference marker ci eere dee 108 Peaks Marker positioning Next ad ci M Performance IMPrOVINO Ros 29 Performing Analog Demodulation measurement 130 Phase BIEL 26 Deviation scaling 88 c EE N E 92 Phase noise measurement Activating Deactivating 114 Deactivating 24415 MAKET EE 113 Remote COMO oii edet edad a 263 Phase Wrap AGCUVALIAG ET 81 PM Offline feci M 70 PM Spectrum Evaluation method 2 aiken erat 18 PM Time Domain Evaluation method 2 oH oie 15 Position Limit line values dede Ren 122 Power sensors Activating Deactivating a59 Average count 64 Configuration 98 Configuration softkey 58 Continuous Value Update 59 Duty cycle tere 4 01 External power trigger External trigger level 61 FREQUENCY ee 60 Frequency Coupling 60 Measurement time 60 Number of readings en cte eset tees 61 Reference level 60 61 Reference level offset nee nem 61 Selecting 269 Settings 58 Uni
313. s Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored Remote command SENSe PHETer p TRIGger HOLDoff on page 161 Drop Out Time Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again Slope Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger SLOPe on page 162 Amplitude The amplitude is configured in the Amplitude tab of the Input Frontend dialog box Amplitude settings are identical to the base unit For background information on amplitude settings see the R amp S FPS User Manual gt To display this dialog box do one of the following e Select the Input Frontend button in the Analog Demodulation Overview and Switch to the Amplitude tab e Select the AMPT key and then the Amplitude Config softkey Amplitude Settings for RF Input Amplitude settings can be configured via the AMPT key or in the Amplitude dialog box To display the Amplitude dialog box do one of the following e Select Amplitude from the Overview R amp S FPS K7 Configuration e Select the AMPT key and then the Amplitude Config softkey The remote commands required to define these settings are described in chap ter 11 4 5 Configuring the Vertical Axis Amplitude Scaling on page 1
314. s a deemphasis filter with the given time constant Sometimes a modulated signal is extorted by a pre emphasis filter before transmission for example to eliminate frequencies that are more prone to interferences In this case the emphasis function must be reversed after demodulation This is done by the deem phasis filter The deemphasis filter is active in the following demodulation bandwidth range 25 us 25 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 40 MHz 50 us 6 4 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 18 MHz 75 Us 6 4 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 18 MHz 750 us 800 Hz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 3 MHz Depending on the deemphasis filter a minimum demodulation bandwidth is required for an error less than 0 5 dB up to a maximum AF frequency The following table shows the dependencies Deemphasis us 25 us 50 us 75 us 750 us Max AF frequency 25 kHz 12 kHz 8 kHz 800 Hz Required demodulation bandwidth 2200kHz 2100kHz 250kHz 2 6 4 kHz For higher AF frequencies the demodulation bandwidth must be increased Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt DEMPhasis STATe on page 202 SENSe FILTer lt n gt DEMPhasis TCONstant on page 201 Deactivating all AF Filters The All Filter Off button deactivates all AF filters for the selected evaluation Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt AOFF on page 200 Demodulation 5 8 4 Scaling 5 8 4 1 The scaling para
315. s are defined and an overview of predefined standards see chapter A Predefined Standards and Settings on page 286 Configuration According to Digital Standards Digital standard settings are available via the Digital Standards softkey in the MEAS menu or the Overview Setup SlANGANG DEE 45 L Selecting the Storage Location Drive Path Elles esee 45 Ea d NON TREE 45 L Load Standard sceoin FUP OE R ARA EN 46 L Saye Standarda EE 46 L Delete Standard EE 46 L Restore Standard Elles eterne 46 Setup Standard Opens a file selection dialog box to select a predefined setup file The predefined set tings are configured in the R amp S FPS Analog Demodulation application This allows for quick and easy configuration for commonly performed measurements Selecting the Storage Location Drive Path Files Setup Standard Select the storage location of the settings file on the instrument or an external drive The Drive indicates the internal C or any connected external drives e g a USB storage device The Path contains the drive and the complete file path to the currently selected folder The Files list contains all subfolders and files of the currently selected path The default storage location for the settings files is C FPS user predefined AdemodPredefined Note Saving instrument settings in secure user mode In secure user mode all data is stored to volatile memory and is only available during the cu
316. s that storage space is still available Analyzing Results To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FPS User Manual Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR LIST test Stores the current list evaluation results in the test dat file MMEMory STORe lt n gt PEAK lt FileName gt This command exports the marker peak list to a file Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FPS User Manual Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the pathname and extension of the target file Example MMEM STOR PEAK test dat Saves the current marker peak list in the file test dat Usage Event Manual operation See Exporting the Peak List on page 116 n dB Down Marker The following commands control the n dB down markers CAL Culate nz M Abker mmzEUNGCHonNDBfown nennen enne nnne nen
317. s the upper limit to be checked against trace2 average trace CALC LIM CLE Clears the previous limit check results INIT WAI Initiates a new measurement and waits until the last sweep has finished CALC LIMI1 FAIL Queries the result of the upper limit line check CALC LIM3 FAIL Queries the result of the lower limit line check Zooming into the Display Using the Single Zoom DISPlayEWINDowensZOONCAREA ieri oce to eed reete eae tea exerted 277 DISPlay WINDowsn ZOOM S TANG ieaiaia aaa aiaa 278 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on R amp S FPS K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 1 Frequency Sweep 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt x2 gt lt y2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 123 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe State This command turns the zoom on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP ZOOM ON Activa
318. seconds lt TimeX2 gt absolute position in time of the n dB marker to the right of the reference marker in seconds Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC NDBD ON Switches on the n dB down function INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK FUNC NDBD TIME Outputs the time values of the temporary markers Usage Query only Manual operation See n dB down Delta Value on page 117 Phase Noise Measurement Marker The following commands control the phase noise measurement marker function CALOCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion PNOise STATe seen 263 CAL Culate nz M AbkermmzFUNGCHonbhN OiseREGult 264 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise STATe lt State gt This command turns the phase noise measurement at the marker position on and off in the Analog Demodulation application Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK2 FUNC PNO ON Switches on the phase noise measurement for the marker 2 Manual operation See Phase Noise Measurement State on page 114 See Switching All Phase Noise Measurements Off on page 115 Analyzing Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise RESult This command queries the result of a phase noise measurement in the Analog Demod ulation application If necessary the command activates the measurement first Return values lt PhaseNoise gt numeric value The dif
319. set after specific parameter changes have been made Normally the measurement is started again after parameter changes before the mea surement results are analyzed e g using a marker In all cases that require a new measurement after parameter changes the trace is reset automatically to avoid false results e g with span changes For applications that require no reset after parameter changes the automatic reset can be switched off The default setting is off Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE HCONtinuous on page 213 Average Mode Defines the mode with which the trace is averaged over several sweep s A different averaging mode can be defined for each trace This setting is only applicable if trace mode Average is selected How many sweep s are averaged is defined by the Average Count on page 102 Linear The power level values are converted into linear units prior to averag ing After the averaging the data is converted back into its original unit Logarithmic For logarithmic scaling the values are averaged in dBm For linear scaling the behavior is the same as with linear averaging Trace Settings Power Activates linear power averaging The power level values are converted into unit Watt prior to averag ing After the averaging the data is converted back into its original unit Use this mode to average power values in Volts or Amperes cor rectly Remote command SENSe
320. sets the measurement duration for automatic settings to the default value Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE on page 210 Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual This function allows you to change the measurement duration for automatic setting adjustments Enter the value in seconds Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE on page 210 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation on page 209 Upper Level Hysteresis When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed compared to the last mea surement before the reference level is adapted automatically Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer on page 211 Lower Level Hysteresis When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last mea surement before the reference level is adapted automatically Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer on page
321. solution bandwidth Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt CouplingType gt SPAN Couples the step size to the span Available for measurements in the frequency domain for RF spectrum result display RBW Couples the step size to the resolution bandwidth Available for measurements in the time domain for all result displays except RF spectrum OFF Decouples the step size RST SPAN Example FREQ CENT STEP LINK SPAN Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 67 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor lt Factor gt This command defines a step size factor if the center frequency step size is coupled to the span or the resolution bandwidth Parameters lt Factor gt 1 to 100 PCT RST 10 Example FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 20PCT Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 67 11 4 5 Configuring the Vertical Axis Amplitude Scaling The following commands are required to configure the amplitude and vertical axis set tings in a remote environment al Eu E 175 e Configuring the Aitenuaton enne 177 Configuring a PreamplifiBl 2 Ad rete vac nt d tt neg 179 Scalig tie Y AXIS eese e ERR AREAS Aa a a a Ed ASA ERA ETAT 179 11 4 5 1 Amplitude Settings Useful commands for amplitude configuration described elsewhere SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 211 Configuring the Measurement Remote commands exclusive to amplitude configuration C
322. spP s QOL WE 201 SENSe FIL Ter n DEMPhasis TCONStant essere nennen nennt 201 SENSe FIETeren DEMPHasisUSTATe 2212 terret ertet he tn rete tech 202 SENSe FIL Ter n HPASs FREQuency ABSolute esses 202 SENSe FIL Ter n HPASs FREQuency MANUal eese eene 202 Ke NEE KN d KEE 203 SENSe FIL Ter n L PASs FREQuency ABSolute eese 203 SENSe FIL Ter n L PASs FREQuency MANUal cesses nnne nnn nna 203 SENSe FIL Ter n L PASs FREQuency RELative essen 203 SENSeTPIETerensEPASSUSTATe ett rete a tenaci epu te lez o vea ea baa de eh 204 SENSe FILTer lt n gt AWEighted STATe State This command activates deactivates the A weighting filter for the specified evalua tion For details on weighting filters see Weighting on page 86 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example FILT AWE ON Activates the A weighting filter Manual operation See Weighting on page 86 SENSe FILTer lt n gt AOFF This command switches all AF filters for the selected evaluation off Usage Setting only Manual operation See Deactivating all AF Filters on page 87 SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIR WEIGhted STATe State This command activates deactivates the weighted CCIR filter for the specified evalua tion For details on weighting filters see Weighting on page
323. stor tions Thus the measured DUT values are very accurate Approximate normalization As soon as any of the calibration measurement settings are changed the stored refer ence trace will no longer be identical to the new measurement results However if the measurement settings do not deviate too much the measurement results can still be normalized approximately using the stored reference trace This is indicated by the APX label in the channel bar instead of NOR This is the case if one or more of the following values deviate from the calibration set tings coupling RBW VBW SWT reference level RF attenuation e Start or stop frequency output level of external generator detector max peak min peak sample etc frequency deviation at a maximum of 1001 points within the set sweep limits corre sponds to a doubling of the span Differences in level settings between the reference trace and the current instrument settings are taken into account automatically If the span is reduced a linear interpola tion of the intermediate values is applied If the span increases the values at the left or right border of the reference dataset are extrapolated to the current start or stop fre quency i e the reference dataset is extended by constant values Thus the instrument settings can be changed in a wide area without giving up normali zation This reduces the necessity to carry out a new normalization to a minimum
324. sts to activate the limit check and define the trace to be checked in one step see CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt TRACe lt t gt CHECk on page 273 lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC LIM STAT ON Switches on the limit check for limit line 1 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Disable All Lines on page 120 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt TRACe lt t gt CHECk State This command turns the limit check for a specific trace on and off To query the limit check result use CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL Note that this command replaces the two commands from previous signal and spec trum analyzers which are still supported however CALC LIM TRAC see the description of commands for compatibility in the R amp S FPS User Manual 11 8 2 3 Analyzing Results CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt STATe on page 273 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC LIM3 TRAC2 CHEC ON Switches on the limit check for limit line 3 on trace 2 Manual operation See Traces to be Checked on page 119 Checking the Results of a Limit Check CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CLEar IMMediate This command deletes the result of the current limit check The command works on all limit lines in all measurement windows at the same time lt n gt lt k gt are irrelevant Example CALC LIM CLE Deletes the result of the limit check Usage SCP
325. subfolder of the main installation folder The overview allows you to determine which limit lines are available and can be used for the current measurement For details on settings for individual lines see chapter 6 4 2 Limit Line Details on page 120 EE EE EE 118 B TT m 118 lee M 119 In 119 Traces to De E EE 119 Eu ln 119 Included Lines in Overview View Filter eeeeeeeeeeeerneeeeen nenas 119 L Show lines for all modes nennen 119 X ONSE TTD a T TE 119 dE II TT IURI 120 Create New WAG P 120 la 120 CODY EE 120 Delte E LEE 120 Disable All Lines 120 Name The name of the stored limit line Unit The unit in which the y values of the data points of the limit line are defined User Manual 1176 8474 02 06 418 Limit Line Settings and Functions Compatibility Indicates whether the limit line definition is compatible with the current measurement settings Visibility Displays or hides the limit line in the diagram Up to 8 limit lines can be visible at the same time Inactive limit lines can also be displayed in the diagram Remote command CALCulate n LIMit k LOWer STATe on page 268 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer STATe on page 271 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACTive on page 272 Traces to be Checked Defines which traces are automatically ch
326. supply voltage for an external noise source on the R amp S FPS on or off if available External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the R amp S FPS itself for example when measuring the noise level of a DUT Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce on page 173 Trigger 2 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER AUX connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FPS User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FPS No further trigger parameters are available for the con nector Output The R amp S FPS sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Note For offline AF or RF triggers no output signal is provided Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 192 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection on page 192 Output Type Trigger 2 Type of signal to be sent to the output Automatic Settings Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FPS triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FPS is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Tri
327. t String containing the description of the limit line The comment may have up to 40 characters Manual operation See Comment on page 121 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DATA lt LimitLinePoints gt This command defines the horizontal definition points of a limit line lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt LimitLinePoints gt Variable number of x axis values Note that the number of horizontal values has to be the same as the number of vertical values set with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer DATA or CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer DATA If not the R amp S FPS either adds missing values or ignores surplus values The unit is Hz or s RST Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Data points on page 122 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DOMain lt SpanSetting gt This command selects the domain of the limit line lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt SpanSetting gt FREQuency TIME RST FREQuency Manual operation See X Axis on page 122 Analyzing Results CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol MODE lt Mode gt This command selects the horizontal limit line scaling lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Mode gt ABSolute Limit line is defined by absolute physical values Hz or s RELative Limit line is defined by relative values related to the center fre quency frequency domain or the left diagram border time domain RST ABSo
328. t Stop value of the analysis interval in seconds Usage Query only SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRA mode not for the MSRA Master It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements Parameters lt Offset gt This parameter defines the time offset between the capture buf fer start and the start of the extracted application data The off set must be a positive value as the application can only analyze data that is contained in the capture buffer Range 0 to lt Record length gt RST 0 Manual operation See Capture Offset on page 75 11 9 Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results The I Q data to be evaluated in the Analog Demodulation application can not only be measured by the Analog Demodulation application itself it can also be imported to the application provided it has the correct format Furthermore the evaluated IO data from the Analog Demodulation application can be exported for further analysis in exter nal applications For details on importing and exporting UO data see chapter 7 UO Data Import and Export on page 126 MMEMOry LOADHO S KEE 281 MMEMar S TOReshnsdO COMMER EE 282 MMEMon STObRecnzJOSTATe aeniea apaiia erint 282 MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command restores UO data from a file Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the source file Example Loads IQ data from
329. t Scale 60 LOVING DEET 59 Preamplifier GL ET 65 eu ET 65 Presetting Channels ertet hr niti Er tees Default values Ze nee EE Programming examples IEN 275 276 Q Quick Config Reie 102 R R amp S SMA External Generator nere trips 33 R amp S SMW External generator 2 terrere s 33 le EN lee EE EN RBW neger dE Ei 75 Displayed EE 10 Ee een e EE 183 Recalling Calibration settings external generator 56 Reference Ip cro 108 Mate iride ueteri cu HL tee aterert revu 108 Reference frequency External gernerator 1 nene 33 52 Reference level icici eee 63 Auto level 64 98 Bisplayed itio ette eterne itr 10 External Generator sssini iist 36 GI MR ES 63 Offset Power sensor ssssssssssseeee 61 Offset displayed idee tas 10 POSOD RE 91 Power sensor 60 61 Uil t 63 64 IUE 63 Reference line External Generator senge rrr erre 36 Position external generator ssssssssss 57 Shifting external generator 37 57 Value external generator cccsceeesceeteeteeteeeee 57 Reference marker EEN EES 106 Reference trace Ext rrialgeneraltor 5 2 cg 35 36 Storing as transducer factor external generator 36 57 Reference Value itch aet betae 89 POSIUOM Add Eege eed eerie ae 89 Reflection measurement External generator crar pertes 32 Refreshing MSRA app
330. t all Traces and all Table Results is selected Decimal Separator Defines the decimal separator for floating point numerals for the data export files Eval uation programs require different separators in different languages Remote command FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 234 Export Trace to ASCII File Opens a file selection dialog box and saves the selected trace in ASCII format dat to the specified file and directory The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen window by window trace by trace and table row by table row For details on the file format see chapter 11 7 5 Reference ASCII File Export For mat on page 240 Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FPS User Manual Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe on page 234 6 3 Working with Markers in the R amp S FPS Analog Demod ulation application Basically markers in the R amp S FPS Analog Demodulation application are very similar to those in the Spectrum application However some
331. t and Providing Data Output Two different methods are available to define the frequencies for calibration that is to couple the frequencies of the R amp S FPS with those of the signal generator Manual coupling a single frequency is defined e Automatic coupling a series of frequencies is defined one for each sweep point based on the current frequency at the RF input of the R amp S FPS the RF fre quency range covers the currently defined span of the R amp S FPS unless limited by the range of the signal generator Automatic coupling If automatic coupling is used the output frequency of the generator source frequency is calculated as follows Source Freq RF EE Offset Denominator Output frequency of the generator 4 1 where F Generator Output frequency of the generator Fanalyzer Current frequency at the RF input of the R amp S FPS Numerator multiplication factor for the current analyzer frequency Denominator division factor for the current analyzer frequency Forse frequency offset for the current analyzer frequency for example for frequency converting measurements or harmonics measurements The value range for the offset depends on the selected generator The default setting is 0 Hz Offsets other than 0 Hz are indicated by the FRQ label in the channel bar see also chapter 4 7 1 8 Displayed Information and Errors on page 39 Swept frequency range The Fanalyzer Values for the calibration sweep s
332. tart with the start frequency and end with the stop frequency defined in the Frequency settings of the R amp S FPS The resulting output frequencies Result Frequency Start and Result Frequency Stop are displayed in the External Generator Measurement Configuration for reference If the resulting frequency range exeeds the allowed ranges of the signal generator an error message is displayed see chapter 4 7 1 8 Displayed Information and Errors on page 39 and the Result Frequency Start and Result Frequency Stop values are corrected to comply with the range limits The calibration sweep nevertheless covers the entire span defined by the R amp S FPS however no input is received from the generator outside the generator s defined limits Reverse sweep The frequency offset for automatic coupling can be used to sweep in the reverse direc tion To do so define a negative offset in the external generator measurement configu 4 7 1 8 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output ration Note that the frequency is defined as the unsigned value of the equation thus a negative frequency is not possible Example Example for reverse sweep FanalyzerStart 100 MHz F analyzerStop 200 MHz Fofiset 300 MHz Numerator Denominator 1 gt F Generatorstart 200 MHz gt F Generatorstop 100 MHz If the offset is adjusted so that the sweep of the generator crosses the minimum gener ator frequency a message is displayed in
333. te lt n gt SEQuencer MODE lt Mode gt This command selects the way the R amp S FPS application performs measurements sequentially Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 223 A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FPS User Manual Note In order to synchronize to the end of a sequential measurement using OPC OPC or WAI you must use SING1e Sequence mode For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FPS User Manual Suffix n irrelevant Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps Parameters lt Mode gt SINGIe Each measurement is performed once regardless of the chan nel s sweep mode considering each channels sweep count until all measurements in all active channels have been per formed CONTinuous The measurements in each active channel are performed one after the other repeatedly regardless of the channel s sweep mode in the same order until the Sequencer is stopped CDEFined First a single sequence is performed Then only those channels in continuous sweep mode INIT CONT ON are repeated RST CONTinuous Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer REFResh ALL This f
334. tes the zoom mode Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 123 See Restore Original Display on page 124 See R Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 124 11 8 3 2 Using the Multiple Zoom DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA sese 278 DiSblavlfWiNDow nztZOOM ML Tiple zoomzGTATe cece eeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees 279 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area for a multiple zoom To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on ES User Manual 1176 8474 02 06 278 R amp S FPS K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 1 Frequency Sweep 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Suffix lt zoom gt 1 4 Selects the zoom window Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt x2 gt lt y2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 123 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe State This command turns the mutliple zoom on and off Suffix lt zoom gt 1 4 Selects the zoom window If you turn off one of the zo
335. the Phase Noise function Working with Markers in the R amp S FPS Analog Demodulation application Note that phase noise markers are only available for spectrum results not for time domain results and only for normal markers The individual marker settings correspond to those defined in the Marker dialog box Any settings to the marker state or type changed in the Marker Function dialog box are also changed in the Marker dialog box and vice versa To display the Phase Noise Config dialog box do one of the following e Press the MKR FUNC key then select the Select Marker Function softkey Then select the Phase Noise button Select the Phase Noise Config softkey e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker Function Config tab Then select the Phase Noise button Select Phase Noise Config Marker Frequency 20 0 MH Marker 1 Delta 1 bi m A ormi Aa 20 65 dBm d Delta 2 HIE Delta3 ompa Mk Peak Search Delta 4 orme Auto Peak Search Off ele ay s Delta 5 Normiaze ies Delta T Q H Delta 6 All Phase Noise Off For more information see chapter 6 3 3 Measuring Phase Noise on page 112 Phase Noise Measurement State c cccccccreeesecccnteeeeeceeteeeeseecneteneenecnteesseneeteeneaee 114 Switching All Phase Noise Measurements On 115 Phase Noise Measurement State Activates or deactivates phase noise measurement at the
336. the 3 dB bandwidth of the filter but the useful bandwidth which is distortion free with regard to phase and amplitude Therefore the following formulas apply e AM demodulation bandwidth 2 2 x modulation frequency FM demodulation bandwidth 2 2 x frequency deviation modulation frequency e PM demodulation bandwidth 2 2 x modulation frequency x 1 phase deviation demodulation bandwidth must be increased by the carrier offset in addition to the requirement described above This also applies if FM or PM AC coupling has been selected O If the center frequency of the analyzer is not set exactly to the signal frequency the In general the demodulation bandwidth should be as narrow as possible to improve the S N ratio The residual FM caused by noise floor and phase noise increases dra matically with the bandwidth especially with FM For help on determining the adequate demodulation bandwidth see Determining the demodulation bandwidth on page 138 A practical example is described in chapter 9 Measurement Example Demodulating an FM Signal on page 132 R amp S FPS K7 Measurement Basics 4 3 Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset The maximum demodulation bandwidths that can be obtained during the measure ment depending on the sample rate are listed in the tables below for different demod ulation filter types The allowed value range of the measurement time and trigger offset depends on the selected demo
337. the power sensor as an external trigger on page 61 See Trigger Source on page 69 See Free Run on page 69 See External Trigger 1 2 on page 69 See UO Power on page 70 See IF Power on page 70 See FM AM PM RF Offline on page 70 See RF Power on page 70 11 4 7 2 Configuring the Trigger Output The following commands are required to send the trigger signal to one of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors Configuring the Measurement ODTPul nRIGSerspornbDIRBPlIOD EE 192 OUTPUETRIGGEMpOR a LEVE ai ciciecscizsisceasnccaveccascasieaeasanctdasaaancarsassavdivarecessaaseansonmnazenes 192 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYP6 NENNEN NENNEN ENNEN ENNER ENNEN 192 OUTPut TRIGgerspornt PULSe1MMediate 4 oo aues raa etas outre deut ter o ke zu enne 193 OUTPut TRIGger port s PULS L ENG 2 7 21 22 21 Age ERAN occa death de r 193 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection Direction This command selects the trigger direction for trigger ports that serve as an input as well as an output Suffix port Selects the used trigger port 2 TRG AUX Parameters lt Direction gt INPut Port works as an input OUTPut Port works as an output RST INPut Manual operation See Trigger 2 on page 72 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel lt Level gt This command defines the level of the signal generated at the trigger output This command works only if you have selected a user defined output with OUTPut TRIG
338. the specified file Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results Usage Setting only Manual operation See 1 Q Import on page 127 MMEMory STORe lt n gt IQ COMMent Comment This command adds a comment to a file that contains UO data The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Comment gt String containing the comment Example MMEM STOR IQ COMM Device test 1b Creates a description for the export file MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 IC R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores UO data and the comment to the specified file Manual operation See WO Export on page 127 MMEMory STORe lt n gt lQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command writes the captured UO data to a file The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant The file extension is iq tar By default the contents of the file are in 32 bit floating point format Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FPS User Manual Parameters 1 lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C
339. time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before a trigger is detected again Parameters lt DropoutTime gt Dropout time of the trigger Range Osto 10 0s RST 0s Manual operation See Drop Out Time on page 71 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME Offset Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the sweep Parameters Offset RST 0s Example TRIG HOLD 500us Configuring the Measurement Manual operation See Trigger Offset on page 71 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff Period This command defines the holding time before the next trigger event Note that this command can be used for any trigger source not just IF Power despite the legacy keyword Note If you perform gated measurements in combination with the IF Power trigger the R amp S FPS ignores the holding time for frequency sweep FFT sweep zero span and UO data measurements Parameters Period Range Os to 10s RST 0s Example TRIG SOUR EXT Sets an external trigger source TRIG IFP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Manual operation See Trigger Holdoff on page 72 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt This command defines the trigger hysteresis which is only available for IF Power trig ger sources Parameters lt Hysteresis gt Range 3 dB to 50 dB RST 3 dB Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF pow
340. ting the first measured value is set to O rad This setting is only available for PM time domain displays with DC coupling Remote command SENSe ADEMod n PM RPOint X on page 194 Phase Wrap On Off PM Time Domain only Activates deactivates the phase wrap On The phase is displayed in the range 180 M For example if the phase exceeds 180 360 is subtracted from the phase value with the display thus showing gt 180 Off The phase is not wrapped This setting is only available for PM time domain displays with DC coupling Demodulation 5 8 2 Demodulation Spectrum 5 8 2 1 The demodulation spectrum defines which span of the demodulated data is evaluated It is configured in the Spectrum tab of the Demodulation Settings dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Inthe Analog Demodulation Overview select the Demod Settings button then select the Spectrum tab e Select the MEAS CONFIG key and then the Demod Config softkey Then select the Spectrum tab Depending on the evaluation AF or RF display the settings vary ESSI EE 82 e IRE Evaluate cetus eese oci de eet a eee Pra seo o ctn odes rubi dee A eva des eds 83 AF Evaluation These settings are only available for AF Spectrum evaluations not in the time domain Demod Spectrum AfFilter Scaling Unit Settings AF Center AF Start AF St
341. tion See Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denominator Offset on page 54 SOURce EXTernal POWer LEVel Level This command sets the output power of the selected generator Parameters Level numeric value RST 20 dBm Example SOUR EXT POW 30dBm Sets the generator level to 30 dBm Manual operation See Source Power on page 53 SOURce EXTernal STATe State This command activates or deactivates the connected external generator Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Source State on page 53 SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines a level offset for the external generator level Thus for exam ple attenuators or amplifiers at the output of the external generator can be taken into account for the setting Parameters lt Offset gt Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST OdB Example SOUR POW OFFS 10dB Sets the level offset of the external generator to 20 dBm Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Source Offset on page 53 Interface Configuration The following commands are required to configure the interface for the connection to the external generator SOURce EXTermal ROSCillator SOU Roe 22 terrere eh ac ctun iren s 166 SYSTem COMMunicate PEXPress RDEVice GENerator ADDRess eere 167 SYSTem COMMunicate PEXPress RDEVice GENerator ADDRess CATalog
342. tion Ee e EE 15 Demodulation Bandwidth Defines the demodulation bandwidth of the measurement The demodulation band width determines the sample rate with which the input signal is captured and analyzed For recommendations on finding the correct demodulation bandwidth see chapter 4 2 Demodulation Bandwidth on page 26 For details on the relation between demodulation bandwidth and sample rate refer to chapter 4 3 Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset on page 27 Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 184 Demodulation Filter Defines the filter to be used for demodulation For details on sample rates measurement times and trigger offsets for various demod ulation bandwidths when using a Gaussian filter see chapter 4 3 Sample Rate Mea surement Time and Trigger Offset on page 27 User Manual 1176 8474 02 06 74 Data Acquisition Flat Default Gauss Optimizes the settling behaviour of the filter Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod TYPE on page 184 Measurement Time AQT Defines how long data is acquired for demodulatation For details on the measurement time see chapter 4 3 Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset on page 27 Remote command SENSe ADEMod lt n gt MTIMe on page 181 Capture Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRA operating mode It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements it d
343. tive 237 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod FM RESult t RELative 237 CALOCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod PM RESult t RELative 237 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod CARRier RESUlt sss 238 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod FERRor RESult t 238 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod SINad RESult lt t gt ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaes 238 CAL Culate nzM AbkerzmFUNGCHon ADEMod THDREGultets nenen ennnen neerreersrne 239 SENSe TADEModsn s FM OFESGIU oci eade deuce ntederas ceive cases tuse ENER ENEE xu vicis 239 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod AFRequency RESult This command queries the modulation audio frequency for the demodulation method in the selected window lt m gt is irrelevant Parameters lt ModFreq gt Modulation frequency in Hz Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod AM RESult lt t gt lt MeasType gt CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod FM RESult lt t gt lt MeasType gt CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod PM RESult lt t gt lt MeasType gt This command queries the current value of the demodulated signal for the specified trace as displayed in the Result Summary in manual operation Note that all windows with the same evalu
344. to a higher impe dance using a matching pad of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The power loss correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 Parameters Impedance 50 75 RST 500 Example INP IMP 75 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Impedance on page 49 See Unit on page 64 11 4 2 2 Configuring the Measurement INPut SELect lt Source gt This command selects the signal source for measurements i e it defines which con nector is used to input data to the R amp S FPS If no additional input options are installed only RF input is supported Parameters lt Source gt RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector RST RF Manual operation See Radio Frequency State on page 49 Working with Power Sensors The following commands describe how to work with power sensors e Configuring Power SellsOfs erri rre naain aa re lE a EST Een 152 e Configuring Power Sensor Measurements 153 e Triggering with Power Gensors nennen 160 Configuring Power Sensors SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer p CONFigure AUTO STATe 152 Sv Tem CGOMMunicateRDEVice PME Ter COUND A 152 Gv Tem CGOMMunicate RDEVice PME Tercps DEFime eene 153 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer lt p gt CONFigure AUTO STATe lt State gt This command turns automatic assignment of a power sensor to the power sensor index on and off Suffix lt p
345. to the trigger level rising edge NEGative Triggers when the signal drops to the trigger level falling edge RST POSitive Example TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Slope on page 72 TRIGger SEQuence SOURce Source This command selects the trigger source For triggering with AF AM AMRelative FM and PM trigger sources to be successful the measurement time must cover at least 5 periods of the audio signal For details on trigger sources see Trigger Source on page 69 Note on external triggers If a measurement is configured to wait for an external trigger signal in a remote control program remote control is blocked until the trigger is received and the program can continue Make sure this situation is avoided in your remote control programs Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt Source gt IMMediate Free Run EXTernal Trigger signal from the TRIGGER IN connector EXT2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER AUX connector RFPower First intermediate frequency IFPower Second intermediate frequency IQPower Magnitude of sampled UO data For applications that process UO data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applications AF AF power signal FM FM power signal AM corresponds to the RF power signal AMRelative corresponds to the AM signal PM PM power signal RST IMMediate Example TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal Manual operation See Using
346. ts it continuously until stopped While the measurement is running the Continuous Sweep softkey and the RUN CONT key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Continuous Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a channel defined sequence In this case a channel in continuous sweep mode is swept repeatedly Furthermore the RUN CONT key controls the Sequencer not individual sweeps RUN CONT starts the Sequencer in continuous mode For details on the Sequencer see the R amp S FPS User Manual Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 220 Single Sweep RUN SINGLE After triggering starts the number of sweeps set in Sweep Count The measurement stops after the defined number of sweeps has been performed While the measurement is running the Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the high lighted softkey or key again Remote command INITiate lt n gt IMMediate on page 220 Data Acquisition Continue Single Sweep After triggering repeats the number of sweeps set in Sweep Count without deleting the trace of the last
347. uare value Retrieving Results Example CALC FEED XTIM PM TDOM Switches on the PM time domain result display DISP TRAC ON Switches on the trace CALC MARK FUNC ADEM PM PPE Queries the peak value of the demodulated PM trace Usage Query only Manual operation See Result Summary on page 21 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod CARRier RESult This command queries the carrier power which is determined from the Clr Write data lt m gt is irrelevant Return values lt CPower gt Power of the carrier without modulation in dBm Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod FERRor RESult lt t gt This command queries the carrier offset frequency error for FM and PM demodula tion The carrier offset is determined from the current measurement data CLR WRITE The modulation is removed using low pass filtering The offset thus determined differs from that calculated in the SENSe ADEMod lt n gt FM OFFSet command which uses averaging to determine the frequency deviation lt m gt is irrelevant Return values lt CarrOffset gt The deviation of the calculated carrier frequency to the ideal car rier frequency in Hz Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod SINad RESult lt t gt This command queries the result of the signal to noise and distortion SINAD mea surement in the specified window for the specifie
348. ul the measurement time must cover at least 5 periods of the audio signal Parameters lt Level gt Range 100 to 30 RST 20 dBm Default unit dBm Example TRIG LEV AM 30 dBm Sets the RF power signal trigger threshold to 30 dBm Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 71 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel FM Level The command sets the level when FM modulated signals are used as trigger source For triggering to be successful the measurement time must cover at least 5 periods of the audio signal Parameters Level Range 10 to 10 RST 0 Hz Default unit MHz Example TRIG LEM EM 10 kHz Sets the FM trigger threshold to 10 kHz Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 71 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel PM lt Level gt The command sets the level when PM modulated signals are used as trigger source Configuring the Measurement For triggering to be successful the measurement time must cover at least 5 periods of the audio signal Parameters lt Level gt Range 1000 to 1000 RST 0 RAD Default unit RAD DEG Example TRIG LEV PM 1 2 RAD Sets the PM trigger threshold to 1 2 rad Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 71 TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe Type For all trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Parameters Type POSitive NEGative POSitive Triggers when the signal rises
349. ulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed STATe State This command activates or deactivates a marker that defines a fixed reference point for relative marker analysis If necessary the command activates a marker and positions it on the peak power Subsequently you can change the coordinates of the fixed reference independent of the marker The fixed reference is independent of the trace and is applied to all active delta markers Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX ON Switches on the measurement with fixed reference value for all delta markers CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO X 128 MHZ Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y 30 DBM Sets the reference level to 30 dBm Manual operation See Defining a Fixed Reference on page 108 Analyzing Results Marker Peak Lists Useful commands for peak lists described elsewhere CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt PEXCursion on page 251 MMEMory STORe lt n gt PEAK on page 260 chapter 11 8 1 3 Marker Search Settings on page 251 Remote commands exclusive to peak lists CALOCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks ANNotation LABel STATe 257 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks COUNt nennen 257 CALOCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks IMMediate eee 258 CAL Culate nz M Abkermz FUNCHontbtaks Stat 258 C
350. ult Summary 83 B Ge LEE 91 Demodulation bandwidth 14 84 COBGILHOFIS tenero obe dvd eeepc dde 26 Deemphasis filter eee 87 DISPIAVEO terrent rre ita e ttes 10 ENT onde 27 Remote control 184 Troubleshooting EE 138 Denominator Frequencies external generator 38 54 Detectors Relative demodulation sesssssssssss 208 Relative demodulation remote 207 Remote control 206 207 217 Mcr 101 Dev per division SCAN P M 88 Deviation Scalirig E Diagram footer information Digital standards Configuration VSA measurements Direct path REMOTE NN 150 Display configuration SOflKGy druist staan esadi direti a rens 78 Drop out time le GE 71 Trigger Power sensor sene 62 Duplicating Measurement channel remote s 145 Duty cycle Power Sensor ooi nnde tae Seda 61 E Electronic input attenuation sssssssssss 64 65 Errors External Generators oiii ere ri rre ege 39 T e ER p 63 Evaluation Data basis odit et aea e Deua dna 13 E le EE 13 Evaluation methods Ee E 226 Example Remote control of an external generator 171 Examples Remiote Conttol sesasine Ee deese 284 Export format e E 240 Expo
351. unction is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated SySTem SEQuencer SYST SEQ OFF and only in MSRA mode The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by all active MSRA applications The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Example SYST SEQ OFF Deactivates the scheduler INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a new data measurement and waits for the end of the Sweep INIT SEQ REFR Refreshes the display for all channels Usage Event SYSTem SEQuencer State This command turns the Sequencer on and off The Sequencer must be active before any other Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are executed otherwise an error will occur Configuring the Result Display A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FPS User Manual Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 The Sequencer is activated and a sequential measurement is started immediately OFF 0 The Sequencer is deactivated Any running sequential measure ments are stopped Further Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are not available RST 0 Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single Sequencer mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements SYST SEQ OFF 11 6 Configuring the Result Display The following remote commands are required to configure the screen display
352. urements the command returns the bandwidth between the two n dB down markers in Hz In case of time domain measurements the command returns the pulse width between the two n dB down markers in seconds Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC NDBD ON Switches on the n dB down function INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK FUNC NDBD RES Outputs the measured value Usage Query only Manual operation See n dB down Marker State on page 117 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown STATe State This command turns the n dB Down marker function on and off lt n gt lt m gt are irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK FUNC NDBD STAT ON Turns the n dB Down marker on Manual operation See n dB down Marker State on page 117 Analyzing Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown TIME This command queries the position of the n dB down markers on the x axis when mea suring in the time domain lt n gt lt m gt are irrelevant To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 220 Return values lt Timex1 gt absolute position in time of the n dB marker to the left of the ref erence marker in
353. usly in separate windows The results can be displayed as abso lute deviations or relative to a reference value or level The abbreviation AF for Audio Frequency refers to the demodulated AM FM or PM signal Basis for evaluation All evaluations are based on the UO data set acquired during the measurement The spectrum of the modulated signal to be evaluated is determined by the demodulation bandwidth However it can be restricted to a limited span AF Span if only part of the signal is of interest Furthermore the time base for evaluations in the time domain can be restricted to analyze a smaller extract in more detail see chapter 4 6 Time Domain Zoom on page 29 AM MME BOMA EE 13 EM Time DOMA E 14 PM HNEDOM EE 15 AM SOC DEE 16 EM PEC a E E PUR dE RR wwe vada ease PUR Tue esas taunts 17 PIM SPO GWU DE 18 RF Time Domai EE 19 eer 20 Rasull SUMMI ntc trt certet O t qc ad qu oc ttd epo td 21 le EE 22 Marker Peak LiSl reet ceret xx Aeddi 23 AM Time Domain Displays the modulation depth of the demodulated AM signal in versus time R amp S FPS K7 Measurements and Result Displays CF 100 0 MHz Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH XTIM AM REL See on page 226 FM Time Domain Displays the frequency spectrum of the demodulated FM signal versus time User Manual 1176 8474 02 06 14 R amp S FPS K7 Measurements and Result Displays CF 100 0 MHz Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH XTIM FM
354. ut and Frontend Settings Re UMN crated ee 62 L Drop Out DINBEL e ani ota Dat edt dada eet 62 HE EE 62 State Switches the power measurement for all power sensors on or off Note that in addition to this general setting each power sensor can be activated or deactivated individually by the Select setting on each tab However the general setting overrides the individual settings Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt STATe on page 159 Continuous Value Update If activated the power sensor data is updated continuously during a sweep with a long Sweep time and even after a single sweep has completed This function cannot be activated for individual sensors If the power sensor is being used as a trigger see Using the power sensor as an external trigger on page 61 continuous update is not possible this setting is ignored Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt UPDate STATe on page 159 Select Selects the individual power sensor for usage if power measurement is generally acti vated State function The detected serial numbers of the power sensors connected to the instrument are provided in a selection list For each of the four available power sensor indexes Power Sensor 1 Power Sensor 4 which correspond to the tabs in the configura tion dialog one of the detected serial numbers can be assigned The physical sensor is thus assigned to the configuration setting for the selected power sensor index By
355. utomatically or manually in the specified window Parameters lt Mode gt AUTO MAN AUTO Default The number of sweep points is used as the zoom length MAN The zoom length is defined manually using SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM LENGth RST AUTO Example ADEM ZOOM LENG MODE MAN Zoom function uses the length defined manually Manual operation See Length on page 81 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM STARt Time The command selects the start time for the zoomed display of analog demodulated measurements in the specified window The maximum possible value depends on the measurement time which is set and can be queried with the SENSe ADEMod lt n gt MTIMe command If the zoom function is enabled the defined number of sweep points are displayed from the start time specified with this command Parameters lt Time gt Range 0 s to measurement time zoom length RST 0s Example ADEM ZOOM STAT ON Switches on the zoom function ADEM ZOOM STAR 500us Sets the starting point of the display to 500 us 11 4 8 3 Configuring the Measurement Manual operation See Start on page 81 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM STATe State The command enables or disables the time domain zoom function for the analog demodulated measurement data in the specified window If the zoom function is enabled the defined number of sweep points are displayed from the start time specified with SENSe ADEMod lt
356. vel or the hardware settings The reference line determines the range and the scaling of the y axis just as the refer ence level does The normalized reference trace 0 dB directly after calibration is displayed on this ref erence line indicated by a red line in the diagram By default the reference line is dis played at the top of the diagram If you shift the reference line the normalized trace is shifted as well Shifting the reference line and normalized trace You can shift the reference line and thus the normalized trace in the result display by changing the Reference Position or the Reference Value 3ms VBW 2 MHz 100 0 MHz 1001 pts 20 0 MHz 300 0 MHz Fig 4 6 Shifted reference line If the DUT inserts a gain or an attenuation in the measurement this effect can be reflected in the result display on the R amp S FPS To reflect a power offset in the mea surement trace change the Reference Value 4 7 1 7 Coupling the Frequencies As described in chapter 4 7 1 5 Normalization on page 35 normalized measure ment results are very accurate as long as the same settings are used as for calibration Although approximate normalization is possible it is important to consider the required frequencies for calibration in advance The frequencies and levels supported by the connected signal generator are provided for reference with the interface configuration User Manual 1176 8474 02 06 37 Receiving Data Inpu
357. weeps that the application uses to average traces for all windows lt n gt is irrelevant In case of continuous sweeps the application calculates the moving average over the average count In case of single sweep measurements the application stops the measurement and calculates the average after the average count has been reached Parameters lt AverageCount gt If you set a average count of 0 or 1 the application performs one single sweep in single sweep mode In continuous sweep mode if the average count is set to 0 a moving average over 10 sweeps is performed Range 0 to 200000 RST 0 Configuring the Measurement Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Sweep Average Count on page 77 See Average Count on page 102 SENSe AVERage lt n gt STATe lt t gt State This command turns averaging for a particular trace in a particular window on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF Usage SCPI confirmed SENSe JAVERage lt n gt TYPE Mode This command selects the trace averaging mode Parameters lt Mode gt viDeo The logarithmic power values are averaged LiNear The power values are averaged before they are converted to logarithmic values POWer The power level values are converted into unit Watt prior to averaging After the averaging the data is converted back into its original unit RST ViDeo Example AVER TYPE LIN Switches to linear average calcul
358. with the highest signal level in the current frequency range At the same time the optimal reference level is also set see SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 211 Example ADJ FREQ Usage Event Manual operation See Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Freq on page 97 SENSe ADJust LEVel This command initiates a single internal measurement that evaluates and sets the ideal reference level for the current input data and measurement settings This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FPS or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Example ADJ LEV 11 4 10 Configuring the Measurement Usage Event Manual operation See Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level on page 64 SENSe ADJust SCALe Y AUTO CONTinuous State Activates automatic scaling of the y axis in all diagrams according to the current mea surement results Currently auto scaling is only available for AF measurements RF power and RF spectrum measurements are not affected by the auto scaling Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example SENS ADJ SCAL Y AUTO ON Manual operation See AF Auto Scale on page 90 Configuring Standard Traces Useful commands for trace configuration described elsewhere DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SPACing on page 180
359. x axis The unit is either Hz frequency domain or s time domain or dB statistics Range The range depends on the current x axis range Example CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz Manual operation See Marker Table on page 22 See Marker Peak List on page 23 See Marker Position X value on page 106 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y This command queries the position of a marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 220 If the analog demodulator option Analog Demodulation R amp S FPS K7 is activated the query result is output in the following units in the specified window Result display Output unit AM FM Hz PM rad deg defined with UNIT lt n gt ANGLe on page 205 RF dB Range Log or Range Linear 96 96 Range Linear dB Return values Result Result at the marker position Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single measurement mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches marker 2 INIT WAI Starts a measurement and waits for the end CALC MARK2 Y Outputs the measured value of marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker Table on page 22 See Marker Peak List on page 23
360. y displayed by current web browsers that have JavaScript enabled and if the XSLT stylesheet open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt is available Example ScalingFactor Data stored as in t16 and a desired full scale voltage of 1 V ScalingFactor 1 V maximum int16 value 1 V 215 3 0517578125e 5 V Scaling Factor Numerical value Numerical value x ScalingFac tor Minimum negative int16 value 215 32768 1V Maximum positive int16 value 215 1 32767 0 999969482421875 V Example PreviewData in XML lt PreviewData gt lt ArrayOfChannel length 1 gt lt Channel gt PowerVs1 Min lt Arra SEX fl l ime yOfFloat length 256 gt oat 134 float oat 142 float efl oat 140 float ArrayOfFloat Min Max lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 float 70 float float 71 float float 69 float ArrayOfFloat Max PowerVsTime Spectrum Min ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt float 133 float float 111 float B 2 UO Data Binary File lt float gt 111 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Min gt lt Max gt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 67 lt float gt lt float gt 69 lt float gt lt float gt 70 lt float gt lt float gt 69 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Max gt lt Spectrum gt IQ lt Histogram width 64 hei
361. y eniti dn 32 Overview of Supported Generators sss 33 Generator Setup Files esses senten tnnt nnn nnn 34 Calibration MECHARISIM EE 34 Geo TE IE TET 35 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output e Reference Trace Reference Line and Reference Level 36 e Coupling the Frequencies c cccccccceceeceseeeeeeceeeeceeeeteeeeeeceeeeeeaaneeceseeeeeeeseeeeenenes 37 e Displayed Information and Erors eene 39 4 7 1 1 External Generator Connections The external generator is controlled either via a LAN connection or via the PCle inter face of the R amp S FPS supplied with the option Controlling R amp S SGS or R amp S SGT as External Generators via PCle In order to control R amp S SGS or R amp S SGT signal generators as external generators via the R amp S FPS s PCIe interface special drivers must be installed on the R amp S FPS in addition to the optional External Generator Control The required drivers are available from the R amp S SGS R amp S SGT Signal Generator CDs For more information on configuring interfaces see the Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols section in the R amp S FPS User Manual Transmission Measurement This measurement yields the transmission characteristics of a two port network The external generator is used as a signal source It is connected to the input connector of the DUT The input of the R amp S FPS is fed from the output of the DUT A calibration can be carried out
362. y only LAY out WINDow lt n gt REMove This command removes the window specified by the suffix lt n gt from the display in the active measurement channel The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REMove WINDow command Usage Event 11 7 Retrieving Results LAYout WINDow lt n gt REPLace lt WindowType gt This command changes the window type of an existing window specified by the suffix lt n gt in the active measurement channel The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REPLace WINDow com mand To add a new window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt ADD command Parameters lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to replace another one with See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 226 for a list of availa ble window types Retrieving Results The following remote commands are required to retrieve the results from an Analog Demodulation measurement in a remote environment In the Analog Demodulation application when you configure the traces for a window with a specific evaluation e g AM time domain the traces in all windows with the same evaluation are configured identically 11 7 1 Specific commands e Retrieving Trace RESUIRS 0c ccccccccccisescccesseeeeecdectaeesecdenneeectedapeseeeceeteesentennseate 231 e JExporng Trace E EE 234 e Retrieving Result Summary Values eee etnia 236 e Formats
363. y the measured data in one or several columns depending on the measurement which are also separated by a sem icolon The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen window by window trace by trace and table row by table row Generally the format of this ASCII file can be processed by spreadsheet calculation programs e g MS Excel Different language versions of evaluation programs may require a different handling of the decimal point Thus you can define the decimal sep arator to be used decimal point or comma see Decimal Separator on page 104 Table 11 3 ASCII file format for trace export File contents Description Header data Type R amp S FPS Instrument model Version 5 00 Firmware version Date 01 Oct 2006 Date of data set storage Mode ANALYZER Operating mode Preamplifier OFF Preamplifier status Transducer OFF Transducer status Center Freq 55000 Hz Center frequency Freq Offset 0 Hz Frequency offset Start 10000 Hz Stop 100000 Hz Start stop of the display range Unit Hz for span gt 0 s for span 0 dBm dB for statistics mea surements Span 90000 Hz Frequency range 0 Hz in zero span and statistics measure ments Ref Level 30 dBm Reference level Level Offset 0 dB Level offset Rf Att 20 dB Input attenuation EI Att 2 0 dB Electrical attenuation RBW 100000 Hz
364. zed in the UO baseband Importing and exporting UO signals is useful for various applications e Generating and saving UO signals in an RF or baseband signal generator or in external software tools to analyze them with the R amp S FPS later e Capturing and saving UO signals with an RF or baseband signal analyzer to ana lyze them with the R amp S FPS or an external software tool later As opposed to storing trace data which may be averaged or restricted to peak values UO data is stored as it was captured without further processing The data is stored as complex values in 32 bit floating point format Multi channel data is not supported The UO data is stored in a format with the file extension ig tar For a detailed description see the R amp S FPS UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Export only in MSRA mode In MSRA mode UO data can only be exported to other applications I Q data cannot be imported to the MSRA Master or any MSRA applications e lmnporn Export FUQUOTS cec errore eant eR hp note Raduni ne rede REFUS eed A 126 e Howto Export and lmport VQ Data ege rtt i te he t tl en inn 128 Import Export Functions The following import and export functions are available via softkeys in the Save Recall menu which is displayed when you select the Save or Open icon in the tool bar For a description of the other functions in the Save Recall menu see the R amp S FPS User Manual Te ei 127 L MO TEE 127 i io MT

R&S FPS-K7 Analog Demodulation User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S FPS-K7 Analog Demodulation User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S FPS-K7 Analog Demodulation User Manual